Home

GE ML1200 Switch User Manual

1. Address Description Range Step Format Default 0518 Port 22 Number of MAC error packets 0to 1 F9 0 4294967295 051A Port 22 Number of dropped received Oto 1 F9 0 packets 4294967295 051C Port 22 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sen 4294967295 051E Port 22 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sen 4294967295 0520 Port 22 Number of 64 byte fragments 01 1 F9 0 with good CRC 4294967295 0522 Port 23 Number of bytes received Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 0524 Port 23 Number of bytes sent Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 0526 Port 23 Number of frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0528 Port 23 Number of frames sent 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 052A Port 23 Total bytes received 01 1 F9 0 4294967295 052C Port 23 Total frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 052E Port 23 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 0530 Port 23 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 0532 Port 23 Number of frames with CRC 0 to 1 F9 0 error 4294967295 0534 Port 23 Number of oversized frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 0536 Port 23 Number of bad fragments Oto 1 F9 0 received 64 bytes 4294967295 0538 Port 23 Number of jabber frames 01 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 053A Port 23 Number of collisions occurred 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 053C Port 23 Number of late collisions 0 to 1 F9 0 occurred 4294967295 053E Port 2
2. set bootmode type manual ipconfig ip 192 168 5 5 mask 0 0 0 0 dgw 0 0 0 0 set timeout 10 access telnet enable snmp enable web enable exit THHHEHBHHBHHHBHHHHBHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHBHBHHHHBHHHHHHHHBHBHHHHBHBHHBHHBIE User Accounts This area configures user accounts for accessing this system user add user manager level 2 passwd user manager manager lt additional lines deleted for succinct viewing gt MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 IP ADDRESSING IP ADDRESSING In the above example note that all the commands are CLI commands This script provides an insight into the configuration of GE MultiLink switches settings GE Multilin Inc recommends that modifications of this file and the commands should be verified by the User in a test environment prior to use in a live production network To ease the process of uploading the script files use the Script Upload Download capability described above 5 4 6 Saving and Loading EnerVista Software EA NOTE Place the Switch offline while transferring Setting Files to the Switch When transferring Settings Files from one Switch to another the IP address of the originating Switch will also be transferred The user must ther
3. Address Description Range Step Format Default 0630 Port 28 Number of bad fragments 01 1 F9 0 received 64 bytes 4294967295 0632 Port 28 Number of jabber frames 0to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 0634 Port 28 Number of collisions occurred 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0636 Port 28 Number of late collisions 0 to 1 F9 0 occurred 4294967295 0638 Port 28 Number of 64 byte frames 0to 1 F9 0 received sent 4294967295 063A Port 28 Number of 65 to 127 byte 01 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 063C Port 28 Number of 128 to 255 byte 01 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 063E Port 28 Number of 256 to 511 byte 01 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 0640 Port 28 Number of 512 to 1023 byte Oto 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 0642 Port 28 Number of 1023 to maximum 0 to 1 F9 0 byte frames received sent 4294967295 0644 Port 28 Number of MAC error packets Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 0646 Port 28 Number of dropped received 1 F9 0 packets 4294967295 0648 Port 28 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sent 4294967295 064A Port 28 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sent 4294967295 064C Port 28 Number of lt 64 byte fragments 0 to 1 F9 0 with good CRC 4294967295 064 Port 29 Number of bytes received Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 0650 Port 29 Number of bytes sent 0to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0652 Port 29 Number of frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0654
4. 8 4 COMMANDS tec b ue d 8 4 8 4 CONFIGURING TACACS WITH ENERVISTA SECURE WEB MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE 2 5 B utri nai 8 6 9 PORT MIRRORING AND UD Lp Pett roe SETUP DESCRIPTION PORT MIRRORING USING THE COMMAND LINE INTERFACE COMMANDS SC LM M MALE EDU EE COMMANDS FLOW CONTROL BACK PRESSURE BROADCAST STORMS LINK LOSS ALERT ac aim ae cera e eam PORT MIRRORING USING ENERVISTA SECURE WEB MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE pq i totem 9 11 COMMANDS inti to qr bet 9 11 PORT enin 00h eed 9 12 BROADGAST STORMS a6 arti atiende edi eei 9 15 10 VLAN ES Dua OVERVIEW Q TAG VLAN vs PoRT VLAN CONFIGURING PORT VLANS THROUGH THE COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 10 5 DESCRIPTION acci critt nen TUR 10 5 COMMANDS licit et nei mier Ri mb tne s 10 5 CONFIGURING PORT VLANS WITH ENERVISTA SECURE MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL TOC III TABLE OF CONTENTS WEB MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE DESCRIPTION MT C E CONFIGURING TAG VLANS THROUGH THE COMMAND LINE INTERFACE DESCRIPTION es sau OT EE ED MAE COMMANDS innen een m REO RU AM PAE 10 15 CONFIGURING TAG VLANS WITH ENERV
5. MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL B 5 DC POWER INPUT CHAPTER B DC POWER INPUT B 5 UL Requirements for DC powered units 48VDC products shall be installed with a readily accessible disconnect device in the A building installation supply circuit to the product CAUTION 1 Minimum 18AWG cable for connection to a Centralized DC power source 2 Minimum 14AWG cable for connection to a earth wiring 3 Use only with Listed 10 A circuit breaker provided in building installation 4 Complies with FDA radiation performance standards 21 CFR subchapter J or equivalent en Fastening torque of the lugs on the terminal block 9 inch pound max 6 To secure a centralized DC Power Source cable use at least four cable ties to secure the cable to the rack at least 4 inches apart with the first one located within 6 inches of the terminal block B 6 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER B DC POWER INPUT DC POWER INPUT B 6 Operation Operation of Multilink ML1200 Switches with the optional 48 V DC 12 V DC 24 V DC 125 V DC or 250 V DC dual source power input is identical to that of the standard single source DC powered models MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL B 7 DC POWER INPUT CHAPTER B DC POWER INPUT MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL Digital Energy Multilin Multilink ML1200 Managed Field Switch
6. SMTP SNMP SNTP H Statistics F VLAN RO Mode Logout 09 Status disable 1 Edit gt Click the Edit button to configure RO Mode Select the desired ports as shown below then click OK to exit MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 13 21 RAPID SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL CHAPTER 13 RAPID SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL iy Only 2 ports can be selected to Ring Only Mode NOTE F B 195 22 Graphical Display RO Mode Logout IH Qo o Administration E Configuration Access Bridging E O IGMP O IPv6 E OLACP Enter the port number and click OK Logs Port es LE Ba O RADIUS rem E ORSTP Fonta Bridge RSTP po Port 4 Port RSTP Port 5 FO Mode Port 6 a smtp Port SNMP SNTP 5 0 Statistics F VLAN I i JI Cancel gt Select the Enabled option for the Status setting as shown below Graphical Display RO Mode tw OO Administration Configuration Access Bridging IGMP IPv6 O LACP Logs Status disable Port GoS disable RADIUS d E O RSTP Bridge RSTP Port RSTP omm SMTP 0 SNMP 5 Statistics O VLAN gt Save the configuration by clicking on the j icon MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL Digital Energy
7. Access Bridging E O IGMP IP IP Mask Telnet Web SNMP O IPv amp 192 158 5 0 255 255 255 Allowed Allowed Denied e OLACP 192 168 15 1 255 255 255 Allowed Denied Denied e O Logs E Port 065 E RADIUS Ej O RSTP SNMP SNTP z1 Statistics ms E O VLAN Add The window above show the authorized access list for managing the switch Note specific services can be authorized Also note that individual stations or a group of stations with IP addresses can be authorized B It is assumed that users are familiar with IP addressing schemes e g class A B C y subnet masking and masking issues such as how many stations are allowed for a given none subnet mask 6 16 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 ACCESS CONSIDERATIONS ACCESS CONSIDERATIONS In the following example any computer on 10 10 10 0 sub network is allowed note how the subnet mask is used to indicate that Also a specific station with IP address 192 168 15 25 is allowed again note how the subnet mask is used to allow only one specific station in the network and an older station with IP address 192 168 15 15 is removed Graphical Display Access Control Administration El Configuration 0 Access Host Modbus Bridging E O IGMP O v6 El OLACP Logs Port 905 HE O RADIUS 5 9 RSTP SMTP SNMP SNTP Statistics E VLAN MULTILINK M
8. Note that the TCP port field can be left blank port 49 is used as a default port Up to five TACACS servers can be defined 8 6 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 8 ACCESS USING TACACS After the configuration is completed gt Save the settings ACCESS USING TACACS Enable the TACACS services by using the Status drop down menu TACACS ww Configuration 1 192 60 14 12 49 enable Status Enabled somesecret 7 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 8 7 ACCESS USING TACACS CHAPTER 8 ACCESS USING TACACS 8 8 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL Digital Energy Multilin Multilink ML1200 Managed Field Switch Chapter 9 Port Mirroring and Setup 9 1 Port Mirroring 9 1 1 Description This section explains how individual characteristics of a port on a MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch is configured For monitoring a specific port the traffic on a port can be mirrored on another port and viewed by protocol analyzers Other setup includes automatically setting up broadcast storm prevention thresholds An Ethernet switch sends traffic from one port to another port Unlike a switch a hub or a shared network device the traffic is broadcast on each and every port Capturing traffic for protocol analysis or intrusion analysis can be impossible on a switch unless a
9. Connected 0 00 04 Auto detect TCP IP F NUM The default port for telnet is 23 The ML1200 will time out an idle telnet session It may be useful to see who is currently connected to the switch It may also be useful for a person to remotely terminate a telnet session To facilitate this the ML1200 supports the following two commands show session kill session id lt session gt 5 6 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 IP ADDRESSING v NOTE IP ADDRESSING For example ML12004 user ML1200 user 88 USeraccess user peter service telnet enable Telnet Access Enabled ML1200 user exit ML1200 show session Current Sessions SL Sessn Id Connection User Name User Mode 1 NE 163 10 10 14 manager Manager 2 2 163 11 11 1 peter Manager 3 3 163 12 12 16 operator Operator ML12004 kill session id 3 Session Terminated 12008 In the above example the user with username peter is given telnet access Then multiple users telnet into the switch This is shown using the show session command The user operator session is then terminated using the kill session command A maximum of four simultaneous telnet sessions are allowed at any time on the switch The commands in these telnet windows are executed in a round robin fashion that is if one window takes a long time to finish a command the other windows may encounter a delay before the command is completed For example if one window is e
10. amp space and control characters MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 IP ADDRESSING 5 4 3 Displaying configuration IP ADDRESSING Using SWM the need to display specific CLI commands for configuring capabilities is not needed The menus are modular and are alphabetically sorted to display each necessary component in a logical manner This section is repeated from the CLI manudl should the need arise to view the necessary commands The best way to view these commands is to telnet to the switch using the Telnet menu from the Administration menu To display the configuration or to view specific modules configured the show config command is used as described below Syntax show config module lt module name gt Where module name can be Name Areas affected system mode Users settings e g login event Event Log and Alarm settings port Port settings Broadcast Protection and QoS settings bridge Age time setting stp STP RSTP and LLL settings ps Port Security settings mirror Port Mirror settings sntp SNTP settings llan VLAN settings gvrp GVRP settings snmp SNMP settings web Web and SSL TLS settings tacacs TACACS settings auth 802 1x Settings igmp IGMP Settings smtp SMTP settings If the module name is not specified the whole configuration is displayed HARDWARE type ML1200 ML1200 show config slot
11. 12008 show serial Baud Rate 38400 Data 8 Parity No Parity Stop 1 Flow Control None 5 3 2 System Parameters 5 8 The system parameters can be queried and changed To query the system parameters two commands are frequently used show sysconfig and show setup Usage for both commands is illustrated below The following example lists system parameters using the show setup command Most parameters here cannot be changed ML1200 show setup Version ML1200 build 3 3 0 March 19 2009 14 22 43 MAC Address 00 20 06 27 0a e0 IP Address 3 94 247 41 Subnet Mask 255 255 252 0 Gateway Address 3 94 244 1 CLI Mode Manager System Name ML1200 System Description 12 Port Modular Ethernet Switch System Contact multilin tech ge com System Location Markham Ontario System ObjectId 1 3 6 1 4 1 13248 12 7 ML1200 The following example lists system parameters using the show sysconfig command Most parameters here can be changed MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 IP ADDRESSING IP ADDRESSING ML1200 show sysconfig System Name ML1200 System Contact multilin tech ge com System Location Markham Ontario Boot Mode manual Inactivity Timeout min 120 Address Age Interval min 300 Inbound Telnet Enabled Yes Web Agent Enabled Yes Time Zone GMT 05hours 00minutes Day Light Time Rule Canada System UpTime 7 Days 12 Hours 30 Mins 46 Secs ML1200 System v
12. aos RADIUS 5 RSTP owEANJD Z SMTP SNMP gt VLAN Status Start X SNIP E 0 Statistics Cancel OK Ej O VLAN Set Type gt Port Based Tag Based GVRP A specific VLAN can be activated or all VLANs can be activated or disabled gt Click OK to activate VLAN Graphical Display Port Based VLAN Configuration Loot OOO Administration E Configuration Access Alarm Bridging IGMP eA WD E 1 Default VLAN Active 5 6 7 8 O Logs 10 engineering Active 4 O Port 40 Suppor Active 123 2 QoS RADIUS ORSTP SMTP SNMP SNTP F Statistics E VLAN Set Type E Tag Based GVRP Add Status 10 10 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 10 VLAN VLAN After activation note that ports 1 to 3 belong to the new VLAN The VLAN membership of the ports assigned to VLAN 40 now indicates that they are only members of VLAN 40 The default VLAN membership has been terminated on VLAN activation MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 10 11 VLAN CHAPTER 10 VLAN 10 4 Configuring Tag VLANs through the Command Line Interface 10 4 1 Description The VLAN information needs to be propagated on to other switches when multiple switches are connected on a network In these situations it is best to use tag bas
13. e Fiber optic multi mode 100BASE FX Fiber Port ST type twist lock Fiber optic m mode 100BASE FX Fiber Port 1000BASE FX SFP modules FIBER SINGLE MODE CONNECTOR TYPES Fiber Port Fiber optic single mode 100BASE FX Fiber Port EG by DO sce teeth teneis Fiber SFF single mode 100BASE FX Fiber Port 1000BASE FX SFP modules LEDS PER PORT ONE SET AT THE PORT ONE SET ON SWIVEL TOP ON RIGHT SIDE Hom ES Steady ON when media link is operational cR ON with receiver port activity MAI M MEL ON Full Duplex ModeOFF Half Duplex Mode TOO LOS EIU AE ON 100Mbps speedOFF 10 Mbps OPERATING ENVIRONMENT Ambient Temperature ttes 40 to 140 F 40 to 60 C for UL60950 and Component Parts rating 60 to 195 F 50 to 85 C for IEC 60068 Type Test short term rating Storage Temperature e essestentttttttennnnnnnn 60 to 210 F 50 to 100 C Ambient Relative Humidity 596 to 95 non condensing P ise 200 to 13 000 ft 60 to 4000m Conformal Coating humidity protection option Request quote ALARM RELAY CONTACTS One NC indicating internal power one NC software controllable PACKAGING enc edes nnani High strength extruded aluminum Dimensions E 6 85 in Hx 7 5 in W x 2 0 in D 17 4 cm H x 19 1 cm W x 5 08 cm D Cooling Convection fully enc
14. Alarm Bridging E O IGMP OLACP a Logs 4 Port 605 5 O RADIUS O RSTP SMTP SNMP Add E 0 Statistics S MILAN zi Time Zone GMT HH 00 MM 00 Daylight Savings Mone Edit SNTP Server List 5 4 7 Host Names Instead of typing in IP addresses of commonly reached hosts the ML1200 allows hosts to be created with the necessary host names IP addresses user names and passwords gt Use the Configuration gt Access gt Host menu to create host entries as shown below MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 25 IP ADDRESSING CHAPTER 5 IP ADDRESSING Graphical Display E Administration E File Mgmt Ping System El O Set Telnet E User Mgmt Reboot E Configuration Access of IP Access Modbus Alarm Bridging E O IGMP E O LACP Logs E O Port Qos E O RADIUS E O RSTP SMTP SNMP SNTP EK Statistics Host Configuration gt To adda host click the Add button gt Fill in all the fields below to create the necessary host entries Graphical Display Administration File Mgmt OP Access Modbus Alarm E Bridging E O IGMP OLACP Logs E Port GoS 5 O RADIUS E O RSTP SMTP SNMP SNTP Host Configuration Add Host Configuration IP MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION
15. Attenuation Attenuation Cable loss LED aging loss Insertion loss safety factor 4 5 OPERATION 4 2 4 6 CHAPTER 4 OPERATION Multilink ML1200 Managed Field Switch Port Modules This chapter describes each Port Module PM including appearance functionality and status displays 4 2 1 Inspecting the Package and Product This section applies only to Port Modules shipped as separate items i e ML1200 PMs that are not factory installed Examine the shipping container for obvious damage prior to installing a ML1200 PM notify the carrier of any damage you believe occurred during shipment Inspect the contents of this package for any signs of damage and ensure that the items listed below are included The package should contain e 1 or more ML1200 Port Moduless e Installation instructions with illustrations Observing proper ESD grounding procedures remove the 1200 PM s from the shipping container Be sure to keep the shipping container should you need to ship any of the PMs separately at a later date In the event there are items missing or damaged contact your supplier If you need to return the unit use the original shipping container if possible Refer to Chapter 5 for specific return procedures 4 2 2 ML1200 Modules NOTE An important feature of the Multilink ML1200 is the use of Port Modules for flexible mixed media connectivity to RJ 45 copper and various fiber media The first four ports 1 2
16. LACP Wiss BEI YEARS TENTI EROR 50 Gi ze Port 1 Default VLAN Active 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 No a 10 Engineering Pending 2 3 4 No eu 20 Support Pending 4 5 No 2 7 O RADIUS 30 Marketing Pending 5 6 No E RSTP SMTP SNMP SNTP E Statistics 5 VLAN Set Type Port Based 3 GvRP Add Status Port Settings Join amp Leave MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 10 21 VLAN CHAPTER 10 VLAN Graphical Display Tag Based VLAN Configuration tw OOO Administration Configuration 0 Access Alarm Bridging IGMP O LACP Logs Port 605 RADIUS ORSTP gt Default ID 30 vi SMTP SNMP Filter Status Disable SNTP Statistics ed VLAN ID 2 ETT Set Type Port Based Port Settings b Port 5 6 r Tagging Control GVRP Cancel gt Repeat the last two steps for each of the ports and each of the VLANs click on port settings and enable the tag on the port After all the ports are tagged the tagged column should change to Yes for all VLANs To check the status of the tagging gt Select the Configuration gt VLAN gt Tag Based gt Tagging menu Graphical Display Tag Based VLAN Configuration Loot OO Administration Configuration Access Tagging Information Alarm Bridgin
17. passwd user peter Enter New Password Confirm New Password Password has been modified successfully ML1200 user The syntax to modify the privilege level for a specific user is shown below chlevel user lt name gt level lt number gt The following example modifies the privilege level of user peter to Operator privileges ML1200 user chlevel user peter level 1 Access Permission Modified ML1200 user The syntax to set the access privileges for telnet and Web services is shown below useraccess user name service lt telnet web gt lt enable disable gt The following example sets the access privileges for telnet and Web services ML1200 user USeraccess user peter service telnet disable Telnet Access Disabled 1 12 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION 14 9 Help Typing the he1p command lists the commands you can execute at the current privilege level For example typing help at the Operator level shows the following ML1200 gt help logout ping set terminal telnet walkmib Contextless Commands clear enable exit help show whoami alarm ML1200 gt Help for any command that is available at the current context level can be viewed by typing help followed by enough of the command string to identify the command The following syntax applies help command string For example to list the help for the set time command 1200
18. Administration E 0 File Mgmt Create New User Account E Configuration Login ID Peter Password 1 18 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION After successfully adding a user the added user is displayed in the list of users as shown below Graphical Display User Management El Administration File Mgmt Ping System Set 0 Telnet User Mgmt O TACACS User Accounts manager Manager operator Operator Peter Manager O Reboot E Configuration gt To delete a user click on the delete icon Jas shown below Graphical Display User Management E Administration E O File Mgmt Ping System E O Set Telnet User Mgmt TACACS User Accounts manager Manager operator Operator Reboot Configuration MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL INTRODUCTION CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION The firmware will prompt to verify the delete command Are you sure you want to delete user peter Cancel e D To modify the password view the users as described above and click on the edit icon 9 Graphical Display User Management O E Administration File Mgmt O Ping System O Set 0 Telnet User Accounts User
19. FIGURE 10 3 VLAN routing The Multilink ML1200 supports up to 32 VLANs per switch 10 1 2 Tag VLAN vs Port VLAN What is the difference between tag and port VLAN In a nutshell port VLAN sets a specific port or group of ports to belong to a VLAN Port VLANs do not look for VLAN identifier VID information nor does it manipulate the VID information It thus works transparently and propagates the VLAN information along In the tag VLAN an identifier called the VLAN identifier VID is either inserted or manipulated This manipulated VLAN tag allows VLAN information to be propagated across devices or switches allowing VLAN information to span multiple switches As described earlier VLAN is an administratively configured LAN or broadcast domain Instead of going to the wiring closet to move a cable to a different LAN segment the same task can be accomplished remotely by configuring a port on an 802 1Q compliant switch to belong to a different VLAN The ability to move end stations to different broadcast domains by setting membership profiles for each port on centrally managed switches is one of the main advantages of 802 1Q VLANs MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 10 3 VLAN CHAPTER 10 VLAN 802 1Q VLANs aren t limited to one switch VLANs can span many switches Sharing VLANs between switches is achieved by inserting a tag with a VLAN identifier VID into each frame A VID must be assigned for each VL
20. rate threshold port port listyrange rate lt frames sec gt The show broadcast protect command displays the broadcast storm protection settings show broadcast protect In Example 9 3 the broadcast protection is turned on The threshold for port 11 is then set to a lower value of 3500 broadcast frames second 9 8 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 9 PORT MIRRORING AND SETUP PORT MIRRORING AND SETUP Example 9 3 Preventing broadcast storms ML1200 device ML1200 deviceJ show broadcast protect PORT STATUS THRESHOLD frms sec CURR RATE frms sec ACTIVE al Disabled 19531 0 NO 2 Disabled 19531 0 NO 3 Disabled 19531 0 NO 4 Disabled 19531 0 NO 5 Disabled 19531 0 NO 6 Disabled 12531 0 NO ML1200 devicel broadcast protect enable Broadcast Storm Protection enabled ML1200 devicel show broadcast protect PORT STATUS THRESHOLD frms sec CURR RATE frms sec ACTIVE 1 Enabled 19531 0 NO 2 Enabled 19531 0 NO B Enabled 1953A 0 NO 4 Enabled 19531 0 NO 5 Enabled 19531 0 NO 6 Enabled 19531 0 NO ML1200 devicel rate threshold port 11 rate 3500 Broadcast Rate Threshold set ML1200 devicelJ show broadcast protect PORT STATUS THRESHOLD frms sec CURR RATE frms sec ACTIVE 1 Enabled 19531 0 NO 2 Enabled 19531 0 NO B Enabled 3500 0 NO 4 Enabled 19531 0 NO 5 Enabled 19531 0 NO 6 Enabled 1953 0 NO 9 3 5 Link Loss Alert The GE Multilin Universal Relay UR famil
21. 0 Collision Occured D The following figure displays the port statistics for group 3 Graphical Display Administration Configuration Access Bridging E O IGMP LACP Logs H Port QoS RADIUS amp O RSTP SMTP SNMP Statistics Log Statistics VLAN 17 6 Port Statistics b OO ms t Late Collision Occured 0 64 byte Frames 815 65 127 byte Frames 265 128 255 byte Frames 176 256 511 byte Frames 88 512 1023 byte Frames 73 1024 Max byte Frames 296 Dropped Packets 0 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 17 MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS 17 3 Serial Connectivity 17 3 1 Description When using the serial connectivity with applications such as HyperTerminal it may be necessary to optimize the character delays so that the FIFO buffer used in the MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch is not overrun The important parameters to set for any serial connectivity software is to set the line delay to be 500 ms and the character delay to be 50 ms For example using HyperTerminal this can be set under File Properties When the Properties window is open click on the ASCII Setup button and in the Line Delay entry box enter in 500 and in the Character Delay entry box enter in 50 as shown below none Properties Connect To S
22. 0312 Port 12 Number of jabber frames 0to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 0314 Port 12 Number of collisions occurred 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0316 Port 12 Number of late collisions 0 to 1 F9 0 occurred 4294967295 0318 Port 12 Number of 64 byte frames 0to 1 F9 0 received sent 4294967295 031A Port 12 Number of 65 to 127 byte 0to 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 031C Port 12 Number of 128 to 255 byte Oto 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 031E Port 12 Number of 256 to 511 byte 01 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 ED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 18 17 MODBUS PROTOCOL CHAPTER 18 MODBUS PROTOCOL Table 18 1 Modbus memory map Sheet 15 of 23 Address Description Range Step Format Default 0320 Port 12 Number of 512 to 1023 byte 01 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 0322 Port 12 Number of 1023 to maximum 0 to 1 F9 0 byte frames received sent 4294967295 0324 Port 12 Number of MAC error packets Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 0326 Port 12 Number of dropped received Oto 1 F9 0 packets 4294967295 0328 Port 12 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sen 4294967295 032A Port 12 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sen 4294967295 032C Port 12 Number of 64 byte fragments 0to 1 F9 0 with good CRC 4294967295 032E Port 13 Number of bytes received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0330 Port 13 Nu
23. 5 ML1200 access ML1200 access modbus enable Enabling Access to Modbus ML1200 access show modbus Access to Modbus enabled Modbus is Using Port 502 Modbus is Using Device 5 ML1200 access modbus port 602 Modbus Port is set ML1200 access show modbus Access to Modbus enabled Modbus is Using Port 602 Modbus is Using Device 5 ML1200 access modbus port default Modbus Port Set to Default ML1200 access show modbus Access to Modbus enabled Modbus is Using Port 502 Modbus is Using Device 5 18 2 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 18 MODBUS PROTOCOL MODBUS PROTOCOL 18 1 35 EnerVista Settings To modify the Modbus settings through EnerVista Secure Web Management software gt Select the Configuration gt Access gt Modbus menu item Graphical Display Modbus Logout 5 o Administration Configuration Access Host OP Access 5 Bridging E IGMP IPv6 OLACP Logs Status Disabled OS b Port 502 amp RADIUS E ORSTP Device default 0 SMTP Edit SNMP Pee SNTP Statistics Ej VLAN m MULTILINK 1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 18 5 MODBUS PROTOCOL CHAPTER 18 MODBUS PROTOCOL 18 2 Memory Mapping 18 2 1 Modbus Memory Map The Modbus memory map is shown below Refer to Format Codes on page 18 37 for details on the items in the format column Table 18 1 Modbus memory
24. 5 Layer 3 consideration check to see if the routing between the VLANs is working by pinging stations on different VLANs You can rename the default VLAN but you cannot change its VID 1 or delete it from the switch Any ports not specifically assigned to another VLAN will remain assigned to the DEFAULT VLAN VID 1 Changing the number of VLANs supported on the switch requires the changes to be saved for future use To eliminate the changes reboot the switch without saving the changes For VLAN configuration use Configuration gt VLAN menu items as shown below The Port VLANs are active by default MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 10 7 VLAN CHAPTER 10 VLAN Set VLAN Type 0 User Mgmt Reboot E Configuration E O Access Alarm E 0 Bridging E O IGMP E O LACP Logs Port gt VLAN Type ORADIUS E ORSTP 0 SMTP SNMP 0 5 E 0 Statistics Ej O VLAN Port Based E Tag Based O GVRP The currently assigned Port VLANs are displayed as follows Select the Configuration gt VLAN gt Port Based menu item Port Based VLAN Configuration 1 Default VLAN Active 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 o 10 engineering Active 4 10 8 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 10 VLAN VLAN As discussed above ports 1 2 5 5 6 7 and 8 still belong to default VLAN We will now anoth
25. Appendix C Internal DC Dual Source Power Input MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL C l INTERNAL DC DUAL SOURCE POWER INPUT OPTION CHAPTER C INTERNAL DC DUAL SOURCE POWER INPUT OPTION C 1 Specifications for Multilink ML1200 Field Switch C Power Supply Internal 48VDC Dual Source DC Power Connector First Source A A 2nd Source B B GND ground wire connection to the hub chassis screw Input Two separate sources each at 36 60 VDC Power Supply Internal 12VDC Dual Source model 4 Dual Src 12V DC Power Connector First Source A A 2nd Source B B GND ground wire connection to the hub chassis screw Input Two separate sources each at 8 18 VDC Power Supply Internal 24VDC Dual Source model Dual Src 24V DC Power Connector First Source A A 2nd Source B B GND ground wire connection to the hub chassis screw Input Two separate sources each at 18 36 VDC Power Supply Internal 125VDC Dual Source model Dual Src 125V DC Power Connector First Source A A 2nd Source B B GND ground wire connection to the hub chassis screw Input Two separate sources each at 88 150 VDC Power Supply Internal 250VDC Dual Source model Dual Src 250V DC Power Connector First Source A A 2nd Source B B GND ground wire connection to the hub chassis screw Input Two separate sources each at 160 300
26. As recommended in the IEEE 802 1Q VLAN standard the MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch uses single instance STP This means a single spanning tree is created to make sure there are no network loops associated with any of the connections to the switch This works regardless of whether VLANs are configured on the switch Thus these switches do not distinguish between VLANs when identifying redundant physical links The switch automatically senses port identity and type and automatically defines port cost and priority for each type The software allows a manager to adjust the cost priority the mode for each port as well as the global STP parameter values for the switch MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 121 SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL STP 12 2 CHAPTER 12 SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL STP While allowing only one active path through a network at any time STP retains any redundant physical path to serve as a backup blocked path in case the existing active path fails Thus if an active path fails STP automatically activates unblocks an available backup to serve as the new active path for as long as the original active path is down The table below lists the default values of the STP variables Refer to the following section for detailed explanation on the variables By default STP is disabled To use STP it has to be manually enabled Table 12 1 STP default values Variable or
27. Digital Energy Multilin MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch Instruction Manual Firmware Revision 3 3 Manual P N 1601 9095 A1 Manual Order Code GEK 113538 Copyright 2009 GE Multilin GE Multilin 215 Anderson Avenue Markham Ontario Canada L6E 183 Tel 905 294 6222 Fax 905 201 2098 GE Multilin s Quality Internet http www GEmultilin com Management System is registered to I509001 2000 OMI 005094 UL A3775 These instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment nor provide for every possible contingency to be met in connection with installation operation or maintenance Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser s purpose the matter should be referred to the General Electric Company To the extent required the products described herein meet applicable ANSI IEEE and NEMA standards but no such assurance is given with respect to local codes and ordinances because they vary greatly 2009 GE Multilin Incorporated All rights reserved GE Multilin Multilink ML1200 instruction manual for revision 3 3x Multilink 1200 is a registered trademark of GE Multilin Inc NEBS is a trademark of Telcordia Technologies The contents of this manual are the property of GE Multilin Inc This documentation is furnished on license and may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the permi
28. INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 18 MODBUS PROTOCOL MULTILINK ML1200 MANAG MODBUS PROTOCOL Table 18 1 Modbus memory map Sheet 16 of 23 Address Description Range Step Format Default 0358 Port 13 Number of dropped received Oto 1 F9 0 packets 4294967295 035A Port 13 Number of multicast frames Oto 1 F9 0 sen 4294967295 035C Port 13 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sen 4294967295 035E Port 13 Number of 64 byte fragments Oto 1 F9 0 with good CRC 4294967295 0360 Port 14 Number of bytes received Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 0362 Port 14 Number of bytes sent Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 0364 Port 14 Number of frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0366 Port 14 Number of frames sent 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0368 Port 14 Total bytes received Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 036A Port 14 Total frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 036C Port 14 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 036E Port 14 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 0370 Port 14 Number of frames with CRC 0 to 1 F9 0 error 4294967295 0372 Port 14 Number of oversized frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 0374 Port 14 Number of bad fragments 0to 1 F9 0 received 64 bytes 4294967295 0376 Port 14 Number of jabber frames Oto 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 0378 Port 14 Number of collisions occurred 0 to 1
29. No GVRP None Enable Enable Enable Enabled 9 3 4 Broadcast Storms One of the best features of the MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch is its ability to keep broadcast storms from spreading throughout a network Network storms or broadcast storms are characterized by an excessive number of broadcast packets being sent over the network These storms can occur if network equipment is configured incorrectly Storms can reduce network performance and cause bridges routers workstations servers and PCs to slow down or even crash The MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch is capable of detecting and limiting storms on each port A network administrator can also set the maximum rate of broadcast packets frames that are permitted from a particular interface If the maximum number is exceeded a storm condition is declared Once it is determined that a storm is occurring on an interface any additional broadcast packets received on that interface will be dropped until the storm is determined to be over The storm is determined to be over when a one second period elapses with no broadcast packets received MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 9 7 PORT MIRRORING AND SETUP CHAPTER 9 PORT MIRRORING AND SETUP The braoadcast protect command enables or disables the broadcast storm protection capabilities broadcast protect lt enable disable gt The rate threshold command set the rate limit in frames per second
30. Number of frames sent 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 OAF8 Port 22 Total bytes received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 O4FA Port 22 Total frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 O4FC Port 22 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 O4FE Port 22 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 0500 Port 22 Number of frames with CRC 0 to 1 F9 0 error 4294967295 0502 Port 22 Number of oversized frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 0504 Port 22 Number of bad fragments 01 1 F9 0 received 64 bytes 4294967295 0506 Port 22 Number of jabber frames Oto 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 0508 Port 22 Number of collisions occurred 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 050A Port 22 Number of late collisions 0 to 1 F9 0 occurred 4294967295 050C Port 22 Number of 64 byte frames 0to 1 F9 0 received sent 4294967295 050E Port 22 Number of 65 to 127 byte Oto 1 F9 0 rames received sent 4294967295 0510 Port 22 Number of 128 to 255 byte Oto 1 F9 0 rames received sent 4294967295 0512 Port 22 Number of 256 to 511 byte Oto 1 F9 0 rames received sent 4294967295 0514 Port 22 Number of 512 to 1023 byte Oto 1 F9 0 rames received sent 4294967295 0516 Port 22 Number of 1023 to maximum Oto 1 F9 0 byte frames received sent 4294967295 18 26 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 18 MODBUS PROTOCOL MULTILINK ML1200 MANAG MODBUS PROTOCOL Table 18 1 Modbus memory map Sheet 24 of 33
31. O LACP Logs Port Broadcast Protect 0 Settings Security 0005 RADIUS ORSTP 0 SMTP SNMP SNTE gt Mirror Status Monitor Port Sniffer Port Edit 0009 Logout Disabled 0 0 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH gt Set the sniffer port and the port on which the traffic is reflected INSTRUCTION MANUAL PORT MIRRORING AND SETUP CHAPTER 9 PORT MIRRORING AND SETUP Make sure the Mirror Status is also set to enabled for mirroring 0 Ping 4 Port Mirroring bw OO System Ej O Set Telnet E User Mgmt Reboot Configuration 0 Access Alarm Bridging E O IGMP OLACP gt Mirror Status Disabled M Logs E Port 24 cx gt Sniffer Port E Security l gt J Mirroring Qos O RADIUS ORSTP SMTP SNMP 0 5 E 0 Statistics VLAN gt Monitor Port v For security reasons GE Multilin recommends that the port mirroring be disabled using the Edit button and setting the Mirror Status to off once port monitoring is completed Note that 1 Only one port can be set to port mirror at a time 2 Boththe ports monitored port and mirrored port have to belong to the same VLAN 3 The mirrored port shows both incoming as well as outgoing traffic 9 4 2 Port Setup With the ML1200 the specific characteristics of each port can be individually programmed 5 12 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTIO
32. Once that is decided the next few decisions are Who are the authorized and unauthorized users What action should be taken against authorized as well as unauthorized users How are the users identified as authorized or unauthorized MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 ACCESS CONSIDERATIONS ACCESS CONSIDERATIONS 6 2 Configuring Port Security through the Command Line Interface 6 2 1 Commands To configure port security login as a level 2 user or as a manager Once logged in get to the port security configuration level to setup and configure port security with the following command syntax configure port security port security For example using the configure port security command ML1200 configure port security ML1200 port security Alternately the port security command can also be used to enter the port security configuration mode ML1200 port security ML1200 port security From the port security configuration mode the switch can be configured to 1 Auto learn the MAC addresses 2 Specify individual MAC addresses to allow access to the network 3 Validate or change the settings The command syntax for the above actions are allow mac lt address list range gt port lt numllist range gt learn port lt number list gt lt enable disable gt show port security action port lt numllist range gt lt none disable drop gt signal port lt numllist range gt lt none log trap logandtrap
33. Otherwise it is recommended to enable Normal RSTP MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 13 RAPID SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL Graphical Display RSTP Bridge Configuration Administration E Configuration Access Bridging IGMP IPv6 H O LACP Logs 605 ORADIUS Ei O RSTP Designated Root Hello Time Forward Delay Max Age Port RSTP RO Mode SMTP E SNMPv3 E Statistics E VLAN Priority Protocol Status Cancel RAPID SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL OO 80 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 2 15 20 32768 Normal RSTP X EI e Once again if you are not familiar with the STP or RSTP parameter settings is best to use the default values gt Simply enable RSTP or STP and let the system default values prevail After RSTP is enabled the fields are updated Note the Status Time since TC and Designated Root values Graphical Display RSTP Bridge Configuration E Administration E Configuration Access Designated Root E Bridging E O IGMP gt Root Path Cost IPv6 LacP Root Port Logs Protocol Port QoS Bridge ID RADIUS Priority 9 5 Status Port RSTP RO Mode Hello Time SMTP Forward Delay SNMP SNTP Max Age a Hold Time Topol
34. Port Based Y El gt Tag Based Settings 0 Filter Tagging GvRP VLAN Name 1 Default VLAN Active 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 No 50 Add Status PorSelinps Join amp Leave l gt Now add the necessary VLANs In the example below add the VLANs in the following manner e VLAN 1 All ports default VLAN e VLAN 10 Engineering VLAN ports 2 3 4 e VLAN 20 Support VLAN ports 4 5 note that port 4 belongs to VLAN 10 20 10 20 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 10 VLAN VLAN e VLAN 30 Marketing VLAN ports 5 6 note that port 5 belongs to VLAN 20 30 Graphical Display Tag Based VLAN Configuration toot 2009 Administration ee El Configuration A Access Alarm Bridging IGMP fH OLACP gt VLAN ID 30 Logs 5 b VLAN Name Marketing 0005 s ORADUS Coo Sm O RsTP Port 1 O SMTP Pot2 L 0 SNMP Port 3 Li SNTP Port4 Li Statistics 5 v E VLAN Port6 v Set Type Port L Port Based OEE a pl GVRP Cancel OK After adding the ports and defining the VLAN click OK gt Click on Port Settings in the Configuration gt VLAN gt Tag Based menu and enable the tagging for each port Graphical Display Tag Based VLAN Configuration Loot 9 OOQ Administration E Configuration Access Alarm E Bridging ICMP
35. Priority 32768 Ej O RSTP nita Status Disabled Port RSTP RO Made Hello Time 2 SMTP Forward Delay 15 E SNMPv3 SNTP Max Age 20 E 0 Statistics Hold Time 8 E VLAN Topology Change Time Since TC 0 Edit gt Click the Edit button to configure RSTP 15 20 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 13 RAPID SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL RAPID SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL Once in Edit mode change the Status to Enable gt Save Configuration Graphical Display Administration E Configuration H Access amp Bridging E IGMP IPv6 H O LACP Logs Port GoS 5 O RADIUS Ej O RSTP Port RSTP RO Mode SMTP E SNMPv3 SNTP H 0 Statistics Ej 0 VLAN RSTP Bridge Configuration Designated Root Hello Time Forward Delay Max Age Priority Protocol Status 80 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 2 15 20 32768 Normal RSTP ENABLE STATUS _ Cancel OK Logout 2069 THEN SAVE To reset RSTP back to normal mode select Normal RSTP for the Protocol setting Save the configuration by clicking on the j icon gt Select the Configuration gt RSTP gt RO Mode menu as shown below Graphical Display Administration E Configuration H Access E Bridging E IGMP IPv6 H 6 LACP O Logs H Port 605 E ORADIUS O RSTP Bridge RSTP Port RSTP
36. The auth enableand auth disable commands enable or disable the 802 1x authenticator function on the MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch auth lt enable disable gt The setport command configures the port characteristics for an 802 1x network setport port lt numllist range gt status lt enable disable gt control auto forceauth forceunauth initialize lt assert deassert gt The backend port command configure the parameters for EAP over RADIUS backend port lt numllist range gt supptimeout lt 1 240 gt servertimeout lt 1 240 maxreq 1 10 The port argument is mandatory and represents the port s to be configured The supptimeout argument is optional and represents the timeout in seconds the authenticator waits for the supplicant to respond back The default value is 30 seconds and values can range from 1 to 240 seconds The servertimeout argument is optional and represents the timeout in seconds the authenticator waits for the back end RADIUS server to respond The default value is 30 seconds and can range from 1 to 240 seconds The maxreq argument is optional and represents the maximum number of times the authenticator will retransmit an EAP request packet to the Supplicant before it times out the authentication session Its default value is 2 and can be set to any integer value from 1 to 10 The portaccess command sets port access parameters for authenticating PCs or supplicants portaccess port lt numllist rang
37. control and back pressure Example 9 2 Back pressure and flow control ML1200 device ML1200 devicel show flowcontrol XOnLimit 4 XOffLimit 6 ML1200 devicel flowcontrol xonlimit 10 xofflimit 15 XOn Limit set successfully XOff Limit set successfully ML1200 devicel show flowcontrol XOnLimit 10 XOffLimit 15 ML1200 device show backpressure Rx Buffer Threshold 28 continued on next page MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 9 5 PORT MIRRORING AND SETUP CHAPTER 9 PORT MIRRORING AND SETUP Back pressure and flow control continued ML1200 devicel backpressure rxthreshold 30 Rx Buffer Thresbold set successfully ML1200 device show backpressure 9 6 Rx Buffer Threshold 30 ML1200 devicel show port Keys E Enable H Half Duplex M Multiple VLAN s LI Listening F Forwarding Port Name Control Dplx JohnDoe JaneDoe B5 B6 Ej Dd bd ML1200 devicelJ show port 11 D F NA LE B Disable Full Duplex Not Applicable Learning Blocking Media Link Speed Part Auto VlanID GVRP Configuration details of port 11 Port Link State Port Type Port Admin State Port VLAN ID Port Speed Port Duplex Mode Port Auto negotiation State Port STP State Port GVRP State Port Priority Type Port Security Port Flow Control Port Back Pressure Port Link Loss Alert JohnDoe DOWN TP Port Enable aL 10Mbps half duplex Enable NO S
38. etras ta b Dv tut 16 1 SNMP CON CE excels ces d PR TP 16 1 TRAPS STANDARD CONFIGURING SN COMMANDS een a a 16 5 16 6 CONFIGURING SNMP WITH ENERVISTA SECURE WEB MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE EXAMPLE Oen E E T NE CONFIGURING RMON sccsccccssssassssssoccecssssanansssnsscsvassnannassateccec terit ccce haste tn attirer ti e DESCRIPTION COMMANDS e tt een e noces dun MP te 17 1 entia e HS 17 1 COMMANDS UE GER T Rm Itane 17 2 EXAMPLE SU n nc H VIEWING PORT STATISTICS WITH ENERVISTA SECURE WEB MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE 17 5 SERIAL CONNECTIVITY 17 7 DESCRIPTION HISTORY sica COMMANDS PING THROUGH THE COMMAND LINE INTERFACE eessesssessssesseesssesssesssecssesssesssessseesseeeseeees PING THROUGH ENERVISTA SECURE WEB MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE M E M M UM CHANGING COMMAND LINE DESCRIPTION s COMMAND LINE INTERFACE EXAMPLE ENERVISTA EXAMPLE iini deti rei a da CONMANO HD Het MULTILINK 1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL T
39. even though the connector is shielded either unshielded or shielded cables and wiring may be used 2 Connectthe other end of the cable to the corresponding device 3 Usethe LINK LED to ensure proper connectivity by noting that the LED will be illuminated when the unit is powered and proper connection is established 3 2 0 6 Gigabit SFP Small Form factor Pluggable Optical Transceivers The small form factor pluggable SFP is a compact optical transceiver used in optical communications for both telecommunication and data communications applications Due to its compact hot pluggable characteristics SFPs are becoming a very popular choice for various applications The small chassis Multilink ML1200 is designed for industry standard Gb SFPs and Gb SFPCU copper for user selection of the SFP gigabit media type as desired All SFPs used in Multilink ML1200s are compliant with the industry standard Multi Source Agreement MSA ensuring compatibility with a wide range of networking kit It is highly recommended to remove the fiber cable first before removing the SFP transceiver for any reason Not removing the fiber cable first can damage the fiber cable cable connector or optical interfaces It is advised not to remove and insert a SFP transceiver frequently as this may shorten its useful life Always use an ESD wrist strap while handling the SFP transceivers since the SFP modules are static sensitive devices The copper 1000BASE T SFP tra
40. power terminals positive and negative screws The use of Ground GND is optional it connects to the Switch chassis Ensure that each lead is securely tightened MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL
41. protocol thus operates at the layer 7 of the OSI 7 layer stack Additional information on Modbus can be found at http www modbus org and other related sites RFC 1122 Requirements for Internet Hosts Communication Layers defines how Modbus packets can be carried over a TCP IP transport and how Modicon controllers or other PLC devices can communicate over a TCP IP network To facilitate this communications the MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch allows Modbus connectivity As per this RFC Modbus communications take place on TCP port 502 Please make sure the network security devices do not block port 502 If port 502 is blocked which is the normal case with many firewall and other security devices the communications between two Modbus devices over a TCP IP network will not succeed 18 1 2 Command Line Interface Settings The following command line interface settings are available modbus lt enable disable gt modbus port lt port default gt modbus device device default show modbus MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 18 1 MODBUS PROTOCOL CHAPTER 18 MODBUS PROTOCOL The commands enable the Modbus protocol and set the relevant Modbus slave address and communication port values For example ML1200 show ipconfig IP Address 192 168 1 5 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 1 10 ML1200 show modbus Access to Modbus disabaled Modbus is Using Port 502 Modbus is Using Device
42. sen 4294967295 0168 Port 3 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sen 4294967295 016A Port 3 Number of 64 byte fragments 0to 1 F9 0 with good CRC 4294967295 016C Port 4 Number of bytes received 01 1 F9 0 4294967295 016E Port 4 Number of bytes sent 01 1 F9 0 4294967295 0170 Port 4 Number of frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0172 Port 4 Number of frames sent 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0174 Port 4 Total bytes received Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 0176 Port 4 Total frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0178 Port 4 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 017A Port 4 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 017C Port 4 Number of frames with CRC 0 to 1 F9 0 error 4294967295 017E Port 4 Number of oversized frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 0180 Port 4 Number of bad fragments 0to 1 F9 0 received 64 bytes 4294967295 0182 Port 4 Number of jabber frames 01 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 0184 Port 4 Number of collisions occurred 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0186 Port 4 Number of late collisions 0 to 1 F9 0 occurred 4294967295 0188 Port 4 Number of 64 byte frames 0to 1 F9 0 received sent 4294967295 018A Port 4 Number of 65 to 127 byte 0to 1 F9 0 rames received sent 4294967295 018C Port 4 Number of 128 to 255 byte 0to 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 018 Port 4 Number of 256 to 511 byte Oto 1 F9 0 rames received sent 4294967295 0190 Port 4 Number of 512 to 1023
43. 0 frames received sent 4294967295 05A6 Port 25 Number of 128 to 255 byte Oto 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 05A8 Port 25 Number of 256 to 511 byte 01 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 05AA Port 25 Number of 512 to 1023 byte Oto 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 05AC Port 25 Number of 1023 to maximum 0 to 1 F9 0 byte frames received sent 4294967295 O5AE Port 25 Number of MAC error packets Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 0580 Port 25 Number of dropped received Oto 1 F9 0 packets 4294967295 05B2 Port 25 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sen 4294967295 0584 Port 25 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sen 4294967295 05B6 Port 25 Number of 64 byte fragments Oto 1 F9 0 with good CRC 4294967295 05B8 Port 26 Number of bytes received Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 05 Port 26 Number of bytes sent Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 O5BC Port 26 Number of frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 05 Port 26 Number of frames sent 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 ED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 18 29 MODBUS PROTOCOL CHAPTER 18 MODBUS PROTOCOL Table 18 1 Modbus memory map Sheet 27 of 23 Address Description Range Step Format Default 05CO Port 26 Total bytes received 01 1 F9 0 4294967295 0562 Port 26 Total frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0564 Port 26 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received
44. 192 168 5 5 set prompt b b i b 192 168 5 5 4 set prompt n b i b ML1200 192 168 5 5 ML1200 192 168 5 5 4 set prompt Some bthing i Some thing192 168 5 54 set prompt Some bthing b i Some thing 192 168 5 5 17 10 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 17 MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS 17 7 System Events 17 7 1 Description The event log records operating events as single line entries listed in chronological order and are a useful tool for isolating problems Each event log entry is composed of four fields as shown below e Severity field Indicates one of the following Information indicates routine events A Activity indicates activity on the switch D Debug is reserved for GE Multilin C Critical indicates that a severe switch error has occurred and F Fatal indicates that a service has behaved unexpectedly e Date field the date in mm dd yy format as per configured that the entry was placed in the log Time field is the time in hh mm ss format as per configured that the entry was placed in the log Description field is a brief description of the event The event log holds up to 1000 lines in chronological order from the oldest to the newest Each line consists of one complete event message Once the log has received 1000 entries it discards the current oldest line with information level severity only each time a new line is received The event
45. 2 km 6 562 ft 10BASE FL single mode fiber optic s 10 km 32 810 ft MAXIMUM STANDARD FAST ETHERNET SEGMENT LENGTHS 10BASE T CAT 3 4 5 UTP i e 100 m 328 ft 100BASE TX CAT 5 100 m 328 ft Shielded twisted Dait atte tied 150 m 492 ft 100BASE FX half duplex multi mode ss 412 m 1350 ft 100BASE FX full duplex multi mode 100BASE FX half duplex single mode 100BASE FX full duplex single mode E 100BASE FX full duplex Long 40 0 km 132K ft 2 0 km 16 562 ft MAXIMUM STANDARD GIGABIT ETHERNET SEGMENT LENGTHS 1000BASE T CAT5e or higher is 100 m 328 ft 1000BASE SX full duplex multi mode 62 5um cable 220m MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 3 INTRODUCTION 1 4 CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION 1000BASE SX full duplex multi mode 50um cable 550m 1000BASE LX full duplex single mode 62 5um cable 5Km FIBER MULTI MODE CONNECTOR TYPES SUPPORTED Fiber Port ST type 5 Fiber multi mode 10Mb 10BASE FL Fiber Port MTRJ type SFF Fiber multi mode100BASE FX Fiber Port SC type snap in
46. 3 amp 4 of the Multilink ML1200 Switches are fixed RJ 45 copper ports with dual speed 10 100Mbps auto negotiating capability Additionally the switch can accept up to three Port Modules to provide the user with up to 12 additional ports 16 total providing a wide selection of Ethernet copper and fiber media connections with 10 100 and 1000Mbps capability and up to 70km The ML1200 Port modules are not identical to the port modules used in other Multilink products such as the ML2400 and ML1600 For information about other Multilink products please see the applicable manual For a list of ML1200 Port Modules refer to Section 2 1 Each ML1200 Port Module PM is individually described in the sections that follow For the fiber modules in slot D the operational description is the same as the corresponding fiber modules configured in slots B and C described below 4 2 2 1 8 Module 2 100Mb multi mode FX ST twist lock Combo Module The C8 Module is two port ST fiber module at 100MB The module is equipped with dual mode ST type connectors and dual speed copper ports The ST connector functions as a fiber optic transceiver to support 100BASE FX network segments When installed in a MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 4 OPERATION OPERATION Multilink ML1200 Managed Switch the copper port supports the standard distance 100m on each port and the fiber port supports fiber optic cable distances up the IEEE
47. 4294967295 021A Port 7 Number of collisions occurred 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 021C Port 7 Number of late collisions 0 to 1 F9 0 occurred 4294967295 021 Port 7 Number of 64 byte frames 0to 1 F9 0 received sent 4294967295 0220 Port 7 Number of 65 to 127 byte 0to 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 0222 Port 7 Number of 128 to 255 byte Oto 1 F9 0 rames received sent 4294967295 0224 Port 7 Number of 256 to 511 byte 0to 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 0226 Port 7 Number of 512 to 1023 byte Oto 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 0228 Port 7 Number of 1023 to maximum Oto 1 F9 0 byte frames received sent 4294967295 022A Port 7 Number of MAC error packets Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 022C Port 7 Number of dropped received 0to 1 F9 0 packets 4294967295 022E Port 7 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sen 4294967295 0230 Port 7 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sen 4294967295 0232 Port 7 Number of 64 byte fragments 0to 1 F9 0 with good CRC 4294967295 0234 Port 8 Number of bytes received Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 0236 Port 8 Number of bytes sent 0to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0238 Port 8 Number of frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 023A Port 8 Number of frames sent 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 023C Port 8 Total bytes received Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 023E Port 8 Total frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 18 13 MODBUS PROTOCOL CHAPTER 18 MODBUS PROTOCOL Table 18
48. 4294967295 05C6 Port 26 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 05C8 Port 26 Number of frames with CRC 0 to 1 F9 0 error 4294967295 O5CA Port 26 Number of oversized frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 05CC Port 26 Number of bad fragments 01 1 F9 0 received 64 bytes 4294967295 O5CE Port 26 Number of jabber frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 05DO Port 26 Number of collisions occurred 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 05D2 Port 26 Number of late collisions 0 to 1 F9 0 occurred 4294967295 0554 Port 26 Number of 64 byte frames Oto 1 F9 0 received sent 4294967295 05D6 Port 26 Number of 65 to 127 byte Oto 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 05D8 Port 26 Number of 128 to 255 byte Oto 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 05DA Port 26 Number of 256 to 511 byte 01 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 05DC Port 26 Number of 512 to 1023 byte 0to 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 05DE Port 26 Number of 1023 to maximum 0 to 1 F9 0 byte frames received sent 4294967295 05 Port 26 Number of MAC error packets Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 05 2 Port 26 Number of dropped received 0to 1 F9 0 packets 4294967295 05 4 Port 26 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sent 4294967295 05 6 Port 26 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sent 4294967295 05 8 Port 26 Number of 64 byte fragments 0to 1 F9 0 with good CRC 4294967295 O5EA Port 27 Number of bytes received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 O5EC Port 27 Number of
49. 64 byte frames 0to 1 F9 0 received sent 4294967295 O3E2 Port 16 Number of 65 to 127 byte Oto 1 F9 0 rames received sent 4294967295 O3EA Port 16 Number of 128 to 255 byte 0to 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 03E6 Port 16 Number of 256 to 511 byte 0 to 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 03E8 Port 16 Number of 512 to 1023 byte 0 to 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 O3EA Port 16 Number of 1023 to maximum 0 to 1 F9 0 byte frames received sent 4294967295 O3EC Port 16 Number of MAC error packets Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 OSEE Port 16 Number of dropped received Oto 1 F9 0 packets 4294967295 03 0 Port 16 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sen 4294967295 03 2 Port 16 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sen 4294967295 O3FA4 Port 16 Number of 64 byte fragments Oto 1 F9 0 with good CRC 4294967295 03 6 Port 17 Number of bytes received 0to 1 F9 0 4294967295 O3F8 Port 17 Number of bytes sent Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 O3FA Port 17 Number of frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 O3FC Port 17 Number of frames sent 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 O3FE Port 17 Total bytes received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 ED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 18 21 MODBUS PROTOCOL CHAPTER 18 MODBUS PROTOCOL Table 18 1 Modbus memory map Sheet 19 of 33 Address Description Range Step Format Default 0400 Port 17 Total frames
50. 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 Cancel OK After the Tag QoS settings are completed the changes are reflected on the QoS menu screen Graphical Display Quality of Service QoS toot OO Administration E Configuration E 9 Access Bridging IGMP ore Pot QoSTye Priority TagTOSVau amp 3 HO LACE 1 Port High 2 hane 5 Opt ofa 5 None O RADIUS 8 None Hj RSTP 7 Kana os SMTP SNMP SNTP E 0 Statistics E O VLAN 5 If Applicable Edit Weight MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 14 11 QUALITY OF SERVICE CHAPTER 14 QUALITY OF SERVICE In the following window a ToS is enabled on Port 5 As before only the ToS level settings are relevant Graphical Display E O Administration E Configuration Access Bridging E O IGMP 6 IPv6 amp LACP Logs 8j Port oE T RADIUS RSTP SMTP SNMP 0 SNTP F Statistics VLAN Quality of Service QoS Loot 2009 Port 5 X QoS Type ES Priority Settings Applicable For Port Based QoS Only Tag Settings Applicable For Tag Based QoS Only 0 i 2 3 4 5 6 7 TOS Level Settings Applicable For TOS Based QoS Only D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1
51. C by the UL Component Parts method or 50 C to 85 C by the IEC 60068 Type Test method With options such as several popular DC power input types optional AC power and DIN Rail mounting the hardened Multilink ML1200 is a multi purpose Industrial Ethernet Switch The ML1200 managed switches also provide PoE options via power inside PoE modules on one of A Bor C slots and allows the users to select a wide option of combo PoE modules to support 802 3af pd devices See details for PoE modules in sec 5 2 10 The Power Sourcing Equipment PSE is fully compatible with Powered Devices PD e g wireless access MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION CHAPTER 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION points IP phones that comply with the IEEE 802 3af PoE standard The PoE switch ports have an auto sensing algorithm so that they provide power only to 802 3af PoE end devices PoE is managed by a multi stage handshake to protect equipment from damage and to manage power budgets The PoE ports will discontinue supplying power when the PoE powered devices are disconnected This feature supports the 802 3af PoE PSE standard for over current protection under current detection and fault protection 2 2 wv NOTE E NLNLNE E N N NN NS High performance features include non blocking unicast traffic speed on all ports and 802 1p QoS Traffic Prioritization Multilink ML1200 switches are plug and play and are des
52. CHAPTER 18 MODBUS PROTOCOL MULTILINK ML1200 MANAG Table 18 1 Modbus memory map Sheet 6 of 33 MODBUS PROTOCOL Address Description Range Step Format Default 0128 Port 2 Number of 128 to 255 byte 01 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 012A Port 2 Number of 256 to 511 byte Oto 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 012C Port 2 Number of 512 to 1023 byte Oto 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 012E Port 2 Number of 1023 to maximum Oto 1 F9 0 byte frames received sent 4294967295 0130 Port 2 Number of MAC error packets Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 0132 Port 2 Number of dropped received Oto 1 F9 0 packets 4294967295 0134 Port 2 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sen 4294967295 0136 Port 2 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sen 4294967295 0138 Port 2 Number of 64 byte fragments Oto 1 F9 0 with good CRC 4294967295 013A Port 3 Number of bytes received 01 1 F9 0 4294967295 013C Port 3 Number of bytes sent Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 013E Port 3 Number of frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0140 Port 3 Number of frames sent 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0142 Port 3 Total bytes received Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 0144 Port 3 Total frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0146 Port 3 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 0148 Port 3 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 rece
53. E uM MM MM ENERVISTA SECURE WEB LOGGING IN FOR TH PRIVILEGE Ede USER MANAGEMENT creto echte e t ri vri rer ER RETE 1 17 MODIFYING THE PRIVILEGE LEVEL sse tente tten tenent 1 21 mdp 1 22 1 25 METODO FIRMWARE UPDATE S 1 24 UPDATING MULTILINK 1500 FIRMWARE cccssscsssessssssssssssescsscssecssscssessecesscesscessecsses 1 24 SELECTING THE PROPER VERSION UPDATING THROUGH THE COMMAND LINE UPDATING THROUGH THE ENERVISTA SECURE WEB MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE 1 26 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION FE ce as AEAEE dod 2 1 FOUR PORT SFF FIBER MODULES CC MODULE CD MODULE 100MB FIBER 2 3 FOUR PORT COPPER MODULE C1 MODULE MDIX POE POWER PASS THROUGH C2 MODULE MDIX 10 100MB 4 PORT TWO PORT FIBER MODULES 2 100MB FIBER TWO PORT 10 MM FIBER ST 5 SFP GIGABIT 1000MBPS PORT MODULES PACKET PRIORITIZATION 802 1P QOS FRAME BUFFERING AND FLOW MANAGED NETWORK FIRMWARE FOR MULTILINK ML1200 SERIES 2 7 FEATURES AND BENERI acsi UpE Ep a 2 8 BPDER RR RT Rb LAM 2 10 3
54. Em p Priority None 0 Security gt VlanID 1 Mirroring QoS gt STP NO STP ES gt Tagged State Untagged 0 SMTP GVRP No GVRP SNMP SNTP E Statistics T VLAN Cancel OK In these windows Port Number represents the port number on the switch MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 9 13 PORT MIRRORING AND SETUP 9 14 CHAPTER 9 PORT MIRRORING AND SETUP e Port Name assigns a specific name to the port This name is a designated name for the port and can be a server name user name or any other name e Admin Status indicates whether the port can be administered remotely Link indicates the link status In the figure above the link is down implying either there is no connection or the system connected to the port is turned off e Auto Neg sets auto negotiation for 100 Mbps and Gigabit copper ports There is no no auto negotiation for fiber ports as their speeds are fixed e The Port Speed sets the speed to be 10 or 100 Mbps This settings works only with 10 100 ports it is ignored for 10 Mbps ports e The Duplex setting selects full duplex or half duplex capabilities for 10 100 Mbps ports e The Back Pressure displays the state of the back pressure setting on the port This value can be edited in this window e The Flow Control displays the state of the flow control setting on the port This value can be edited in this window e Priority displays the priority set
55. F9 0 4294967295 037A Port 14 Number of late collisions 0 to 1 F9 0 occurred 4294967295 037C Port 14 Number of 64 byte frames Oto 1 F9 0 received sent 4294967295 037E Port 14 Number of 65 to 127 byte Oto 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 0380 Port 14 Number of 128 to 255 byte Oto 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 0382 Port 14 Number of 256 to 511 byte 0to 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 0384 Port 14 Number of 512 to 1023 byte 01 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 0386 Port 14 Number of 1023 to maximum 0 to 1 F9 0 byte frames received sent 4294967295 0388 Port 14 Number of MAC error packets 0to 1 F9 0 4294967295 038A Port 14 Number of dropped received 0to 1 F9 0 packets 4294967295 038C Port 14 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sen 4294967295 038E Port 14 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sen 4294967295 ED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 18 19 MODBUS PROTOCOL CHAPTER 18 MODBUS PROTOCOL Table 18 1 Modbus memory map Sheet 17 of 23 Address Description Range Step Format Default 0390 Port 14 Number of 64 byte fragments Oto 1 F9 0 with good CRC 4294967295 0392 Port 15 Number of bytes received 0to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0394 Port 15 Number of bytes sent Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 0396 Port 15 Number of frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0398 Port 15 Number of
56. F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 O2EA Port 11 Number of 128 to 255 byte Oto 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 O2EC Port 11 Number of 256 to 511 byte Oto 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 O2EE Port 11 Number of 512 to 1023 byte Oto 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 02F0 Port 11 Number of 1023 to maximum 0 to 1 F9 0 byte frames received sent 4294967295 02 2 Port 11 Number of MAC error packets Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 2 4 Port 11 Number of dropped received Oto 1 F9 0 packets 4294967295 02F6 Port 11 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sen 4294967295 O2F8 Port 11 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sen 4294967295 2 Port 11 Number of 64 byte fragments Oto 1 F9 0 with good CRC 4294967295 O2FC Port 12 Number of bytes received Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 O2FE Port 12 Number of bytes sent 0to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0300 Port 12 Number of frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0302 Port 12 Number of frames sent 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0304 Port 12 Total bytes received 0to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0306 Port 12 Total frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0308 Port 12 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 030A Port 12 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 030C Port 12 Number of frames with CRC 0 to 1 F9 0 error 4294967295 030E Port 12 Number of oversized frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 0310 Port 12 Number of bad fragments Oto 1 F9 0 received 64 bytes 4294967295
57. Global Spanning Tree Enabled Ports Protocol Bridge ID Bridge Priority Bridge Forward Delay Bridge Hello Time Bridge Max Age Root Port Root Path Cost Designated Root Designated Root Priority Root Bridge Forward Delay YES VES eleanor Normal STP 80 00 00 20 06 2b e1 54 32768 15 2 20 0 0 80 00 00 20 06 2b e1 54 32768 15 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 12 SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL STP SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL STP priority port lt number list range gt value lt 0 255 0 65535 The cost command is port specific A path cost is assigned to individual ports for the switch to determine which ports are the forwarding points A higher cost means the link is more expensive to use and falls in the passive mode compared to the link with a lower cost Value ranges from 0 to 65535 with a default value of 32768 cost port lt number list range gt value lt 0 65535 gt The port command assigns ports to STP If you are unsure let the software make the decisions The status parameter enables or disables a port from participating in STP discovery Its best to only allow trunk ports to participate in STP End stations need not participate in STP process port port lt number list range gt status lt enable disable gt The timers command changes the STP forward delay hello timer and aging timer values The forward delay parameter indicates the time duration the switch will w
58. LED that is marked as LINK ACT as shown in the diagram 2 1 4 Two Port Fiber Modules 268 100Mb fiber The two port modules are available as two 100Mb fiber ports ST or SC connector styles are available utilizing multi mode or single mode fiber optics These fiber modules may be factory configured with a choice of them in slots B C and D only The fiber port s LEDs indicate status the same as the SFF fiber modules Color coding on the panel of the module shows which LEDs belong to which port 2 100 Mb SC 2 100 Mb ST 2 1 5 Two Port 10 Mb mm Fiber ST Modules The 2 port 10Mb ST fiber modules behave the same as the 29 100Mb ST fiber modules except for the 10Mb speed The default setup on the 10Mb fiber module is half duplex which allows the Multilink ML1200 Switch to connect to any 10Mb hub or media converter or almost any other device with a 10Mb fiber Ethernet port The default setting of the 100Mb fiber module is full duplex User mode control per port through the port settings is the same as the other ML1200 modules The fiber ports support fiber cabling distances according to the 10BASE FL and 100BASE FX standards i e 2km distance for multi mode fiber Single mode for greater distances may be available as a special order request quote MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2 5 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION CHAPTER 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2 1 6 SFP Gigabit 1000Mbps port modules The Gigabit port
59. MANUAL CHAPTER 5 IP ADDRESSING Graphical Display 4 Host Configuration Administration File Mgmt Ping System Set Telnet User Mamt Sine Name 0B E Configuration Access Ol OP Access Modbus Alarm Bridging icmp OLACP Logs Port QoS ORADIUS ORSTP SMTP SNMP SNTP f Statistics zl wne server gateway gel ge2 192 168 5 5 192 168 5 1 192 168 5 5 192 168 5 5 IP ADDRESSING Logout 069 administrato administrato manager EAE manager ahii d Ss B ooo Add To delete or edit the entries use the delete or edit icons next to each entry shown above 5 4 8 Erasing Configuration Kill Config option using SWM To erase the configuration and reset the configurations to factory defaults you can use the kill config option from Administration tab by selecting kill config User also has the option to save one module from defaulting back to factory defaults by ww checking the module box before issuing kill Config command NOTE MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL IP ADDRESSING CHAPTER 5 IP ADDRESSING In the example below system module box has been checked In this case after kill Config command is issued by pressing the OK button the Switch will perform a factory dump restoring all the Switch settings back to factory defaults except for the System settings
60. MANUAL IGMP The figure below shows a network running IGMP Multicast Data Stream Router Router il PCX Video Server Wireless Wireless Hi Communications D Communications D 0 Router O Router IGMP is Switch 2 running here TES iit Jp EIE PC 1 PC2 PC 3 PC 4 PC 5 PC 6 Video Client Video Client IGMP is NOT running here FIGURE 15 1 Advantages of using IGMP In the above diagram e PCs1and4 switch 2 and all of the routers are members of an IP multicast group the routers operate as queriers e Switch 1 ignores IGMP traffic and does not distinguish between IP multicast group members and non members Thus sends large amounts of unwanted multicast traffic to PCs 2 and 3 e Switch 2 is recognizing IGMP traffic and learns that PC 4 is in the IP multicast group receiving multicast data from the video server PC XJ Switch 2 then sends the multicast data only to PC 4 thus avoiding unwanted multicast traffic on the ports for PCs 5 and 6 The next figure below shows a network running IP multicasting using IGMP without a multicast router In this case the IGMP configured switch runs as a querier PCs 2 5 and 6 are members of the same IP multicast group IGMP is configured on switches 3 and 4 15 3 IGMP 15 4 CHAPTER 15 IGMP Either of these switches can operate as querier because a multica
61. ML2400 ML1600 switches and UR switch module provide power and efficiency in a managed Ethernet platform A full range of industry standard software functions enables the versatile MultiLink products to perform effectively in a wide range of managed LAN Boot Made manual gt Gateway 0 0 0 0 IP Address 192 168 100 3 Mac Address Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 gt Uptime 0 Days 00 10 55 1 5 6 Exiting gt To exit or logout click on the logout button gt Graphical Display EnerVista MultiLink Software Logout 9 o o E Administration Configuration Device Ports Logical View 3 Muhilin EnerVista MultiLink Software combined with the MultiLink Model ML2400 ML1600 switches and UR switch module provide power and efficiency in a managed Ethernet platform A full range of industry standard software functions enables the versatile MultiLink products to perform effectively in a wide range of managed LAN Boot Mode manual b Gateway 0 0 0 0 gt IP Address 192 168 100 3 Mac Address 00 20 06 2c 28 c0 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 gt Uptime 0 Days 00 10 55 MULTILINK 1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION gt Confirm the logout by selecting OK in the pop up window Warning Are you sure you want to log out Cancel 4 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL INTRODUCTION CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION 1 6 ML1200Firm
62. MULTILINK MLI200 FIELD SWITCH assassin C2 DC DUAL SOURCE MULTILINK ML1200 WITH 48 V DC 24 V DC POWER INPUT OPTION AND 125 V DC DUALSOURCE OPTION attire tto otto C3 DUAL SOURCE OPTION THEORY OF OPERATION erotic C 4 FEATURES AND BENEFITS OF THE DUAL SOURCE DESIGN ostentant C5 JU Te Pig P euo EU C 6 TOC VI MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL Digital Energy Multilin Multilink ML1200 Managed Field Switch Chapter 1 Introduction 11 Getting Started 1 11 Inspecting the Package and Product Examine the shipping container for obvious damage prior to installing this product notify the carrier of any damage that you believe occurred during shipment or delivery Inspect the contents of this package for any signs of damage and ensure that the items listed below are included This package should contain e Multilink ML1200 Managed Field Switch base unit configured with user selected port module options installed e 1 Set of two metal vertical mounting brackets with screws to the case e 1 Installation and User Guide this manual e 1 Product Registration Card Remove the items from the shipping container Be sure to keep the shipping container should you need to re ship the unit at a later date To validate the product warranty please complete and return the enclosed Product Registration Card to GE Multilin as soon as possible In the event there are items missing or damaged contact the pa
63. Monitor Port Port 2 set as Sniffer Port ML1200 port mirror prtmr enable Port Mirroring Enabled ML1200 port mirror exit ML1200 show port mirror Sniffer Port 2 Monitor Port 1 Mirroring State enabled ML1200 Once port monitoring is completed GE strongly recommends that the port mirroring be disabled using the prtmr disable command for security reasons 1 Only one port can be set to port mirror at a time 2 Both the ports monitored port and mirrored port have to belong to the same VLAN 3 The mirrored port shows both incoming as well as outgoing traffic MULTILINK 1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 9 PORT MIRRORING AND SETUP PORT MIRRORING AND SETUP 9 3 Port Setup 9 3 1 Commands Each port on the MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch can be setup specific port characteristics The commands for setting the port characteristics are shown below The device command enters the device configuration mode device The setport command configures the port characteristics setport port lt port list range gt name name speed lt 10 100 gt duplex lt half full gt auto enable disable flow lt enable disable gt bp lt enable disable gt status enable disable lla lt enable disable gt The arguments for the setport command are defined as follows e The device argument sets up the MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch in the device configuration mode e T
64. Number of 512 to 1023 byte Oto 1 F9 0 rames received sent 4294967295 0674 Port 29 Number of 1023 to maximum 0 to 1 F9 0 byte frames received sent 4294967295 0676 Port 29 Number of MAC error packets 0to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0678 Port 29 Number of dropped received 01 1 F9 0 packets 4294967295 067A Port 29 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sen 4294967295 067C Port 29 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sen 4294967295 067E Port 29 Number of 64 byte fragments Oto 1 F9 0 with good CRC 4294967295 0680 Port 30 Number of bytes received 0to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0682 Port 30 Number of bytes sent Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 0684 Port 30 Number of frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0686 Port 30 Number of frames sent 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0688 Port 30 Total bytes received 01 1 F9 0 4294967295 068A Port 30 Total frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 068C Port 30 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 068E Port 30 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 0690 Port 30 Number of frames with CRC 0 to 1 F9 0 error 4294967295 0692 Port 30 Number of oversized frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 0694 Port 30 Number of bad fragments 01 1 F9 0 received 64 bytes 4294967295 0696 Port 30 Number of jabber frames Oto 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 0698 Port 30 Number of collisions occurred 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 069A Port 30 Number of late collisions 0 to 1 F9 0 occurred 4294967295 069C Port 3
65. Oto 1 F9 0 received sent 4294967295 0284 Port 9 Number of 65 to 127 byte Oto 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 0286 Port 9 Number of 128 to 255 byte Oto 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 0288 Port 9 Number of 256 to 511 byte Oto 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 028A Port 9 Number of 512 to 1023 byte 01 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 028C Port 9 Number of 1023 to maximum 01 1 F9 0 byte frames received sent 4294967295 028 Port 9 Number of MAC error packets Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 0290 Port 9 Number of dropped received Oto 1 F9 0 packets 4294967295 0292 Port 9 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sen 4294967295 0294 Port 9 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sen 4294967295 0296 Port 9 Number of 64 byte fragments Oto 1 F9 0 with good CRC 4294967295 0298 Port 10 Number of bytes received 01 1 F9 0 4294967295 029A Port 10 Number of bytes sent Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 029C Port 10 Number of frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 029E Port 10 Number of frames sent 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 02A0 Port 10 Total bytes received Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 02A2 Port 10 Total frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 02A4 Port 10 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 02A6 Port 10 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 0248 Port 10 Number of frames with CRC 0 to 1 F9 0 error 4294967295 02AA Port 10 Number of oversized frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 02 Port
66. Port 21 Number of late collisions 0 to 1 F9 0 occurred 4294967295 04DA Port 21 Number of 64 byte frames Oto 1 F9 0 received sent 4294967295 04DC Port 21 Number of 65 to 127 byte 0 to 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 O4DE Port 21 Number of 128 to 255 byte 0 to 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 ED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 18 25 MODBUS PROTOCOL CHAPTER 18 MODBUS PROTOCOL Table 18 1 Modbus memory map Sheet 23 of 23 Address Description Range Step Format Default 04 0 Port 21 Number of 256 to 511 byte 01 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 04 2 Port 21 Number of 512 to 1023 byte 0to 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 O4E4 Port 21 Number of 1023 to maximum 0 to 1 F9 0 byte frames received sent 4294967295 O4E6 Port 21 Number of MAC error packets 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 04 8 Port 21 Number of dropped received 0to 1 F9 0 packets 4294967295 O4EA Port 21 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sent 4294967295 O4EC Port 21 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sent 4294967295 O4EE Port 21 Number of lt 64 byte fragments 0 to 1 F9 0 with good CRC 4294967295 O4FO Port 22 Number of bytes received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 O4F2 Port 22 Number of bytes sent 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 O4F4 Port 22 Number of frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 O4F6 Port 22
67. PrivPass Level Subtree ML1200 snmpv3 show user id 2 ERROR Entry is not active ML1200 snmpv3 show user id 1 User ID g al User Name jsmith User Type read write Auth Pass something Priv Pass Auth Type MD5 Auth Level auth Subtree ML1200 snmpv3 exit 12008 16 10 MULTILINK 1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 16 SNMP SNMP 16 3 Configuring SNMP with EnerVista Secure Web Management software 16 3 1 Example Most SNMP v1 capabilities can be set using the EnerVista Secure Web Management software For SNMP v2 and v3 parameters please refer to Configuring SNMP through the Command Line Interface on page 16 5 SNMP variables are used in conjunction with Alert definitions Alert Definitions are covered in the next chapter To configure SNMP Select the Configuration SNMP menu item Graphical Display SNMP Configuration Logout In eo o Administration avers E Configuration Access SNMP Community Names 4 Bridging IGMP Ope gt Set Community Name private amp OLACP O Logs b Trap Community Name public Port GoS Edit F RADIUS SNMP Manager Stations Bio SMTP O SNTP F Statistics VLAN gt Get Community Name public Add SNMP Trap Stations ee Add Use the Edit button to change the SNMP community parameters Use the Add buttons to add the managemen
68. SMTP SNMP Statistics 4 E VLAN Time Zone GMT HH 00 MM 00 Daylight Savings None Edit SNTP Server List Add The edit button allows editing of the SNTP parameters as shown below Adding or deleting SNTP servers is accomplished by using the add and delete buttons Clicking the edit button allows the specific SNTP parameter settings to be modified MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 11 IP ADDRESSING Graphical Display Administration Configuration Bj O Access Alarm Bridging H O IGMP E OQ LACP Logs Port GoS amp ORADIUS Ej ORSTP SMTP SNMP Statistics E VLAN SNTP Configuration CHAPTER 5 IP ADDRESSING Logout eo o SNTP Configuration Settings SNTP Status Time Zone Hour Minute Zone Daylight Savings Cancel Disabled None ha After the proper SNTP values are entered click OK to register the changes or click Cancel to back out from the changes made To add an SNTP server click the add button on the Configuration gt SNTP menu The menu prompts you to add IP address of an SNTP server the time out in seconds and the number of retries before the time synchronization effort is aborted The Sync Now button allows synchronization as soon as the server information is added NOTE i If your site has internet access there are several SNTP servers available online A quick w s
69. SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 1 MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS CHAPTER 17 MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS e SMTP alerts can be enabled or disabled globally e User can defined a global default SMTP server identified by its IP address TCP port and retry count e User can add up to five SMTP alert recipients Each recipient is identified by an ID and e mail address The e mail address needs to be a valid address and can be an alias setup for distribution to a larger audience e Filters are provided for each recipient to allow only certain categories of traps and events be sent by e mail e Each recipient can have its own SMTP server and TCP port number if this is not defined on a certain recipient the default SMTP server and TCP port number is used 17 1 2 Commands The smtp command configures the SNMP alerts to be sent via e mail smtp smtp enable disable The show smtp command displays the current SMTP global settings and recipients displays the currently configured recipients of e mail alerts show smtp config recipients The add command adds a specific id where id represents the recipient identification and ranges from 1 to 5 The software allows a maximum of 5 recipients add id 1 5 email lt email addr gt traps all none S R E fevents lt all none I A C F D gt ipe ip addr port lt 1 65535 gt domain lt domain gt The add command has the following additional parameters e The email parameter is the e mail add
70. Since dynamic VLANs operate as tagged VLANs and it is possible that a tagged port on one device may not communicate with an untagged port on another device GE Multilin recommends that you use tagged VLANs for the static VLANs A dynamic VLAN continues to exist on a port for as long as the port continues to receive advertisements of that VLAN from another device connected to that port or until you Convert the VLAN to a static VLAN e Reconfigure the port to Block or Disable e Disable GVRP e Reboot the switch MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL VLAN REGISTRATION OVER GARP CHAPTER 11 VLAN REGISTRATION OVER GARP The time to live for dynamic VLANs is 10 seconds That is if a port has not received an advertisement for an existing dynamic VLAN during the last 10 seconds the port removes itself from that dynamic VLAN 11 6 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 11 VLAN REGISTRATION OVER GARP VLAN REGISTRATION OVER GARP 11 2 Configuring GVRP through the Command Line Interface 11 2 1 Commands The commands used for configuring GVRP are shown below The gvrp command enables or disables GVRP gvrp lt enable disable gt The show gvrp command displays whether GVRP is disabled along with the current settings for the maximum number of VLANs and the current primary VLAN show gvrp The set ports command set the state of the port to learn block or disable for GVRP Note the defa
71. State SSNOSSIP Port GVRP State No GVRP Port Priority Type None Port Security Enable Port Flow Control Enable Port Back Pressure Enable Port Link Loss Alert Disable ML1200 devicelJ setport port 3 llasenable Link Loss Alert enabled ML1200 deviceHtt show port 3 Configuration details of port 3 Port Name JohnDoe Port Link State DOWN Port Type TP Pore Port Admin State Enable Port VLAN ID du Port Speed 100Mbps Port Duplex Mode half duplex Port Auto negotiation State Enable Port STP State NO STP Port GVRP State No GVRP Port Priority Type None Port Security Enable Port Flow Control Enable Port Back Pressure Enable Port Link Loss Alert Enable MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 9 PORT MIRRORING AND SETUP 9 4 9 4 1 Commands PORT MIRRORING AND SETUP Port Mirroring using EnerVista Secure Web Management software Monitoring a specific port can be done by port mirroring Mirroring traffic from one port to another port allows analysis of the traffic on that port To enable port mirroring as well as setting up the ports to be sniffed Select the Configuration gt Port gt Mirroring menu item Port Mirroring Graphical Display Administration File Mgmt O Ping System E O Set ge B EE Telnet User Mgmt Reboot Configuration Access Alarm Bridging O IGMP
72. Static Active None OLACP 10 Engineering Static Active None Logs 20 Support Static Active None Port 30 Marketing Static Active None 0 005 E ORADIUS ORSTP gt Ports SMTP Pot Status 5 Pea 1 Disable s omaes 4 Disable eye 5 Disable Port Based Disable E Tag Based T Disable Settings 0 Fitter Tagging om E From the GVRP menu screen GVRP can be enabled or disabled using the drop down menu Each specific port can be put in the Learn Disable or Enable state as shown in Table 11 2 GVRP options on page 11 5 The unknown VLAN parameters are configured on a per interface basis using the CLI The tagged untagged Auto and Forbid options are configured in the VLAN context Since dynamic VLANs operate as tagged VLANs and it is possible that a tagged port on one device may not communicate with an untagged port on another device GE Multilin recommends that you use tagged VLANs for the static VLANs A dynamic VLAN continues to exist on a port for as long as the port continues to receive advertisements of that VLAN from another device connected to that port or until you e Convert the VLAN to a static VLAN e Reconfigure the port to Block or Disable e Disable GVRP e Save the configuration e Reboot the switch The time to live for dynamic VLANs is 10 seconds That is if a port has not received an advertisement for an existing dynamic VLAN during the last 10 seconds the po
73. The DC terminal block on the Multilink ML1200 Managed Switch is located on the left front of the unit and is equipped with four 4 screw down lead posts The power terminals are identified as positive and negative and they are electrically floating inside the unit so that either may be grounded by the user if desired The chassis is earth or ground GND The connection procedure is straightforward Simply insert the DC leads to the Switch s power terminals positive and negative screws The use of Ground GND connects to the Switch chassis screw provided under the DC terminal Ensure that each lead is securely tightened Always use a voltmeter to measure the voltage of the incoming power supply and figure out the ve potential lead or ve potential lead The more ve potential lead will connect to the post labeled ve and the rest to the ve The GND can be hooked up at the last When power is applied the green PWR LED will illuminate The GND should be hooked up first The ML1200 unit has a floating ground so the user may elect to Ground either or terminal to suit the customer s use Before connecting live power lines to the Terminal Block of 48VDC 12VDC 24VDC 125VD or 250VDC products always use a digital voltmeter to measure the output voltage of the power supply and determine the lead which is more ve potential The more ve voltage lead from 48V or 48V supply must be connected to the post labeled
74. VDC With the exception of the dual DC input power connections and the power supply all specifications and configuration options for the Multilink ML1200 48VDC 12VDC 24VDC 125VDC and 250VDC models with this Dual Source option are identical to those listed in the Multilink ML1200 Field Switches Installation and User Guide including Appendix x Internal DC Power Supply Option MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER C INTERNAL DC DUAL SOURCE POWER INPUT OPTION INTERNAL DC DUAL SOURCE POWER INPUT OPTION C 2 Multilink ML1200 with 48 V DC 24 V DC and 125 V DC Dual Source option The ML1200 Switch models with the internal 48VDC 12VDC 24VDC 125VDC and 250VDC Dual Source power supply are designed for installations where a battery plant is the power source and where two separate power sources are utilized in order to increase operational uptime and to simplify maintenance The functionality of the Multilink ML1200 Switch 48VDC 12VDC 24VDC 125VDC and 250VDC Dual Source Option units is identical to the standard AC powered models Refer to the main sections of this Installation and User Guide for a detailed description of the Multilink ML1200 Switches MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL C3 INTERNAL DC DUAL SOURCE POWER INPUT OPTION CHAPTER C INTERNAL DC DUAL SOURCE POWER INPUT OPTION C 3 Dual Source Option Theory of Operation A E GD The Dual Source DC power option is
75. VLAN REGISTRATION OVER GARP VLAN REGISTRATION OVER GARP Table 11 2 GVRP options Per port unknown Per port static VLAN options VLAN GVRP 7 configuration Tagged or untagged Auto Forbid Learn Generate advertisements Receive advertisements Do not allow the port to Forward advertisements for and dynamically join become a member of other VLANs Receive any advertised VLAN this VLAN advertisements and that has the same VID dynamically join any as the static VLAN advertised VLAN Block Generate advertisements Receive advertisements Do not allow the VLAN Forward advertisements and dynamically join on this port received from other ports to any advertised VLAN other VLANs Do not that has the same VID dynamically join any advertised VLAN Disable Ignore GVRP and drop all GVRP Ignore GVRP and drop Do not allow the VLAN advertisements all GVRP on this port advertisements Example 11 1 Converting a dynamic VLAN to a static VLAN ML1200 gvrp ML1200 gvrp show vlan VLAN ID NAME VLAN STATUS 1 Default VLAN Static Active 2 Blue Static Active 6 dyne Dynamic Active ML1200 gvrp static vlan 10 ML1200 gvrp show vlan VLAN ID NAME VLAN STATUS 1 Default VLAN Static Active 2 Blue Static Active dyn6 Static Active The unknown VLAN parameters are configured on a per interface basis using the CLI The tagged untagged Auto and Forbid options are configured in the VLAN context
76. a TFTP server Note that the menu is similar to the FTP screen described earlier MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 23 IP ADDRESSING Graphical Display Administration File Mgmt Olai Ping System E Set Telnet E User Mgmt Reboot Configuration E O Access 4 TFTP gt Host Name gt Server IP gt File Name CHAPTER 5 IP ADDRESSING eu Logout Alarm El Bridging E IGMP O LACP Logs Port os gt Transfer Type Image Download OK E RADIUS E ORSTP SMTP SNMP SNTP E Statistics 1 d SL AM This process E can also be used to update new software to the managed MultiLink switches Before the software is updated it is advised to save the configurations Reloading of the configuratio n is not usually necessary but in certain situations it may be needed and it is recommended that you save configurations before a software update Make sure to reboot the switch after a new configuration is loaded The file transfer operations allowed are 1 5 To save any 5 24 Image Download or Image Upload Copy the ML1200 image from switch to the server or from the server to the switch The Image Upload option is commonly used to upgrade the ML1200 image on the switch Config Download or Config Upload Save the configuration of the switch on the server or load the saved c
77. a leave message or a time expires on a port we prune the multicast group membership on that port 1 TheMultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch supports only the default VLAN It can be enabled within a port VLAN tagged VLAN or no VLAN It can snoop up to 256 multi cast Groups 2 IGMP is disabled as a default It has to be enabled to leverage the benefits of IGMP 3 TheMultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch supports only the default VLAN It can be enabled within a port VLAN tagged VLAN or no VLAN It can snoop up to 256 multi cast Groups 4 IGMP works only on default VLAN DEFAULT VLAN or VID 1 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 15 5 IGMP CHAPTER 15 IGMP 15 2 Configuring IGMP through the Command Line Interface 15 2 1 Commands The i gmp command enters IGMP configuration mode and enables or disables IGMP on the switch igmp igmp enable disable The show igmp command displays the IGMP status show igmp The following command sequence illustrates how to enable and query the status of IGMP ML1200 igmp ML1200ligmp igmp enable IGMP is enabled ML1200ligmp show igmp IGMP State Enabled ImmediateLeave Disabled Querier Enabled Querier Interval 125 Querier Response Interval s 10 Multicasting Unknown Streams Enable ML1200ligmp igmp disable IGMP is disabled ML1200 igmp show igmp IGMP State Disabled ImmediateLeave Disabled Querier Enabled Querier Inte
78. an Ethernet networking solution utilizing a special power supply in switches with a proven track record The 48VDC solution is particularly useful in the telecommunication industry where it is common for facilities to operate on 48VDC power Such companies include regular and wireless telephone service providers Internet Service Providers ISPs and other communication companies In addition many high availability equipment services such as broadcasters publishers newspaper operations brokerage firms and other facilities often use a battery backup system to maintain operations in the event of a power failure It is also frequently used for computer system backup management and operations monitoring equipment The 24V and 125VDC options are particularly useful in the industrial environment where it is common for facilities to operate on 24VDC or 125VDC power The 125VDC options are mainly used in power utilities such as electrical substations electrical generating plants etc The 24VDC applications are mainly in heavy duty industrial automation such as factory floor process plants HVAC military equipment etc MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER B DC POWER INPUT DC POWER INPUT B 4 ML1200 48 V 24 V 125 V DC Installation NOTE v NOTE This section describes the proper connection of the 48VDC leads or 24VDC 125VDC leads to the DC power terminal block on the Multilink ML1200 Switch
79. and 125VDC with dual source DC input External AC power supplies are optional see Section 1 2 Ordering Information See the Appendices of this manual for more details Use an RFQ for other variations 3 4 2 Alarm Contacts for monitoring internal power and Software Traps The Alarm Contacts feature standard on Multilink ML1200 s provides two Form C Normally Closed NC contacts to which the user can attach two sets of status monitoring wires at the green terminal block When this option is present the terminal block for Alarm Contacts is part of the Power Input panel in the ML1200 case The DC power input connection is in the same panel The first NC Alarm Contact top position switch vertically mounted is a Software Alarm operated by user settings in the management software The user can disable the Software Alarm feature with a software configuration command if desired When the Software Alarm is enabled the Form C Normally Closed NC contact is held close during normal software operation A user defined software malfunction such as an SNMP Trap or a Software Security violation or an Ring Only Mode Fault causes the contact to open and thus triggers an alarm in the user s monitoring system The second NC Alarm Contact is held closed when there is power on the main board inside of the Switch This provides a Hardware Alarm because the NC contacts will open when internal power is lost either from an external power down condition or
80. and FDX or HDX operation 4 2 2 7 C3 Module COMBO 2 10 100Mbps RJ 45 and 2 100Mb multi mode MTRJ Small FF The C3 Module is a combo module with copper and fiber Small Form Factor MTRJ type ports The small size of MTRJ connectors provides an advantage of placing more ports on one module The C3 Module is equipped with Two 10 100 RJ 45 ports and Two MTRJ fiber ports When installed in a Multilink ML1200 Switch it supports the standard distances as per the media Each port has an Activity ACT LED indicating packets being received a Link LK LED that indicates proper connectivity with the remote device when lit and a FDX HDX LED to indicate full duplex mode when lit or half duplex when off The 10 100 LED indicates 100Mbps speed when lit and at 10Mbps speed when off 4 2 2 8 CD Module 4 ports 100Mbps multi mode LC connector SFF The CD Module is a Four port multi mode fiber LC connector small form factor used primarily in 100Mbps fiber to the desktop links When installed in a Multilink ML1200 Switch it supports fiber optic cable distances up to the IEEE standard 100Mbps distance limits i e typically 2km at full duplex and 412m at half duplex The compact size of the LC Connector reduces the size of wiring panels in wiring closets while providing the advantage of future proof fiber optic technology MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 9 OPERATION CHAPTER 4 OPERATION The cable
81. and speed TP indicates twisted pair Port State Forwarding implies traffic is forwarded onto the next switch or device connected the port Disabled implies that the port may be turned off or the device connected to it may be unplugged or turned off Values can be Listening Learning Forwarding Blocking and Disabled Path Cost This is the assigned port cost value used for the switch to determine the forwarding points Values range from 1 to 2000000 The lower the value the lower the cost and hence the preferred route The costs for different Ethernet speeds are shown below The STP path cost is compared to the RSTP path cost Table 13 2 Path cost defined in IEEE 802 1d and 802 1w Port Type STP Path cost RSTP Path cost 10 Mbps 100 2 000 000 100 Mbps 19 200 000 1 Gbps 4 20 000 10 Gbps 2000 Priority STP uses this to determine which ports are used for forwarding Lower the number means higher priority Value ranges from 0 to 255 Default is 128 Edge Ports RSTP offers edge port recognition allowing ports at the edge of the network to forward frames immediately after activation while at the same time protecting them against loops MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 13 RAPID SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL RAPID SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL e P2P Ports set the point to point value to off on all ports that are connected to shared LAN segments i e connections to hubs The defau
82. attribute Default value STP capabilities Disabled Reconfiguring general operation priority 32768 Bridge maximum age 20 seconds Hello time 2 seconds Forward delay 15 seconds Reconfiguring per port STP path cost 0 Priority 32768 Mode Normal Monitoring of STP Not available Root Port Not set MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 12 SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL STP SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL STP 12 2 Configuring STP The show stp command lists the switch s full STP configuration including general settings and port settings regardless of whether STP is enabled or disabled default show stp lt config ports gt Example 12 1 illustrates the show stp command with the config parameter The variables listed in this example are defined as follows Spanning Tree Enabled Global Indicates whether STP is enabled or disabled globally that is if the values is YES all ports have STP enabled Otherwise all ports have STP disabled Spanning Tree Enabled Ports Indicates which ports have STP enabled In the example ports 9 through 16 have STP enabled but STP functionality is not enabled As such STP will not perform on these ports Bridge Priority Specifies the switch bridge priority value This value is used along with the switch MAC address to determine which switch in the network is the root device Lower values indicate higher priority and values range from 0 to 65535 with a default value of
83. before the switch discards the information and updates the address table again Values range from 6 to 40 seconds with a default value of 20 e Root Port Indicates the port number which is elected as the root port of the switch A root port of 0 indicates STP is disabled e Root Path Cost A path cost is assigned to individual ports for the switch to determine which ports are the forwarding points A higher cost means more loops a lower cost means fewer loops More loops equal more traffic and a tree which takes a long time to converge resulting in a slower system e Designated Root Shows the MAC address of the bridge in the network elected or designated as the root bridge e Designated Root Priority Shows the designated root bridge s priority The default value is 0 e Root Bridge Forward Delay Indicates the designated root bridge s forward delay This is the time the switch waits before it switches from the listening to the forwarding state This value can be set between 4 to 30 seconds with a default of 15 e Root Bridge Hello Time Indicates the designated root bridge s hello time Hello information is sent out every 2 seconds e Root Bridge Max Age Indicates the designated root bridge s maximum age after which it discards the information as being old and receives new updates e Topology Change Count Since the last reboot the number of times the topology has changed Use this in conjunction with show uptime to find the
84. byte Oto 1 F9 0 rames received sent 4294967295 0192 Port 4 Number of 1023 to maximum Oto 1 F9 0 byte frames received sent 4294967295 0194 Port 4 Number of MAC error packets Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 0196 Port 4 Number of dropped received 1 F9 0 packets 4294967295 18 10 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 18 MODBUS PROTOCOL MODBUS PROTOCOL Table 18 1 Modbus memory map Sheet 8 of 33 Address Description Range Step Format Default 0198 Port 4 Number of multicast frames Oto 1 F9 0 sen 4294967295 019A Port 4 Number of broadcast frames Oto 1 F9 0 sen 4294967295 019C Port 4 Number of 64 byte fragments Oto 1 F9 0 with good CRC 4294967295 019E Port 5 Number of bytes received 01 1 F9 0 4294967295 01A0 Port 5 Number of bytes sent 01 1 F9 0 4294967295 01A2 Port 5 Number of frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 01A4 Port 5 Number of frames sent 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 01A6 Port 5 Total bytes received Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 01A8 Port 5 Total frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 O1AA Port 5 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 O1AC Port 5 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 O1AE Port 5 Number of frames with CRC 0 to 1 F9 0 error 4294967295 01B0 Port 5 Number of oversized frames 0 to 1 F9 0 rece
85. changes are made save the changes using the save icon 2 16 14 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 16 SNMP SNMP 16 4 Configuring RMON 16 4 1 Description The switch supports RMON Remote Monitoring on all connected network segments This allows for troubleshooting and optimizing your network The MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch provides hardware based RMON counters The switch manager or a network management system can poll these counters periodically to collect the statistics in a format that compiles with the RMON MIB definition The following RMON groups are supported e Ethernet statistics group maintains utilization and error statistics for the switch port being monitored e History group gathers and stores periodic statistical samples from previous statistics group Alarm group allows a network administrator to define alarm thresholds for any MIB variable e Log and event group allows a network administrator to define actions based on alarms SNMP traps are generated when RMON alarms are triggered 16 4 2 Commands The following RMON communities when defined enable the specific RMON group as show above The rmon command enter the RMON configuration mode to setup RMON groups and communities rmon The history command defines the RMON history group and the community string associated with the group history def owner lt string gt def comme string The statistics comman
86. commands to configure TACACS The show tacplus command displays the status of TACACS or servers configured as TACACS servers show tacplus lt status servers gt The tacplus enable and tacplus disable commands enable or disable TACACS authentication tacplus lt enable disable gt The tacserver command creates a list of up to five TACACS servers tacserver lt add delete gt id lt num gt ip lt ip addr gt port lt tcp port gt encrypt lt enable disable gt key lt string gt The lt add delete gt argument is mandatory and specifies whether to add or delete a TACACS server The id argument is mandatory and sets the order to poll the TACACS servers for authentication The ip argument is mandatory for adding and defines the IP address of the TACACS server The port argument is mandatory for deleting and defines the TCP port number on which the server is listening The encrypt argument enables or disables packet encryption and is mandatory for deleting The key argument requires the secret shared key string must be supplied when encryption is enabled Example 8 1 below illustrates how to configure TACACS MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 8 ACCESS USING TACACS ACCESS USING TACACS Example 8 1 Configuring TACACS ML1200 show tacplus servers TACACS Server Port Encrypt ML1200 user ML1200 user show tacplus status TACACS Status Disabled ML1200 user tacplus enable TACA
87. designed using diodes inside of the chassis on each DC power input line A diode is placed in each of the four input lines behind the four external power connection terminals so that power from an external source can only flow into the unit This allows the unit to operate whenever DC power is correctly applied to either or both of the two inputs 8 yup C 4 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER C INTERNAL DC DUAL SOURCE POWER INPUT OPTION INTERNAL DC DUAL SOURCE POWER INPUT OPTION C 4 Features and Benefits of the Dual Source Design Relay Contacts The Switch unit can receive power from either input A or B The hub will normally draw its power from the DC source with the highest voltage at a given time The Switch unit will not allow power to flow from a higher voltage input to a lower voltage input i e the two DC power sources are not mixed together by the hub When one correct DC input is present the Switch will receive power if the other DC input is absent or even if it is connected with reverse polarity or shorted or grounded Reverse polarity connections if they should accidentally occur on either input will not damage the Switch or power supply internally nor will it blow the fuse in the internal power supply because of the blocking action of the diodes This is true even if one input connection is reversed while the Switch is operating from the other source The Switch will n
88. devices Use action port 3 lt diable drop gt depending on whether the port should be disabled or the packed dropped Follow that with a show port security command to verify the setting Optional step Set the notification to notify the management station on security breach attempts use the command signal port to make a log entry or send a trap MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6 7 ACCESS CONSIDERATIONS 6 2 3 Security Logs 6 8 CHAPTER 6 ACCESS CONSIDERATIONS Example 6 5 illustrates these steps for setting up port security on a specific port Once port security is setup it is important to manage the log and review the log often If the signals are sent to the trap receiver the traps should also be reviewed for intrusion and other infractions All events occurring on the MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch are logged The events can be informational e g login STP synchronization etc debugging logs for debugging network and other values critical critical events activity traffic activity and fatal events Example 6 5 Configuring port security ML1200 port security ML1200 port security ps enable Port Security is already enabled ML1200 port securityHH learn port 3 enable Port Learning Enabled on selected port s ML1200 port securityHtt show port security PORT STATE SIGNAL ACTION LEARN COUNT MAC ADDRESS a ENABLE LOG NONE ENABLE 6 00 e0 29 2a f1 bd 00 201 03 62 27 89 00 0
89. e Run ping tests to test connectivity To set the IP address please refer to section 1 5 6 Setting the IP Parameters Once the IP address is set the CLI can be accessed via telnet as well as the console interface From now on all commands discussed are accessible from the command line interface irrespective of access methods i e serial port or in band using telnet To verify the IP address settings using the command line interface the show ipconfig command can be used as follows ML1200 gt show ipconfig IP Address 3 94 247 41 Subnet Mask 255 255 252 0 Default Gateway 3 94 244 1 ML1200 gt To verify the IP address using the EnerVista Secure Web Management software Select the Administration gt System menu item to view MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 1 IP ADDRESSING CHAPTER 5 IP ADDRESSING Editthe IP address information Graphical Display System Configuration Information Loot 2 E O Administration File Mgmt Ping Boot Mode Manual X E O Set Telnet IP Address 3 94 247 179 tse Mont Subnet Mesk 255 255 252 0 Reboot Configuration Gateway 3 94 244 1 Mac Address 00 20 06 2b de f4 Uptime 1 Days 01 25 02 Name ML1200 Order Code Serial Number Contact multilin tech ge com Location Markham Ontario cmew Besides manually assigning IP addresses there are other means to assign an IP address automat
90. e port e priority s ring e stp timers The user commands are shown below e add adds a new user e chlevel changes the user access permissions e delete deletes an existing user help user e passwd change the user password tacplus e tacserver useraccess MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 17 19 MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS CHAPTER 17 MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS The VLAN commands are shown below Refer to Chapter 10 VLAN for additional details e add delete edit e save e set egress e set ingress e set port show egress show ingress show port start Stop e vlan 1 20 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL Digital Energy Multilin Multilink ML1200 Managed Field Switch Chapter 18 Modbus Protocol 18 1 Modbus Configuration 18 1 1 Overview Modicon programmable controllers as well as other PLCs can communicate with each other and other devices over a variety of networks The common language used by all Modicon controllers is the Modbus protocol This protocol defines a message structure that controllers recognize and use regardless of the networks over which they communicate It describes the process a controller uses to request access to another device how it will respond to requests from the other devices and how errors will be detected and reported It establishes a common format for the layout and contents of message fields The Modbus
91. each host belonging to the multicast group If a multicast router supporting IGMP is not present then the switch must assume this function in order to elicit group membership information from the hosts on the network if you need to disable the querier feature you can do so using the IGMP configuration MIB e Report A message sent by a host to the querier to indicate that the host wants to be or is a member of a given group indicated in the report message e Leave Group A message sent by a host to the querier to indicate that the host has ceased to be a member of a specific multicast group Thus IGMP identifies members of a multicast group within a subnet and allows IGMP configured hosts and routers to join or leave multicast groups When IGMP is enabled on the MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch it examines the IGMP packets it receives to Learn which ports are linked to IGMP hosts and multicast routers queriers belonging to any multicast group e Become a querier if a multicast router querier is not discovered on the network Once the switch learns the port location of the hosts belonging to any particular multicast group it can direct group traffic to only those ports resulting in bandwidth savings on ports where group members do not reside The following example illustrates this operation MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 15 IGMP MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION
92. end is a plug in connector with both fiber strands terminated in one housing that cannot be improperly inserted Each port has an Activity ACT LED indicating packets being received a Link LK LED indicating proper connectivity with the remote device when lit and a FDX HDX LED indicating full duplex mode when lit or half duplex when off 4 2 2 9 C4 Module Combo 268 100Mbps multi mode LC small form factor and 26 10 100 Mbps RJ 45 Connector The C4 Module module is a combo module with a combination of copper and mm Fiber Small Form Factor LC type ports The small size of LC connectors allows more ports on one module The C4 Module is equipped with two 10 100 RJ 45 ports and two LC multi mode fiber ports 2 Port 10 100 Mbps amp 2 Port 100 Mbps MTRJ Fiberport When installed in a Multilink ML1200 Switch it supports the standard distances as per the media Each port has an Activity ACT LED indicating packets being received a Link LK LED that indicates proper connectivity with the remote device when lit and a FDX HDX LED to indicate full duplex mode when lit or half duplex when off The 10 100 LED indicates 100Mbps speed when lit and at 10Mbps speed when off 4 2 2 10 C1 Module Twisted Pair 10 100Mb 4 Port The C1 module supports Ethernet twisted pair segments of any standard length It is equipped with a Four port RJ 45 connector and offers 10 100 full half duplex auto negotiating capability on each port The RJ 45
93. for FTP users to set more pipe in screen outputs MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 17 15 MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS 17 15 CHAPTER 17 MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS save whoami display the user information reboot authorize degrade exportlog mode ftp help ipconfig kill kill session id logout logs out from the current user ping to send the ping requests tftp telnet connects to the remote system through telnet terminal to set the terminal size xmodem 17 8 2 Configuration commands The access commands are shown below allow allows the IP address deny denies the IP address dhcp enables or disables the DHCP modbus enables or disables access to Modbus map remove removeall snmp enables or disables SNMP ss telnet web The alarm commands are shown below add alarm del period The authorization commands are shown below auth authserver backend clear stats MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 17 MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS portaccess reauth setport show port show stats trigger reauth The device commands are shown below device backpressure broadcast protect enables or disables broadcast storm protection globally flowcontro l rate threshold sets the broadcast rate threshold frames sec setage sets the mgtagetime setport sets the port configuration The VLAN registration over GAR
94. for ML1200 PM s with Fiber Media Receiver Sensitivity and Transmitter Power are the parameters necessary to compute the power budget To calculate the power budget of different fiber media installations using Multilink products the following equations should be used OPB Optical Power Budget P min Palmin where Transmitter Output Power and Pg Receiver Sensitivity Worst case OPB OPB 1dBlfor LED aging 1dBlfor insertion loss Worst case distance Worst case OPB in dB Cable Loss in dB Km where the Cable Loss for 62 5 125 and 50 125um M m is 2 8 dB km and the Cable Loss for 100 140 Multi mode is 3 3 dB km and the Cable Loss for 9 125 Single mode is 0 5 dB km and the Cable Loss for 9 125 Single mode is 0 4 dB km LX25 and the Cable Loss for 9 125 Single mode is 0 25 dB km ZX40 and the Cable Loss for 9 125 Single mode is 0 2 dB km ZX70 The following data has been collected from component manufacturer s Agilent s and Lucent s web sites and catalogs to provide guidance to network designers and installers Fiber Port Speed Std Mode Std km Wavelength Cable Size um X mitr R cvr Worst Worst typical typical Module fdx nm Output Sens OPB distance OPB distance hdx Pr Pr dB Km dB Km dB dB fdx fdx C7 10Mb Multi Mode 2 850 62 5 125 15 0 31 4 5 17 6 FL 2 100 140 9 5 31 19 5 5 9 23 5 7 50 125 19 5 r31 19 5 3 4 13 5 4 8 C8 C9 100Mb Multi mode 2 1300 62 5 125 20
95. for the port This value cannot be edited in this window e The VLAN ID displays the VLAN set for the port This value cannot be edited in this window e The STP State displays the STP settings for the port This value cannot be edited in this window e The Tagged State displays the Tag settings on the port This value cannot be edited in this window e The GVRP State displays the GVRP settings on the port This value cannot be edited in this window e The LLA indicates the state of the Link Loss Alert feature The Auto default value for the Port Speed senses the speed and negotiates with the port at the other end of the link for data transfer operation half duplex or full duplex The Auto value uses the IEEE 802 3u auto negotiation standard for 100Base T networks If the other device does not comply with the 802 3u standard then the port configuration on the switch must be manually set to match the port configuration on the other device Possible port setting combinations for copper ports are e 10HDx 10 Mbps half duplex e 10FDx 10 Mbps full duplex e 100HDx 100 Mbps half duplex e 100FDx 100 Mbps full duplex Possible port settings for 100FX fiber ports are e 100FDx default 100 Mbps full duplex e 100HDx 100 Mbps half duplex To change the port speed on a transceiver port the switch must be rebooted MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 9 PORT MIRRORING AND SETUP PORT MIRRORI
96. frames sent 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 039A Port 15 Total bytes received 01 1 F9 0 4294967295 039C Port 15 Total frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 039E Port 15 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 03A0 Port 15 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 03A2 Port 15 Number of frames with CRC 0 to 1 F9 0 error 4294967295 03A4 Port 15 Number of oversized frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 03A6 Port 15 Number of bad fragments 0 to 1 F9 0 received 64 bytes 4294967295 03A8 Port 15 Number of jabber frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 03AA Port 15 Number of collisions occurred 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 03AC Port 15 Number of late collisions 0 to 1 F9 0 occurred 4294967295 O3AE Port 15 Number of 64 byte frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received sent 4294967295 0380 Port 15 Number of 65 to 127 byte 0to 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 03B2 Port 15 Number of 128 to 255 byte 01 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 03B4 Port 15 Number of 256 to 511 byte 0 to 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 03B6 Port 15 Number of 512 to 1023 byte Oto 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 03B8 Port 15 Number of 1023 to maximum 0 to 1 F9 0 byte frames received sent 4294967295 03BA Port 15 Number of MAC error packets Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 03BC Port 15 Number of dropped received Oto 1 F9 0 packets 4294967295 O3BE Port 15 Number of multicast frames Oto 1 F9 0 sent 4294967295 03CO Port 15 Number of b
97. from LOW priority queue 3 Six packets are sent from the HIGH priority queue and one packet from LOW priority queue 4 Eight packets are sent from the HIGH priority queue and one packet from LOW priority queue 5 Ten packets are sent from the HIGH priority queue and one packet from LOW priority queue 6 Twelve packets are sent from the HIGH priority queue and one packet from LOW priority queue 7 All packets are sent from the HIGH priority queue and none are sent from LOW priority queue The show qos command displays the QoS settings show qos type lt port tag tos gt port lt portl list range gt Sometimes it is necessary to change the priority of the packets going out of a switch For example when a packet is received untagged and has to be transmitted with an addition of the 802 1p priority tag the tag can be assigned depending on the untag value set For example if the untag command is set to port 1 tag 2 priority low untagged packets received on that port will be tagged with a priority low upon transmit The untag command defines the 802 1p user priority assigned to untagged received packets to be transmitted as tagged from the priority queue set untag port lt portllist range gt priority lt high low gt tag lt 0 7 gt MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 14 5 QUALITY OF SERVICE CHAPTER 14 QUALITY OF SERVICE 14 2 2 Example The following example shows how t
98. gt ps lt enable disable gt remove mac lt allladdress list range gt port lt numllist range gt signal port lt numllist range gt lt none log trap logandtrap gt Where the following hold e allow mac configures the switch to setup allowed MAC addresses on specific ports learn port configures the switch to learn the MAC addresses associated with specific port or a group of ports e show port security shows the information on port security programmed or learnt e action port specifies the designated action to take in case of a non authorized access e ps port security allows port security to be enable or disabled MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 3 ACCESS CONSIDERATIONS CHAPTER 6 ACCESS CONSIDERATIONS e remove mac removes specific or all MAC addresses from port security lookup e signal port lt num 1ist range gt observe list of specified ports and notify if there is a security breach on the list of port specified The signal can be a log entry a trap to the trap receiver specified as part of the SNMP commands where is that specified or both iy There is a limitation of 200 MAC addresses per port and 500 MAC addresses per switch for port security NOTE y All commands listed above must be executed under the port security configuration mode NOTE Let s look at a few examples The following command allows specific MAC addresses on a specified port No spaces are allowed between
99. heat away from the ML1200 through the metal brackets and into the metal support structure Since the ML1200 has special internal thermal techniques patent pending to move the heat generated by the electronic components inside into the case the case may be quite warm to the touch during normal operation 119 1mm 6 87 174 5mm The unit is mounted using the brackets as shown in the illustration above The spacing for the mounting screws into the supporting wall or panel is a rectangle 21 74 x 11 91 cm 8 56 x 4 69 inches center to center RJ LOCATIONS MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL Sof INSTALLATION CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 3 4 Electrical Installation 3 4 1 Powering the Multilink ML1200 Managed Field Switch The DC internal power supply supports installation environments where the DC voltage is from 18 to 150 volts depending on the model selected The power consumption will range from about 20 up to 35 watts depending on the port quantity and types in the configuration When connecting the Ethernet cabling there is no need to power down the unit Individual cable segments can be connected or disconnected without concern for power related problems or damage to the unit Power input options are available to suit the ML1200 Switches to special high availability communications and or heavy industrial grade applications including e 48VDC 24VDC and 125VDC with single DC input e 48VDC 24VDC
100. information is defined and stored in a Management Information Base MIB MIB is the database of the network management information SNMP has evolved over the years since 1988 using the RFC process Several RFCs define the SNMP standards The most common standards for SNMP are SNMP v1 the original version of SNMP SNMP v2 and finally SNMP v3 SNMP is a poll based mechanism SNMP manager polls the managed device for information and display the information retrieved in text or graphical manner Some definitions related to SNMP are e Authentication The process of ensuring message integrity and protection against message replays It includes both data integrity and data origin authentication e Authoritative SNMP engine One of the SNMP copies involved in network communication designated to be the allowed SNMP engine which protects against message replay delay and redirection The security keys used for authenticating and encrypting SNMPv3 packets are generated as a function of the authoritative SNMP engine s engine ID and user passwords When an SNMP message expects a response for example get exact get next set request the receiver of these messages is MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 16 1 SNMP 16 2 CHAPTER 16 SNMP authoritative When an SNMP message does not expect a response the sender is authoritative Community string A text string used to authenticate messages between a management stati
101. is selected the user is prompted as follows Reboot Y or N Select Y The ML1200 will prompt Save Current Configuration Select N MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 IP ADDRESSING IP ADDRESSING Additional capabilities have been added to save and load configurations The commands are ftp get put list del type app config oldconf script hosts log host lt hostname gt ip ipaddress file lt filename gt user lt user gt pass lt password gt tftp get put type app config oldconf script hosts log host lt hostname gt ip lt ipaddress gt file lt filename gt xmodem lt get put gt type app config oldconf script hosts log The arguments are describe below type Specifies whether a log file or host file is uploaded or downloaded This can also perform the task of exporting a configuration file or uploading a new image to the switch host ip file user pass These parameters are associated with ftp tftp server communications The user can save the configuration in old v2 format and new v3 format The v3 format must be used to utilize the ASCII and CLI Script capability save format v2 v3 i With release 1 7 and higher the configuration can be saved in the older format binary y object or in a new format as an ASCII file The new format is recommended by GE Multilin T Use the old format only if there are multiple MultiLink switches on the network runnin
102. limit arp displays the arp details bootmode displays the current bootmode value broadcast protect displays broadcast storm protection parameters config displays the saved configuration as a whole or by module console displays console serial link settings date displays system date daylight displays the configured daylight savings settings gateway displays the gateway of the system gvrp displays the GVRP parameters host displays the host table for FTP users igmp displays the IGMP parameters interfaces display the interface information ip displays the system IP address ip access displays the IP address access list ipconfig displays the IP configuration lacp 111 displays the Link Loss Learn parameters log displays log information logsize displays the current event log size mac displays the system MAC address modbus displays Modbus settings modu les displays the module information port displays the port information port mirror displays the port mirroring parameters port security displays the port security configuration parameters power displays condition of power supplies in redundant power supply switches only show show show qos displays the QOS settings rmon displays the rmon configuration parameters setup displays the setup parameters of the system MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 17 MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS show show show show show show sho
103. ly BootP DHCP Auto After the changes are completed for each section click OK to register the changes Note that if the IP address is changed the http session has to be restarted with the new IP address 5 2 4 Using Telnet The telnet client is enabled on the ML1200 The ML1200 supports five simultaneous sessions on a switch four telnet sessions and one console session This allows many users to view discuss or edit changes to the ML1200 This is also useful when two remote users want to view the switch settings The telnet client can be disabled through the command line interface by using the telnet disable command with the following syntax telnet lt enable disable gt Telnet can also be disabled for specific users with the useraccess command Refer to section 1 5 8 User Management for details Multiple telnet sessions started from the CLI interface or the command line are serviced by the ML1200 in a round robin fashion that is one session after another If one telnet session started from an ML1200 is downloading a file the other windows will not be serviced until the file transfer is completed The following example changes the telnet access In this case the enable command was repeated without any effect to the switch ML1200 configure access ML1200laccess telnet enable Access to Telnet already enabled ML1200laccessMHE exit 12008 MULTILINK 1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 5 IP AD
104. on a host The host would determine whether to accept or deny the request and sent a response back The TACACS protocol is the latest generation of TACACS TACACS is a simple UDP based access control protocol originally developed by BBN for the MILNET Military Network XTACACS is now replaced by TACACS TACACS is a TCP based access control protocol TCP offers a reliable connection oriented transport while UDP offers best effort delivery TACACS improves on TACACS and XTACACS by separating the functions of authentication authorization and accounting and by encrypting all traffic between the Network Access Server NAS and the TACACS clients or services or daemon It allows for arbitrary length and content authentication exchanges which allows any authentication mechanism to be utilized with TACACS clients The protocol allows the TACACS client to request very fine grained access control by responding to each component of a request The MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch implements a TACACS client 1 TACACS servers and daemons use TCP port 49 for listening to client requests Clients connect to this port to send authentication and authorization packets 2 There can be more than one TACACS server on the network The MultiLink Switch Software supports a maximum of five TACACS servers MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 8 1 ACCESS USING TACACS CHAPTER 8 ACCESS USING TACACS 6 1 2 TACACS Flow T
105. received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0402 Port 17 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 0404 Port 17 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 0406 Port 17 Number of frames with CRC 0 to 1 F9 0 error 4294967295 0408 Port 17 Number of oversized frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 040A Port 17 Number of bad fragments 01 1 F9 0 received 64 bytes 4294967295 040C Port 17 Number of jabber frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 040E Port 17 Number of collisions occurred 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0410 Port 17 Number of late collisions 0 to 1 F9 0 occurred 4294967295 0412 Port 17 Number of 64 byte frames 0to 1 F9 0 received sent 4294967295 0414 Port 17 Number of 65 to 127 byte Oto 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 0416 Port 17 Number of 128 to 255 byte Oto 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 0418 Port 17 Number of 256 to 511 byte Oto 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 041A Port 17 Number of 512 to 1023 byte 01 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 041C Port 17 Number of 1023 to maximum 0 to 1 F9 0 byte frames received sent 4294967295 041E Port 17 Number of MAC error packets 01 1 F9 0 4294967295 0420 Port 17 Number of dropped received 0to 1 F9 0 packets 4294967295 0422 Port 17 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sent 4294967295 0424 Port 17 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sent 4294967295 0426 Port 17 Number of 64 byte fragments Oto 1 F9 0 with good CRC 42949672
106. specified MAC addresses ML1200lport securityHtt allow mac 00 c1 00 7f ec 00 00 60 b0 88 9e 00 port 18 The following command sequence sets the port security to learn the MAC addresses Note that a maximum of 200 MAC addresses can be learned per port to a maximum of 500 per switch Also the action on the port must be set to none before the port learns the MAC address information ML1200 port securityJ action port 1 2 none ML1200 port securityJ learn port 1 2 enable The following command sequence enables and disables port security ML1200 port securityHtt ps enable Port Security is already enabled ML1200 port securityJ ps disable Port Security Disabled ML1200 ps enable Port Security Enabled 6 2 2 Allowing MAC Addresses The Port Security feature has to be used with the combination of commands shown below in order for it to be implemented successfully To configure a port to allow only a certain MAC address single or a list of max 200 MAC addresses per port and 500 MAC addresses per ML1200 as per manuals we have to 1 Verify that the port is in default port security status 2 Use the following commands port security port security ps enable port security allow mac address list range port lt num list range gt port security action port lt num list range gt drop y All the above commands have to be configured in this sequence otherwise the port will remain insecure NOTE 6 4 MULTILINK ML1200 MAN
107. standard 100Mbps distance limits i e typically 2km at full duplex and 412m at half duplex 2 100 Mb ST Fiber Port i Tm n 4 Link 2 Activity 3 F H Each port has an Activity ACT LED indicating packets being received A Link LK LED indicates proper connectivity with the remote device when lit and FDX HDX LED to indicate full duplex mode when lit half duplex when off 4 2 2 2 C7 Module 26 10Mb multi mode FX ST twist lock Module The C7 Module is a two port Fiber module that looks similar to the 100MbFiber module with the exception of 10Mb speed at the ST fiber module The ST connector functions as a fiber optic transceiver to support 10BASE FX network segments When installed in a Multilink ML1200 Managed Switch the fiber port supports fiber optic cable distances up the IEEE standard 10Mbps distance limits i e typically 2km at full duplex and half duplex 26 10 MbST Fiber Port Each port has an Activity ACT LED indicating packets being received a Link LK LED that indicates proper connectivity with the remote device when lit and an FDX HOX LED to indicate full duplex mode when lit or half duplex when off 4 2 9 C9 Module 26 100Mb multi mode FX SC snap in Fiber connector The C9 Module is two port module equipped with 2 multi mode 100Mbps fiber optic transceivers This is similar to the C8 Module It has the same LEDs indicating port activity ACT Link LK and FDX HDX and 10 100 operatio
108. supports both EAPOL and EAP over RADIUS to communicate to a standard 802 1x supplicant and RADIUS authentication server The ML1200 software authenticator has the following characteristics MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH Allows control on ports using STP based hardware functions EAPOL frames are Spanning Tree Protocol STP link Bridge PDUs BPDU with its own bridge multicast address Relays MD5 challenge although not limited to authentication protocol to RADIUS server Limits the authentication of a single host per port The MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch provides the IEEE 802 1x MIB for SNMP management INSTRUCTION MANUAL roe ACCESS USING RADIUS CHAPTER 7 ACCESS USING RADIUS 7 2 Configuring 802 1x through the Command Line Interface 7 2 1 Commands On enabling 802 1x ports make sure the port which connects to the RADIUS servers needs to be manually authenticated To authenticate the port use the setport command The CLI commands to configure and perform authentication with a RADIUS server are described below The auth command enters the configuration mode to configure the 802 1x parameters auth The show auth command displays the 802 1x configuration or port status show auth config ports The authserver command define the RADIUS server Use the UDP socket number if the RADIUS authentication is on a port other than 1812 authserver ip lt ip addr gt udp lt num gt secret lt string gt
109. tHtshow stp ports STP Port Configuration Priority Path Cost State TP 10 100 Forwarding TP 10 100 Forwarding 100MB Fiber Disabled 100MB Fiber Disabled 100MB Fiber Disabled 100MB Fiber Disabled TP 10 100 Disabled ML1200 stp show stp config The age parameter is out of range as porco per the IEEE 802 1d specifications YES 1 2 34557647 STP CONFIGURATION Spanning Tree Enabled Global YES Spanning Tree Enabled Ports Protocol Normal STP Bridge Bridge Bridge Bridge Bridge ID Priority Forward Delay Hello Time Max Age Root Port Root Path Cost Designated Root Designated Root Priority Root Bridge Forward Delay Root Bridge Hello Time Root Bridge Max Age 80 00 00 20 06 2b e1 54 15535 15 2 20 0 0 8 0120 01 0 01 2 0106 25 6 5 154 15535 15 2 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 12 11 SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL STP CHAPTER 12 SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL STP Configuring STP parameters continued ML1200 stp show stp config STP CONFIGURATION Spanning Tree Enabled Global YES Spanning Tree Enabled Ports YES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Protocol Normal STP Bridge ID a SOLO 0 00 20 06 2b eds 54 Bridge Priority fo 5535 Bridge Forward Delay 2 20 Bridge Hello Time Bridge Max Age Root Port Root Path Cost Designated Root 80 00 00 20 06 2b e1 54 Designated Root Priority E5535 12 12 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWI
110. the user save messages in a server mailbox and download them as needed from the server In other words users typically use a program that uses SMTP for sending e mails out going e g replying to an e mail message and either POP3 or IMAP for receiving messages that have been arrived from the outside world While SMTP and its related protocols such as POP3 IMAP etc are useful transports for sending and receiving e mails it is extremely beneficial for a network administrator to receive e mails in case of faults and alerts The MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch can be setup to send and e mail alert when a trap is generated If this capability is used please ensure that SPAM filters and other filters are not set to delete these e mails GE Multilin recommends that a rule be setup on the mail server so that all e mails indicating SNMP faults are automatically stored in a folder or redirected to the necessary administrators The SNMP alerts can be configured using the MultiLink Switch Software for the following e Send e mail alert according to the configuration rules when a specific event category happens e Send e mail alert according to the configuration rules when a specific trap SNMP trap category happens e Provide configuration and customization commands for users to specify SMTP server to connect to TCP ports user recipients and filters e The SMTP alerts provide the following capabilities MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD
111. to frame duplication and out of sequence frames RSTP may have to be explicitly set to be compatible with STP This requires setting the Force Protocol Version parameter to be STP compatible This parameter should be set to all ports on a given switch As indicated above one of the benefits of RSTP is the implementation of a larger range of port path costs that accommodates higher network speeds New default values have been implemented for path costs associated with the different network speeds This may create incompatibility between devices running the older implementations of STP a switch running RSTP At any given time the software can support either STP or RSTP but not both MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 13 3 RAPID SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL CHAPTER 13 RAPID SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL 13 2 Configuring RSTP through the Command Line Interface 13 2 1 Normal RSTP The commands to setup and configure RSTP are as follows The set stp command sets the switch to support RSTP or STP It is necessary to save and reboot the switch after this command set stp type stp rstp The rstp command enters the RSTP configuration mode and enables disabled RSTP By default RSTP is disabled and has to be manually activated rstp rstp enable disable The syntax for the port command on RSTP is shown below port port lt number list range gt status lt enable disable gt migration lt enable gt edge lt enable
112. to the MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 12 3 SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL STP CHAPTER 12 SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL STP forwarding state The default is 15 seconds with a range of 4 to 30 seconds Root Bridge Hello Time Indicates the designated root bridge s hello time Hello information is transmitted every 2 seconds Root Bridge Max Age Indicates the designated root bridge maximum age after which it discards the information as being old and receives new updates These variables can be changed using the priority cost port and timers commands described later in this chapter Example 12 2 illustrates the show stp command with the ports parameter The variables listed in this example are defined as follows Port indicates the port number Value ranges from 01 to max number of ports in the switch Type indicates the type of port TP indicates Twisted Pair Example 12 1 Viewing STP configuration ML1200 show stp config RSTP CONFIGURATION Rapid STP STP Enabled Global NO RSTP STP Enabled Ports Protocol Bridge ID Bridge Priority Bridge Forward Delay Bridge Hello Time Bridge Max Age Root Port Root Path Cost Designated Root qo 2 n5 TG Normal RSTP 80 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 32768 15 02 20 0 0 8 05 20 072 0 0 0 0 270107 0 0 2 0 07 0 Designated Root Priority 32768 Example 12 2 Viewing STP ports ML1200 show stp ports STP Port Configuration Port Type Pr
113. zero packet loss with fiber ports amp with RJ 45 ports used as indicated here 4 2 2 11 PoE power pass through Base unit Model ML1200 48P 10 100Mb 4 port The LEDs on PoE ports are slightly different compared to regular non PoE RJ 45 modules When the PoE port is in use the PoE LED is ON when connected properly to a 803 af compliant PD device on that port When non PoE devices are connected the PoE LED is OFF Operation of Ethernet data traffic is not affected by PoE LINK and ACTIVITY LEDS are combined on the PoE modules into one LED that is marked as LINK ACT PoE LEDs Summary e For PoE devices each RJ 45 PoE port supports only 802 3af complaint devices The PoE LED is ON when the attached PD is drawing power from the port e For non PoE devices connected the PoE port will act as a normal RJ 45 port and the PoE LED is OFF No power is being sent out from the port e The PoE ports in Multilink with 48VDC power input act as a pass through so the 48VDC power source must be strong enough to provide power to the Multilink switch and to all the 4 RJ 45 ports with PD devices connected up to 15 watts per PoE port MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 11 OPERATION CHAPTER 4 OPERATION e Inthe case where the 48VDC power in not internally connected and no power is coming to the PoE ports for some reason all the PoE port LEDs are ON simultaneously to indicate a trouble condition The ports will still op
114. 0 group_count 0 view_count 1 view1_name all view1_type included view1_subtree 1 view1_mask ff more FIGURE 5 3 Displaying specific modules using the show config command MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL IP ADDRESSING CHAPTER 5 IP ADDRESSING ML1200 show config module snmp system HARDWARE type ML1200 slotB 8 Port TP Module System Manager This area configures System related information SYSTEM Edit below this line only system name zMain system contact someoneQGjoe com system location Markham Ontario boot modesmanual system ip 192 168 1 15 system subnetz 0 0 0 0 system gateway 192 168 1 11 idle timeout 10 telnet access enable snmp access enable web access enable FIGURE 5 4 Displaying configuration for different modules Note multiple modules can be specified on the command line 5 4 4 Saving Configuration It is advisable to save the configuration before updating the software as it may be necessary in certain situations The oadconf command requires a reboot to activate the new configuration Without a reboot the ML1200 used the previous configuration When reboot
115. 0 Number of 64 byte frames Oto 1 F9 0 received sent 4294967295 069 Port 30 Number of 65 to 127 byte 01 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 ED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 18 33 MODBUS PROTOCOL CHAPTER 18 MODBUS PROTOCOL Table 18 1 Modbus memory map Sheet 31 of 23 Address Description Range Step Format Default 06A0 Port 30 Number of 128 to 255 byte 01 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 06 2 Port 30 Number of 256 to 511 byte 0to 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 06A4 Port 30 Number of 512 to 1023 byte 0to 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 06A6 Port 30 Number of 1023 to maximum 0 to 1 F9 0 byte frames received sent 4294967295 06A8 Port 30 Number of MAC error packets Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 06AA Port 30 Number of dropped received 01 1 F9 0 packets 4294967295 06 Port 30 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sen 4294967295 O6AE Port 30 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sen 4294967295 0680 Port 30 Number of 64 byte fragments 0 to 1 F9 0 with good CRC 4294967295 06B2 Port 31 Number of bytes received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 06B4 Port 31 Number of bytes sent 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 06B6 Port 31 Number of frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 06B8 Port 31 Number of frames sent 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 06 Port 31 Total bytes received 01 1 F9 0 4
116. 1 Modbus memory map Sheet 11 of 33 Address Description Range Step Format Default 0240 Port 8 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 0242 Port 8 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 0244 Port 8 Number of frames with CRC 0 to 1 F9 0 error 4294967295 0246 Port 8 Number of oversized frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 0248 Port 8 Number of bad fragments 0to 1 F9 0 received 64 bytes 4294967295 024A Port 8 Number of jabber frames 01 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 024C Port 8 Number of collisions occurred 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 024E Port 8 Number of late collisions 0 to 1 F9 0 occurred 4294967295 0250 Port 8 Number of 64 byte frames Oto 1 F9 0 received sent 4294967295 0252 Port 8 Number of 65 to 127 byte 0to 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 0254 Port 8 Number of 128 to 255 byte Oto 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 0256 Port 8 Number of 256 to 511 byte Oto 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 0258 Port 8 Number of 512 to 1023 byte Oto 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 025A Port 8 Number of 1023 to maximum 0 to 1 F9 0 byte frames received sent 4294967295 025C Port 8 Number of MAC error packets 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 025E Port 8 Number of dropped received 0to 1 F9 0 packets 4294967295 0260 Port 8 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sen 429496
117. 10 Number of bad fragments Oto 1 F9 0 received 64 bytes 4294967295 O2AE Port 10 Number of jabber frames 01 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 18 15 MODBUS PROTOCOL CHAPTER 18 MODBUS PROTOCOL Table 18 1 Modbus memory map Sheet 13 of 33 Address Description Range Step Format Default 02B0 Port 10 Number of collisions occurred 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 02B2 Port 10 Number of late collisions 0 to 1 F9 0 occurred 4294967295 02B4 Port 10 Number of 64 byte frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received sent 4294967295 02B6 Port 10 Number of 65 to 127 byte Oto 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 02B8 Port 10 Number of 128 to 255 byte 0to 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 02BA Port 10 Number of 256 to 511 byte 01 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 0286 Port 10 Number of 512 to 1023 byte 01 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 O2BE Port 10 Number of 1023 to maximum 0 to 1 F9 0 byte frames received sent 4294967295 02CO Port 10 Number of MAC error packets Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 02C2 Port 10 Number of dropped received Oto 1 F9 0 packets 4294967295 02C4 Port 10 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sen 4294967295 02C6 Port 10 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sen 4294967295 02C8 Port 10 Number of 64 byte fragments 0 to 1 F9 0
118. 1200 tag vlan set port port 3 5 tagging id 30 status tagged P M V LAN ID 1 Name Default VLAN Status Active continued on next page MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 10 17 VLAN CHAPTER 10 VLAN Converting Port VLAN to Tag VLAN continued UNTAGGED UNTAGGED UNTAGGED UNTAGGED VLAN ID 10 Name engineering Status Active TAGGED TAGGED TAGGED VLAN ID 20 Name sales Status Active TAGGED TAGGED TAGGED VLAN ID 30 Name marketing Status Active TAGGED TAGGED TAGGED 10 18 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 10 VLAN VLAN 10 5 Configuring Tag VLANs with EnerVista Secure Web Management software 10 5 1 Description CAUTION CAUTION When multiple switches are on a network the VLAN information needs to be propagated on to other switches In such situations it is best to use tag based VLANs On the ML1200 the port VLAN type is set to none To use Tag VLANS first enable Tag VLANs In the following example we assign various ports as VLANs 10 20 and 30 and the remaining ports to the default VLAN that is VLAN 1 The VLAN setup occurs before devices are connected to the ports As such the port status is shown as DOWN There can be serious connectivity repercussions when Tag VLAN filtering is enabled The only way to recover from this it is to reload the switch without saving the configuration or by modify
119. 14 880 pps Fast Ethernet 100Mb 148 800 pps Gigabit Ethernet 1000Mb 1 488 000 pps Switching Processing Type sees Store and Forward with IEEE 802 3x full duplex flow control non blocking Data Rate iamen teta teen die 10Mbps 100Mbps and 1000Mbps Address Table Capacity s 4K node self learning with address aging Packet buffer size tts 240KB for 10 100 and 120KB for 1000Mb CV mie ua 5 us packet time 100 to 100Mbps 15 us packet time 10 to 10 Mbps and 10 to 100Mbps Throughput with 12 10 100 and 2Glink max 4 76M pps Transmit Back 2 66Gb s per slot NETWORK STANDARDS AND COMPLIANCE HARDWARE Ethernet V1 0 V2 0 IEEE 802 3 e 10BASE T IEEE SO SU Se 100Base TX 100BASE FX IEEE BOO SZ adeste eb 1000BASE X Ethernet Auto negotiation IEEE 802 30 Di actione ttti 1000BASE X Ethernet Priority protocol IEEE 802 1d Spanning tree protocol IEEE 802 1w IEEE 802 13 IEEE 802 3x a IEEE 802 3ad Link Aggregation Trunking IEEE Port based Network access control EEE B02 SOIE oso ter abs Power over Ethernet Rapid Spanning tree protocol MAXIMUM 10 MBPS ETHERNET SEGMENT LENGTHS Unshielded twisted pair tte 100 m 328 ft Shielded twistedp lil cette ctc 150 m 492 ft LOBASE FL multi mode fiber optic sss
120. 2 6 1 3 CHAPTER 6 ACCESS CONSIDERATIONS Port Security Feature v NOTE The port security feature can be used to block computers from accessing the network by requiring the port to validate the MAC address against a known list of MAC addresses This port security feature is provided on an Ethernet or Fast Ethernet port In case of a security violation the port can be configured to go into the disable mode or drop mode The disable mode disables the port not allowing any traffic to pass through The drop mode allows the port to remain enabled during a security violation and drop only packets that are coming in from insecure hosts This is useful when there are other network devices connected to the MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch If there is an insecure access on the secondary device the MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch allows the authorized users to continue to access the network the unauthorized packets are dropped preventing access to the network Network security hinges on the ability to allow or deny access to network resources This aspect of secure network services involves allowing or disallowing traffic based on information contained in packets such as the IP address or MAC address Planning for access is a key architecture and design consideration For example which ports are configured for port security Normally rooms with public access e g lobby conference rooms etc should be configured with port security
121. 2 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 v 33 v 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 v 4i 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 50 61 62 63 Cancel OK Note that the different settings are clear from the window below Port 1 has port based QoS port 3 has tag based QoS and port 5 is using ToS Graphical Display Quality of Service QoS Logout o o Administration Configuration Access Bridging O IGMP OPs Pot QoSType Prony TagTOSValu OLacP 1 Port High io 2 None 8 Port m im of 5 TOS 33 34 41 42 53 61 amp RADIUS 6 None 3 te E ORSTP 7 None 0 SMTP SNMP SNTP E Statistics F VLAN If Applicable Edt Weight gt After all changes are made save the changes using the save icon Si 14 12 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL Digital Energy Multilin Multilink ML1200 Managed Field Switch Chapter 15 IGMP 15 1 Overview 15 1 1 Description Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP is defined in RFC 1112 as the standard for IP multicasting in the Internet It is used to establish host memberships in particular multicast groups on a single network The mechanisms of the protocol allows a host to inform its local router using Host Membership Reports that it wants to receive messages addressed to a specific multicast gro
122. 294967295 0448 Port 18 Number of 128 to 255 byte Oto 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 044A Port 18 Number of 256 to 511 byte 01 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 044C Port 18 Number of 512 to 1023 byte 01 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 O44E Port 18 Number of 1023 to maximum 0 to 1 F9 0 byte frames received sent 4294967295 0450 Port 18 Number of MAC error packets 0to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0452 Port 18 Number of dropped received Oto 1 F9 0 packets 4294967295 0454 Port 18 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sen 4294967295 0456 Port 18 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sen 4294967295 0458 Port 18 Number of 64 byte fragments 01 1 F9 0 with good CRC 4294967295 045A Port 19 Number of bytes received Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 045C Port 19 Number of bytes sent 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 045E Port 19 Number of frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0460 Port 19 Number of frames sent 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0462 Port 19 Total bytes received 0to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0464 Port 19 Total frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0466 Port 19 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 0468 Port 19 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 046A Port 19 Number of frames with CRC 0 to 1 F9 0 error 4294967295 046C Port 19 Number of oversized frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 046E Port 19 Number of bad fragments 01 1 F9 0 received 64 bytes 4294967295 ED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTIO
123. 294967295 0686 Port 31 Total frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 06 Port 31 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 0660 Port 31 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 06C2 Port 31 Number of frames with CRC 0 to 1 F9 0 error 4294967295 06C4 Port 31 Number of oversized frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 06C6 Port 31 Number of bad fragments Oto 1 F9 0 received 64 bytes 4294967295 06C8 Port 31 Number of jabber frames 0to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 O6CA Port 31 Number of collisions occurred 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 06CC Port 31 Number of late collisions 0 to 1 F9 0 occurred 4294967295 O6CE Port 31 Number of 64 byte frames Oto 1 F9 0 received sent 4294967295 0650 Port 31 Number of 65 to 127 byte Oto 1 F9 0 rames received sent 4294967295 06D2 Port 31 Number of 128 to 255 byte Oto 1 F9 0 rames received sent 4294967295 06D4 Port 31 Number of 256 to 511 byte Oto 1 F9 0 rames received sent 4294967295 0606 Port 31 Number of 512 to 1023 byte Oto 1 F9 0 rames received sent 4294967295 18 34 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 18 MODBUS PROTOCOL MULTILINK ML1200 MANAG MODBUS PROTOCOL Table 18 1 Modbus memory map Sheet 32 of 33 Address Description Range Step Format Default 06D8 Port 31 Number of 1023
124. 295 055E Port 24 Total frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0560 Port 24 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 0562 Port 24 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 0564 Port 24 Number of frames with CRC 0 to 1 F9 0 error 4294967295 0566 Port 24 Number of oversized frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 0568 Port 24 Number of bad fragments Oto 1 F9 0 received 64 bytes 4294967295 056A Port 24 Number of jabber frames 01 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 056C Port 24 Number of collisions occurred 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 056E Port 24 Number of late collisions 0 to 1 F9 0 occurred 4294967295 0570 Port 24 Number of 64 byte frames 0to 1 F9 0 received sent 4294967295 0572 Port 24 Number of 65 to 127 byte 01 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 0574 Port 24 Number of 128 to 255 byte 01 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 0576 Port 24 Number of 256 to 511 byte Oto 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 0578 Port 24 Number of 512 to 1023 byte 0to 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 057A Port 24 Number of 1023 to maximum 0 to 1 F9 0 byte frames received sent 4294967295 057C Port 24 Number of MAC error packets Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 057E Port 24 Number of dropped received Oto 1 F9 0 packets 4294967295 0580 Port 24 Number of multicast frames Oto 1 F9 0 sent 4294967295 0582 Port 24 Number of broadcast frames Oto 1 F9 0 sent 4294967295 0584 Port 24 Number of 64 byte fragments Oto 1
125. 3 Fiber 100 4 Giga 10 100 1000 triple speed 5 Giga Copper 1000 TP 6 Giga SFP e F9 32 bit unsigned long String A sequence of octets packed 2 to one register in sequence MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 18 37 MODBUS PROTOCOL CHAPTER 18 MODBUS PROTOCOL 18 38 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL Digital Energy Multilin Multilink ML1200 Managed Field Switch Appendix A 1 Revision History A 1 1 Change Notes Table A 1 Revision history Part Number Revision Release Date 1601 9095 A1 3 3 0 3 June 2009 A 1 2 Changes to the Manual Table A 2 Updates for Manual Revision A1 Section Description General New Manual A1 General Firmware release 3 3 0 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL APPENDIX A CHAPTER A APPENDIX A A 2 Warranty A 2 1 GEMultilin Warranty Statement General Electric Multilin Inc GE Multilin warrants each switch it manufactures to be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of 24 months from date of shipment from factory In the event of a failure covered by warranty GE Multilin will undertake to repair or replace the relay providing the warrantor determined that it is defective and it is returned with all transportation charges prepaid to an authorized service centre or the factory Re
126. 3 Number of 64 byte frames Oto 1 F9 0 received sent 4294967295 0540 Port 23 Number of 65 to 127 byte Oto 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 0542 Port 23 Number of 128 to 255 byte 0to 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 0544 Port 23 Number of 256 to 511 byte Oto 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 0546 Port 23 Number of 512 to 1023 byte 0to 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 0548 Port 23 Number of 1023 to maximum 0 to 1 F9 0 byte frames received sent 4294967295 054A Port 23 Number of MAC error packets Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 054C Port 23 Number of dropped received 0to 1 F9 0 packets 4294967295 054E Port 23 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sen 4294967295 ED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 18 27 MODBUS PROTOCOL CHAPTER 18 MODBUS PROTOCOL Table 18 1 Modbus memory map Sheet 25 of 33 Address Description Range Step Format Default 0550 Port 23 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sent 4294967295 0552 Port 23 Number of 64 byte fragments Oto 1 F9 0 with good CRC 4294967295 0554 Port 24 Number of bytes received 0to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0556 Port 24 Number of bytes sent Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 0558 Port 24 Number of frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 055A Port 24 Number of frames sent 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 055C Port 24 Total bytes received 01 1 F9 0 4294967
127. 31 9 0 0 14 FX 0 4 50 125 23 5 31 5 5 2 0 12 4 CA 100Mb Single mode 18 1300 9 125 15 31 14 28 17 5 35 FX 0 4 CB 100Mb Single mode40 1300 9 125 5 34 29 58 32 5 65 FX 0 4 ICC 100Mb Multi mode 2 1300 62 5 125 20 31 9 0 0 15 8 5 5 FX 0 4 50 125 23 5 31 5 5 2 0 12 2 4 0 CD 100Mb Multi mode 2 1300 62 5 125 19 31 12 16 5 7 FX 0 4 ICE 100Mb Single Mode 15 1310 9 125 15 28 11 22 FX 0 4 H3 HG 1000 Mb FX Single Mode 10 1310 9 125 10 0 22 10 22 11 24 Gigabit 4 4 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 4 OPERATION OPERATION H4 HH 1000 Mb FX Single Mode 25 1310 9 125 3 0 21 16 0 18 45 Gigabit H5 HI 1000 Mb FX Single Mode 40 1550 9 125 5 0 22 15 60 17 68 Gigabit H6 HJ 1000 Mb FX Single Mode 70 1550 9 125 2 0 1 22 18 90 20 100 Gigabit MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL v NOTE The use of either multi mode or single mode fiber to operate at 100Mbps speed over long distances i e in excess of approx 400 meters can be achieved only if the following factors are both applied e The 100Mb fiber segment must operate in full duplex FDX mode i e the full duplex factory default setting for 100Mbps fiber ports must be used and e The worst case OPB of the fiber link must be greater than the fiber cable s passive
128. 32768 Bridge Forward Delay Indicates the duration the switch waits from listening to learning states and from learning to forwarding states The value ranges from 4 to 30 seconds with a default of 15 Bridge Hello Time When the switch is the root device this is the time between messages being transmitted The value is from 1 to 10 seconds with a default of 2 Bridge Max Age This is the maximum time a message with STP information is allowed by the switch before the switch discards the information and updates the address table Value range from 6 to 40 seconds with default value of 20 Root Port Indicates the port number elected as the root port of the switch A root port of O indicates STP is disabled Root Path Cost A path cost is assigned to individual ports for the switch to determine which ports are the forwarding points A higher cost indicates more loops a lower cost indicates fewer loops More loops equal more traffic and a tree which requires a long time to converge resulting in a slower system Designated Root Displays the MAC address of the bridge in the network elected or designated as the root bridge When STP is not enabled the switch designates itself as the root switch Designated Root Priority Shows the designated root bridge s priority The default value is 32768 Root Bridge Forward Delay Indicates the designated root bridge forward delay This is the time the switch waits before switching from the listening
129. 4 0 0 1 The valid range can be from 60 to 127 seconds with a default of 125 set qi interval lt value gt The set qri command sets the query response interval representing the maximum amount of time that can elapse between when the querier router sends a host query message and when it receives a response from a host The range can be from 2 to 270 seconds with a default of 10 Restrictions apply to the maximum value because of an internal calculation that is dependent on the value of the query interval set qri interval lt value gt MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 195 7 IGMP CHAPTER 15 IGMP 15 2 2 Example The following example shows how to configure IGMP Example 15 1 Configuring IGMP ML1200l igmp set port port 2 4 mode forward Port mode is set ML1200ligmp show port Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Auto Auto Auto ML1200 igmp show router RouterlIp PortNo Timer continued on next page 15 8 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 15 IGMP Configuring IGMP continued ML1200 igmpHt4 set leave enable IGMP IGMP immediate leave status is enabled ML1200ligmp show igmp IGMP State Enabled ImmediateLeave Enabled Querier Enabled Querier Interval 125 Querier Response Interval 10 Multicasting Unknown Streams Enabled ML1200ligmp set leave disable IGMP immediate leave status is disabled ML1200ligmp sho
130. 5 0 gt Uptime 0 Days 00 10 55 FIGURE 1 4 Welcome screen 1 5 2 Privilege Levels e Operator privilege users operator privileges allow views of the current configurations but do not allow changes to the configuration e Manager privilege users manager privileges allow configuration changes The changes can be done at the manager prompt or for global configuration as well as specific configuration 1 5 3 User Management A maximum of five users can be added per switch Users can be added deleted or changed from a manager level account There can be more than one manager account subject to the maximum number of users on the switch being restricted to five Select the Administration gt User Mgmt gt User Accounts menu item To add a user use the add button The username must be a unique name The password is recommended to be at least 8 characters long with a mix of upper case lower case numbers and special characters MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 17 INTRODUCTION CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION Graphical Display User Management E Administration File Mart O Ping System Set O Telnet User Accounts User Mgmt OTACACS manager Manager Reboot operator Operator E Configuration In the following example below the user peter was added with manager privilege after clicking the add button Graphical Display User Management Ei
131. 50000 Forwarding 80 00 00 20 06 2b e1 55 00 02 135 12 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 13 RAPID SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL RAPID SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL Configuring RSTP continued RSTP CONFIGURATION Rapid STP STP Enabled Global YES RSTP STP Enabled Ports 59 tese Protocol Normal RSTP Bridge ID Bridge Priority Bridge Forward Delay Bridge Hello Time Bridge Max Age Root Port Root Path Cost Designated Root 2 8000200220206 25 21 55 32768 20 05 30 p 8 SOSOWRWOsAORWG 5 Ao Reile es Designated Root Priority 32768 Root Bridge Forward Delay 20 13 2 2 Smart RSTP Ring Only Mode through the Command Line Interface CLI A special case of a mesh structure is a ring In many networks network managers prefer to create a ring structure for redundancy and simplicity of the topology In a ring structure All switches in the network are GE Multilin switches RSTP is enabled on all the switches The topology is a ring FW Npe All switches in the ring have been configured to use the Smart RSTP ring only mode as shown below 5 Allswitches in the ring must use the same firmware revision The ring structure can demonstrate fast recovery times typically faster than what RSTP can recover from a single fault In many situations RSTP will recover in seconds whereas smart RSTP ring only mode will recover in milliseconds To configure Ring Only mod
132. 59 QoS Type 2 6 4 12 20 28 36 44 52 60 OK 3 7 5 13 21 29 37 45 53 61 Loot OQ Port 6 14 22 30 38 46 54 62 7 15 23 31 39 47 55 63 After the port QoS settings are completed the changes are reflected on the QoS menu screen The port 1 QoS settings indicate high priority set Graphical Display Administration E Configuration 5 Access Bridging IGMP 6 LACP Logs Port or F 9 RADIUS E O RSTP O SMTP SNMP Statistics amp O VLAN 14 10 Quality of Service QoS Lot 20090 2 3 4 5 B 7 if Applicable Edit Weight MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 14 QUALITY OF SERVICE QUALITY OF SERVICE Next a tag based QoS is enabled on port 3 Note that only the menu area for the tag setting is relevant Graphical Display Quality of Service QoS Loot 0O O Administration E Configuration T Access Port 3 v QoS Type v Bridging 4 um d E OMP Priority Settings Applicable For Port Based QoS Only Pv6 Priority Em X OLACP Logs Port Tag Settings Applicable For Tag Based QoS Only of 0 1 2 3 F RADIUS 4 5 6 7 F RSTP SMTP SNMP TOS Level Settings Applicable For TOS Based QoS Only SNTP T Statistics a i z 3 3 7 VLAN
133. 6 dips 250 300cycle Voltage Dip amp interruption IEC61000 4 11 interrupts Environmental Cold DNV 2 4 25C Environmental Dry heat DNV 2 4 70C Relative Humidity Cyclic DNV 2 4 2 day CISPR22 IEC60255 25 Class A FCC Part 15 Subpart B Class A Safety EN60950 1 stanadard Harmonics EN61000 3 2 Flicker EN61000 3 3 Ingress Protection IEC60529 IP20A Sinusoidal Vibration DNV 2 4 1to4G MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 8 INTRODUCTION APPROVALS CE Compliance North America ISO WARRANTY Applicable Council Directive Low voltage directive EMC Directive cULus Manufactured under a registered quality program Three years per UL 60950 temperature rating Made in USA 1 6 CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION According to EN60950 1 EN61000 6 2 EN61000 6 4 UL60950 1 C22 2 No 60950 1 1509001 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION 1 4 Command Line Interface Firmware 1 4 1 Console Connection The connection to the console is accessed through the DB 9 RS232 connector on the switch marked as the console port This command line interface or CLI provides access to the switch commands It can be accessed by attaching a VT100 compatible terminal or a PC running terminal emulation firmware to the console port USB to serial adapters are also available for computers that do not support native serial ports but have access
134. 67295 0490 Port 20 Number of frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0492 Port 20 Number of frames sent 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0494 Port 20 Total bytes received 01 1 F9 0 4294967295 0496 Port 20 Total frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0498 Port 20 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 049A Port 20 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 049C Port 20 Number of frames with CRC 0 to 1 F9 0 error 4294967295 049E Port 20 Number of oversized frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 04A0 Port 20 Number of bad fragments Oto 1 F9 0 received 64 bytes 4294967295 04A2 Port 20 Number of jabber frames Oto 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 O4A4 Port 20 Number of collisions occurred 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 04A6 Port 20 Number of late collisions 0 to 1 F9 0 occurred 4294967295 18 24 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 18 MODBUS PROTOCOL MULTILINK ML1200 MANAG MODBUS PROTOCOL Table 18 1 Modbus memory map Sheet 22 of 33 Address Description Range Step Format Default 04A8 Port 20 Number of 64 byte frames Oto 1 F9 0 received sent 4294967295 O4AA Port 20 Number of 65 to 127 byte Oto 1 F9 0 rames received sent 4294967295 O4AC Port 20 Number of 128 to 255 byte Oto 1 F9 0 rames received sent 4294967295 O4AE Port 20 Numb
135. 7 50 ef 31 40 00 60 29 22 15 85 00 03 47 ca ac 45 0033048 70271523 2 ENABLE NONE NONE DISABLE 0 Not Configured 3 ENABLE NONE NONE ENABLE 0 00 cli00s7frec o0 4 ENABLE NONE NONE DISABLE 0 Not Configured 5 ENABLE NONE NONE DISABLE 0 Not Configured 6 ENABLE NONE NONE DISABLE 0 Not Configured ML1200lport securityHHt save Saving current configuration Configuration saved ML1200 port securityHHt learn port 3 disable Port Learning Disabled on selected port s ML1200 port securityHHt action port 3 drop Port security Action type set to Drop on selected port s ML1200lport securityHtt show port security port 3 PORT STATE SIGNAL ACTION LEARN COUNT MAC ADDRESS 3 ENABLE NONE DROP ENABLE 0 00 c1 00 7 ec 00 ML1200 port securityHH signal port 3 logandtrap Port security Signal type set to Log and Trap on selected port s ML1200 port securityHHt exit 12008 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 ACCESS CONSIDERATIONS ACCESS CONSIDERATIONS such as unexpected behavior The specific types of logs can be viewed and cleared The show log command displays the log information and the clear 1og command clears the log entries The syntax for these commands is shown below show log 1 5 informational debug fatal critical activity clear log informational debug activity critical fatal Theset logsize command set the number of lines to be collected in the log before the oldest record is re w
136. 7295 0262 Port 8 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sen 4294967295 0264 Port 8 Number of 64 byte fragments 01 1 F9 0 with good CRC 4294967295 0266 Port 9 Number of bytes received Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 0268 Port 9 Number of bytes sent 0to 1 F9 0 4294967295 026A Port 9 Number of frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 026C Port 9 Number of frames sent 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 026E Port 9 Total bytes received Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 0270 Port 9 Total frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0272 Port 9 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 0274 Port 9 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 0276 Port 9 Number of frames with CRC 0 to 1 F9 0 error 4294967295 18 14 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 18 MODBUS PROTOCOL MODBUS PROTOCOL Table 18 1 Modbus memory map Sheet 12 of 23 Address Description Range Step Format Default 0278 Port 9 Number of oversized frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 027A Port 9 Number of bad fragments Oto 1 F9 0 received 64 bytes 4294967295 027C Port 9 Number of jabber frames Oto 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 027E Port 9 Number of collisions occurred 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0280 Port 9 Number of late collisions 0 to 1 F9 0 occurred 4294967295 0282 Port 9 Number of 64 byte frames
137. 79 Port 4 link status 0to1 1 F3 0 007A Port 5 link status 0to1 1 F3 0 007B Port 6 link status 0to1 1 F3 0 007C Port 7 link status Otol 1 F3 0 007D Port 8 link status Otol 1 F3 0 007E Port 9 link status 0to1 1 F3 0 007F Port 10 link status Otol 1 F3 0 0080 Port 11 link status Otol 1 F3 0 0081 Port 12 link status 0to1 1 F3 0 0082 Port 13 link status Otol 1 F3 0 0083 Port 14 link status 0to1 1 F3 0 0084 Port 15 link status 0to1 1 F3 0 0085 Port 16 link status 0to1 1 F3 0 0086 Port 17 link status 0to1 1 F3 0 0087 Port 18 link status 0to1 1 F3 0 0088 Port 19 link status 0to1 1 F3 0 0089 Port 20 link status 0to1 1 F3 0 008A Port 21 link status 0to1 1 F3 0 008B Port 22 link status 0to1 1 F3 0 008C Port 23 link status 0to1 1 F3 0 008D Port 24 link status 0to1 1 F3 0 008E Port 25 link status 0to1 1 F3 0 008F Port 26 link status 0to1 1 F3 0 ED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 18 5 MODBUS PROTOCOL CHAPTER 18 MODBUS PROTOCOL Table 18 1 Modbus memory map Sheet 3 of 33 Address Description Range Step Format Default 0090 Port 27 link status 0to1 1 F3 0 0091 Port 28 link status Otol 1 F3 0 0092 Port 29 link status Otol 1 F3 0 0095 Port 30 link status Otol 1 ES 0 0094 Port 31 link status Otol 1 F3 0 0095 Port 32 link status Otol 1 F3 0 0096 Port 1 STP st
138. 8 Port 6 Number of MAC error packets Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 O1FA Port 6 Number of dropped received Oto 1 F9 0 packets 4294967295 1 Port 6 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sen 4294967295 O1FE Port 6 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sen 4294967295 0200 Port 6 Number of 64 byte fragments Oto 1 F9 0 with good CRC 4294967295 0202 Port 7 Number of bytes received 01 1 F9 0 4294967295 0204 Port 7 Number of bytes sent 0to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0206 Port 7 Number of frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 18 12 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 18 MODBUS PROTOCOL MODBUS PROTOCOL Table 18 1 Modbus memory map Sheet 10 of 23 Address Description Range Step Format Default 0208 Port 7 Number of frames sent 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 020A Port 7 Total bytes received 0to 1 F9 0 4294967295 020C Port 7 Total frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 020E Port 7 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 0210 Port 7 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 0212 Port 7 Number of frames with CRC 0 to 1 F9 0 error 4294967295 0214 Port 7 Number of oversized frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 0216 Port 7 Number of bad fragments Oto 1 F9 0 received 64 bytes 4294967295 0218 Port 7 Number of jabber frames Oto 1 F9 0 received
139. 8 help set time set time Sets the device Time Usage set time hour 0 23 min lt 0 59 gt sec lt 0 59 gt zone GMT hh mm ML1200 The options for a specific command can be displayed by typing the command and pressing enter The following syntax applies command lt Enter gt For example the options for the show command are ML1200 show lt Enter gt Usage show active stp show active snmp show active vlan show address table show age show alarm show arp show auth lt config ports gt show backpressure show bootmode more Other ways to display help specifically with reference to a command or a set of commands use the TAB key The following syntax applies TAB Command string TAB First character of the command TAB For example following the syntax listed above the TAB key will list the available commands in the particular privilege level ML1200 lt TAB gt MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 13 INTRODUCTION CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION alarm clear enable exit help logout ping set show telnet terminal walkmib whoami ML1200 The following example lists commands starting with a specific string ML1200 s TAB set show ML1200 In the following example the TAB key completes the command ML1200 gt se lt TAB gt password timeout vlan ML1200 set 1 4 10 Exiting To exit from the CLI interface and terminate th
140. 94967295 060C Port 27 Number of 256 to 511 byte Oto 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 060E Port 27 Number of 512 to 1023 byte 01 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 0610 Port 27 Number of 1023 to maximum 0 to 1 F9 0 byte frames received sent 4294967295 0612 Port 27 Number of MAC error packets Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 0614 Port 27 Number of dropped received 1 F9 0 packets 4294967295 0616 Port 27 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sen 4294967295 0618 Port 27 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sen 4294967295 061A Port 27 Number of 64 byte fragments Oto 1 F9 0 with good CRC 4294967295 061C Port 28 Number of bytes received Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 061 Port 28 Number of bytes sent Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 0620 Port 28 Number of frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0622 Port 28 Number of frames sent 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0624 Port 28 Total bytes received Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 0626 Port 28 Total frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0628 Port 28 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 062A Port 28 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 062C Port 28 Number of frames with CRC 0 to 1 F9 0 error 4294967295 062E Port 28 Number of oversized frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 ED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 18 31 MODBUS PROTOCOL CHAPTER 18 MODBUS PROTOCOL Table 18 1 Modbus memory map Sheet 29 of 33
141. 95 0428 Port 18 Number of bytes received 0to 1 F9 0 4294967295 042A Port 18 Number of bytes sent Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 042C Port 18 Number of frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 042E Port 18 Number of frames sent 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0430 Port 18 Total bytes received 01 1 F9 0 4294967295 0432 Port 18 Total frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0434 Port 18 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 0436 Port 18 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 18 22 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 18 MODBUS PROTOCOL MULTILINK ML1200 MANAG MODBUS PROTOCOL Table 18 1 Modbus memory map Sheet 20 of 33 Address Description Range Step Format Default 0438 Port 18 Number of frames with CRC 0 to 1 F9 0 error 4294967295 043A Port 18 Number of oversized frames Oto 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 043C Port 18 Number of bad fragments Oto 1 F9 0 received 64 bytes 4294967295 043E Port 18 Number of jabber frames Oto 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 0440 Port 18 Number of collisions occurred 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0442 Port 18 Number of late collisions 0 to 1 F9 0 occurred 4294967295 0444 Port 18 Number of 64 byte frames Oto 1 F9 0 received sent 4294967295 0446 Port 18 Number of 65 to 127 byte Oto 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4
142. ACACS works in conjunction with the local user list on the ML1200 software operating system The process of authentication as well as authorization is shown in the flow chart below Login as Operator se Login User in Local User List No TACACS Enabled Yes Is User Manager Login as Manager Logout Authentication failure Conn TACACS server to authenticate Connection failure Per Additional Logout Servers Authorized as Authenticated Operator or Authorization failure TACACS authorization Authorized as Manager Logout Login as Operator Login as Manager 754716A1 CDR FIGURE 8 1 TACACS Authorization Flowchart The above flow diagram shows the tight integration of TACACS authentication with the local user based authentication There are two stages a user goes through in TACACS The first stage is authentication where the user is verified against the network user database The second stage is authorization where it is determined whether the user has operator access or manager privileges 8 1 5 TACACS Packet Packet encryption is a supported and is a configurable option for the ML1200 software When encrypted all authentication and authorization TACACS packets are encrypted and are not readable by protocol capture and sniffing devices such as EtherReal or others Packe
143. AGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 ACCESS CONSIDERATIONS To deny a mac address use the following port security port security ps enable port security deny mac address list range port lt num list range gt ACCESS CONSIDERATIONS port security action port lt num list range gt drop Example 6 1 views port security settings on a switch Learning is enabled on port 1 This port has 6 stations connected to it with the MAC addresses as shown Other ports have learning disabled and the MAC addresses are not configured on those ports Example 6 1 Viewing the port security settings ML1200 show port security PORT STATE 1 ENABLE LOG 2 ENABLE NONE 3 ENABLE NONE 4 ENABLE NONE 5 ENABLE NONE 6 ENABLE NONE ML1200 port security NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE Example 6 2 Enabling learning on a port O O O0 O0 ML1200 port securityHt learn port 3 enable Port Learning Enabled on selected port s ML1200lport securityHtt show port security PORT STATE ENABLE LOG D ENABLE NONE 3 ENABLE NONE 4 ENABLE NONE 5 ENABLE NONE 6 ENABLE NONE ML1200 port security MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL SIGNAL NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE DISABLE ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE O MAC ADDRESS 30 48 HOS ETOS ET Be 3b5 acs Configured Configur
144. AN By assigning the same VID to VLANs on many switches one or more VLAN broadcast domain can be extended across a large network 802 1Q compliant switch ports such as those on the MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch can be configured to transmit tagged or untagged frames A tag field containing VLAN information can be inserted into an Ethernet frame If a port has an 802 1Q compliant device attached such as another switch these tagged frames can carry VLAN membership information between switches thus letting a VLAN span multiple switches Normally connections between switches can carry multiple VLAN information and this is called port trunking or 802 1Q trunks There is one important caveat administrators must ensure ports with non 802 1Q compliant devices attached are configured to transmit untagged frames Many network interface cards such as those for PCs printers and other dumb switches are not 802 1Q compliant If they receive a tagged frame they will not understand the VLAN tag and will drop the frame In situations like these its best to use port based VLANs for connecting to these devices Sometimes a port may want to listen to broadcasts across different VLANs or propagate the VLAN information on to other ports This port must thus belong to multiple VLANs so that the broadcast information reaches the port accurately If the port also wants to send broadcast traffic the proper leave sending out of information and join r
145. Additionally MAC addresses can be added or deleted from the table of allowed MAC addresses gt delete a MAC address click on the delete icon Z4 D To add a MAC address click on the Add button and fill in the MAC address in the MAC address window MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL ACCESS CONSIDERATIONS CHAPTER 6 ACCESS CONSIDERATIONS Graphical Display Port Security View Logout eo o E Administration CER E Configuration Access Bridging IGMP IPv6 O LACP Action Status Logs E Port Learn Status X Broadcast Protect Settings Cancel Port Number 1 Signal Status bed OK Mirroring GoS O RADIUS SrNo Address n E O RSTP 1 00 76 76 80 00 00 SMTP SNMP Statistics 3 Ej O VLAN e Add There is a limitation of 200 MAC addresses per port and 500 MAC addresses per switch for port security After clicking on the Add button the following screen appears allowing the entry of a specific MAC address b Mac Address XX XX XX XX XX XX Cancel OK Once port security is setup it is important to manage the log and review it often If the signals are sent to the trap receiver the traps should also be reviewed for intrusion and other infractions MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 ACCESS CONSIDERATIONS ACCESS CONSI
146. B 8 Port TP Module MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL IP ADDRESSING CHAPTER 5 IP ADDRESSING System Manager This area configures System related information 5 5 Edit below this line only system name Main system contact someoneGjoe com system locationz Markham Ontario boot modesmanual system ip 192 168 1 15 system subnet 0 0 0 0 system gateway 192 168 1 11 idle_timeout 10 telnet_access enable snmp_access enable web_access enable more FIGURE 5 2 show config command output MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 IP ADDRESSING IP ADDRESSING ML1200 show config module snmp HARDWARE type ML1200 slotB 8 Port TP Module Network Management This area configures the SNMPv3 agent SNMP engineid LE_v3Engine defreadcomm public defwritecomme private deftrapcomm public authtrap disable com2sec_count
147. BUS PROTOCOL Table 18 1 Modbus memory map Sheet 4 of 33 MODBUS PROTOCOL Address Description Range Step Format Default OOBE Port 9 activity Otol 1 F3 0 OOBF Port 10 activity Otol 1 F3 0 00CO Port 11 activity Otol 1 F3 0 00C1 Port 12 activity Otol 1 F3 0 00C2 Port 13 activity Otol 1 F3 0 00C3 Port 14 activity Otol 1 F3 0 00C4 Port 15 activity Otol 1 F3 0 00C5 Port 16 activity Otol 1 F3 0 00C6 Port 17 activity Otol 1 F3 0 00C7 Port 18 activity Otol 1 F3 0 00C8 Port 19 activity Otol 1 F3 0 00C9 Port 20 activity Otol 1 F3 0 O00CA Port 21 activity Otol 1 F3 0 00CB Port 22 activity Otol 1 F3 0 00CC Port 25 activity Otol 1 F3 0 O00CD Port 24 activity Otol 1 F3 0 OOCE Port 25 activity Otol 1 F3 0 OOCF Port 26 activity Otol 1 F3 0 00DO Port 27 activity Otol 1 F3 0 00D1 Port 28 activity Otol 1 F3 0 00D2 Port 29 activity Otol 1 F3 0 0053 Port 30 activity Otol 1 ES 0 00 4 Port 31 activity Otol 1 F3 0 00D5 Port 32 activity Otol 1 F3 0 00D6 Port 1 Number of bytes received 0to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0058 Port 1 Number of bytes sent 0to 1 F9 0 4294967295 OODA Port 1 Number of frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 O00DC Port 1 Number of frames sent Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 OODE Port 1 Total bytes received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 OOEO Port 1 Total frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 00 2
148. CE ccssssscssscsssssssesssssssesescsesesesesesesesesesesesesencsenssenesenssensese 4 13 5 IP ADDRESSING IP ADDRESS AND SYSTEM INFORMATION 5 1 OVERVIEW oet A E RN 5 1 IMPORTANCE OF AN IP 5 3 DHCP AND BOOTP BOOTP DATABASE scitu nte a ia sem es i CONFIGURING DHCP BOOTP MANUAL AUTO 5 3 USING TELNET een RR Re bem tme nti dp Pe RR 5 5 SETUNG AN 5 8 SETTING SERIAL PORT PARAMETERS 5 8 SYSTEM PARAMETERS Detector eene m est RAEL 5 8 DATE AND TIME NETWORK TIME CONFIGURATION etes ioa tci posue 5 14 SAVING AND LOADING COMMAND LINE 5 14 CONFIG FILE zat etre t it ctus ta t P Ran OR 5 14 DISPLAYING CONFIGURATION sesssesssssssesssscssssssscesscssscessensscesscsssenssessssesnesssstsnsssssesnessssesns 5 17 SAVING CONEIGURATION rere etie chere te enc dee tette 5 20 SCRIPT FILE SAVING AND LOADING ENERVISTA SOFTWARE Host NAMES ERASING CONFIGURATION ec estt ei 5 27 CONFIGURING PVG ira CRT 5 55 LIST OF COMMANDS IN THIS CHAPTER ssssssessssssssssssssssssssesssesssesssessse
149. CS Tunneling is enabled ML1200 userHHt tacserver add id 2 ip 10 21 1 123 encryptzenabl TACACS server is added ML1200 user show tacplus servers ID TACACS Server Port Encrypt eere Eno Enabled secret 22 dq Enabled some ML1200 user tacserver delete id 2 TACACS server is deleted ML1200 user show tacplus servers TACACS Server Port Encrypt Enabled secret ML1200 user tacplus disable TACACS is disabled ML1200 user MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 8 5 ACCESS USING TACACS CHAPTER 8 ACCESS USING TACACS 8 3 Configuring TACACS with EnerVista Secure Web Management software gt To access the TACACS servers select the Administration gt User Mgmt gt TACACS menu item By default no TACACS servers are defined Graphical Display TACACS Tar eo e Administration File Mgmt Ping System Set Status Disabled X Tenet ID iPABdress TCPPot E User Mamt User Accounts Reboot Configuration Ada gt add a server click on the Add button as shown below Graphical Display TACACS Logout 9 Qo o E Administration 3 File Mamt Ping System Set Telnet User Mgmt User Accounts Reboot Configuration ID 1 v gt IP Address 192 60 1 12 TCP Port Encrypt enable M Key somesecret Manager Level gt Operator Level Cancel
150. Configuration gt Statistics gt Port Statistics menu item Graphical Display Port Statistics Logout Qo o Administration Configuration Access R E Bridging Slot Port IMP O Pye ra EE OLACP 3 Logs 5 4 v Port QoS Bytes Received 34251 RADIUS RSTP Bytes Sent 525401 id Frames Received 756 SNMP SNTP E Statistics Log Statistics Total Bytes Received 94251 VLAN Total Frames Received 756 Broadcast Frames Received 82 Frames Sent 729 L1 m Broadcast Frames Sent 0 Each port can be viewed by clicking on the back or forward buttons Each group represents different statistics MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 17 8 MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS CHAPTER 17 MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS The following figure displays the port statistics for group 2 Graphical Display Administration E Configuration E Access E Bridging IGMP O IPv6 LACP Logs Port 0005 H O RADIUS amp ORSTP 0 SMTP SNMP 0 5 E 0 Statistics Log Statistics gt Port Statistic H O VLAN Port Statistics lout 99 ETE Slot MCast Frames Received 5 MCast Frames Sent 1 64 byte Good Fragments D Frames With CRC Error 0 Oversized Frames Received 0 Bad Fragments Received D Jabber Frames Received
151. DERATIONS 6 3 2 Logs Wy NOTE All events occurring on the Managed MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch are logged The events can be informational e g login STP synchronization etc debugging logs for debugging network and other values critical critical events activity traffic activity and fatal events such as unexpected behavior The specific types of logs can be viewed and cleared To view the logs in the EnerVista Secure Web Management software select the Configuration gt Logs menu item Graphical Display Logged Events Loot 0O Administration El Configuration E O Access ra All Events X 0 Bridging E O IGMP Date and Time Severity Event Description feos Pv a 01 01 2001 12 Info LAN Vlan type set to None E OLACP a 01 01 2001 12 C Info AUTH Authentication Disabled offs w 01 01 2001 12 C Notice SYSMGR System Was Rebooted By Console Ci _ Port w 01 01 2001 12 C Notice SNTP System Clock Set to Default aS a 01 01 2001 12 C Info AUTH Authentication Disabled E O RADIUS o 01 01 2001 12 C Info PORT Port 1 Link Down O RSTP a 01 01 2001 12 C Info PORT Port 7 Link Down SMTP i 01 01 2001 12 C Info PORT Port 1 Link Up SNMP a 01 01 2001 12 C Info PORT Part 7 Link Up w 01 01 2001 12 Notice CLI Session Started from Console E Statistics w 01 01 2001 12 C Notice CLI User manager Login From Console ENEAN 4 01 01 2001 12 C Info SYSMGR System Boot M
152. DRESSING CHAPTER 5 IP ADDRESSING The show console command can show the status of the telnet client as well as other console parameters The following example reviews the console parameters with the show console command Note that telnet is enabled ML1200 show console Console Serial Link Inbound Telnet Enabled Yes Outbound Telnet Enabled Yes Web Console Enabled Yes SNMP Enabled Yes Terminal Type VT100 Screen Refresh Interval sec 3 Baud Rate 38400 Flow Control None Session Inactivity Time min 10 ML1200 Users can telnet to a remote host from the MultiLink family of switches using the following syntax telnet lt ipaddress gt port lt port number gt The default port for telnet is 23 To start a telnet session through the EnerVista Secure Web Management software gt Select the Administration gt Telnet menu item Graphical Display Logout Hi eo o E Administration E File Mgmt Ping System H O Set of User Mgmt Reboot Configuration T 3 94 247 179 HyperTerminal File Edit view Call Transfer Help Dg 53 D8 iE Copyright c 2005 GE Multilin All rights reserved RESTRICTED RIGHTS Use duplication or disclosure is subject to U S Government as set forth in Sub division b 3 ii of the rights in Techn Computer Software clause at 52 227 7013 GE Multilin 215 Anderson Ave Markham Ontario Canada L6E 1B3 www gemultilin com ML1200 Version 3 3 0 Login T
153. Do not enable RADIUS capabilities until you have ensured that the ports are configured properly After the ports are configured enable RADIUS Also ensure that the port connected to the RADIUS server or the network where the RADIUS server is connected to is not an authenticated port The following window shows the configuration of a RADIUS Server Initially the RADIUS Services are disabled and the server IP address is set to 0 0 0 0 Edit the server IP and secret to add a RADIUS server Graphical Display Administration E Configuration Access Bridging O IGMP OPE OLACP Logs Port aos Ej O RADIUS Port ORSTP SMTP SNMP SNTP E Statistics VLAN MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL RADIUS Server Configuration Logout Status disable 0 0 0 0 1812 secret HE 79 ACCESS USING RADIUS CHAPTER 7 ACCESS USING RADIUS The following figure illustrates the editing of information for the RADIUS server Note the UDP port number can be left blank and the default port 1812 is used Graphical Display RADIUS Server Configuration iw SOO Administration i rd Configuration Access Bridging IGMP IPv6 OLACP Logs Port os IP Address 1 2 3 4 O RADIUS UDP Port Port RSTP Secret Key secret O SMTP SNMP 3 Cancel 0 Statistics Lr at VLAN After config
154. E Statistics VLAN Cancel OK To change the port access characteristics when authenticating with a RADIUS server D Select the Configuration gt Radius gt Port gt Access menu item Graphical Display 802 1x Authenticator Port Access CO Administration Configuration E 0 Access Bridging O IGMP O IPv6 OLACP Logs E Port 905 E O RADIUS Server E Port Set l uiet Period sec MaxReal Tx Period sec 2 30 Done wN e o RO w i sS S S SB Backend Reauth Stats E O RSTP Iz SMTP Si SNMP SNIP Statistics E 0 VLAN The Quiet Period column represents the time in seconds the supplicant is held after an authentication failure before the authenticator retries the supplicant for connection The value ranges from 0 to 65535 seconds with a default of 60 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL fil ACCESS USING RADIUS CHAPTER 7 ACCESS USING RADIUS The Max Reauth column shows the permitted reauthentication attempts before the port becomes unauthorized Values are integers ranging from 0 to 10 with a default of 2 The Tx Period column represents the transmit period This is the time in seconds the authenticator waits to transmit another request for identification from the supplicant The values range from 1 to 65535 seconds with a default of 30 The backend or communi
155. F9 0 with good CRC 4294967295 0586 Port 25 Number of bytes received 0to 1 F9 0 4294967295 18 28 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 18 MODBUS PROTOCOL MULTILINK ML1200 MANAG MODBUS PROTOCOL Table 18 1 Modbus memory map Sheet 26 of 33 Address Description Range Step Format Default 0588 Port 25 Number of bytes sent 0to 1 F9 0 4294967295 058A Port 25 Number of frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 058C Port 25 Number of frames sent 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 058E Port 25 Total bytes received 0to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0590 Port 25 Total frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0592 Port 25 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 0594 Port 25 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 0596 Port 25 Number of frames with CRC 0 to 1 F9 0 error 4294967295 0598 Port 25 Number of oversized frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 059A Port 25 Number of bad fragments 01 1 F9 0 received 64 bytes 4294967295 059C Port 25 Number of jabber frames Oto 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 059E Port 25 Number of collisions occurred 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 05A0 Port 25 Number of late collisions 0 to 1 F9 0 occurred 4294967295 05A2 Port 25 Number of 64 byte frames Oto 1 F9 0 received sent 4294967295 05A4 Port 25 Number of 65 to 127 byte 0to 1 F9
156. HARDWARE type ML1200 slotB 8 Port TP Module THHUHBHHUHBHHHHBHUHBHBBHUHBHHUHBHBBHBHBHBHBHBHBIHBHBIHBHBBBHBHBE System Manager This area configures System related information THHUHBHHUHBHHBHUIHUHBIHBBHUHBHHIHBHBUHBHBHBHHBHBIHBHBIHBHHBBHBHBE IP ADDRESSING CHAPTER 5 IP ADDRESSING SYSTEM Edit below this line only system namezML1200 system_contact support gemultilin com system_location Markham Ontario boot_mode manual system ip 192 168 5 5 system subnet 0 0 0 0 system gatewayz0 0 0 0 idle timeout 10 telnet accesszenable snmp access enable web accesszenable Edit above this line only User Accounts This area configures user accounts for accessing this system FIGURE 5 1 Contents of a config file ru 1 A config file allows only certain portions of the file to be edited by a user Changing vy any other part of the file will result in the system not allowing the file to be loaded as the CRC computed and stored in the file would not be matched Should you want to edit edit the System portion of the file only GE Multilin Inc recommends editing the script file see below 2 File names cannot have special characters such as
157. INSTALLATION eee a EE M LER MEE LOCATING MULTILINK ML1200 SWITCHES eene CONNECTING ETHERNET MEDIA ett rettet eie tetas MECHANICAL INSTALLATION DIN RAIL MOUNTING THE MULTILINK ML1200 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION iiit ree cbe EE OR POWERING THE MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH 3 8 MULTILINK 1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS ALARM CONTACTS FOR MONITORING INTERNAL POWER AND SOFTWARE TRAPS 3 8 ML1200 PORT MODULE PM INSTALLATION 3 9 CONNECTING A MANAGEMENT CONSOLE TERMINAL TO MULTILINK ML1200 SERIAL RJ 45 CONSOLE PORT 3 10 4 OPERATION FUNCTIONALITY E 4 1 SWITCHING FUNCTIONALITY a cetera recreate tei e ertet tere e detto tede 4 1 STATUS LEDS io Repo 4 2 AUTO CROSS MDIX AND AUTO NEGOTIATION FOR RJ 45 5 4 2 FLOW CONTROL IEEE 802 3 STANDARD eescsssssesssssssssssssssscssscessessscessesssesssenssenssenseseane 4 3 POWER BUDGET CALCULATIONS FOR 1200 PM s WITH FIBER MEDIA 4 4 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH PORT MODULES ee 4 6 INSPECTING THE PACKAGE AND PRODUCT 4 6 MLET200 MODULES ioci ete i rel rtt ee t ce 4 6 BEFORE CALLING FOR ASSISTAN
158. INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2 3 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION CHAPTER 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2 1 2 Four Port Copper Module C1 Module MDIX The ML1200 s 4 port Copper module the C1 Module provides four 10 100Mb switched RJ 45 ports The 10 100Mb switched ports normally as a default setting are independently N way auto negotiating and auto crossover MDIX for operation at 10 or 100Mb speed in full or half duplex mode i e each independently selects a mode and speed to match the device at the other end of the twisted pair cable See Section 5 for auto negotiation and MDIX details On the C1 module there are four LEDs for each port two integrated into the connector and two below the connector The LK Link LED indicates ready for operation on that port when lit The blinking ACT Activity LED indicates receiving Activity on that port when lit The 10 100 LED indicates operation at 100Mb speed when ON and at 10 Mb speed when OFF when auto negotiation is not disabled The FDX HDX LED is ON to indicate full duplex operation and OFF to indicate the half duplex mode A twisted pair cable must be connected into an RJ 45 port and the Link LK indicator for that port must be ON indicating there is a powered up device at the other end of the cable in order for a LK LED to provide valid indications of operating conditions on that port Using the ML1200 management software the user may disable auto negotiation and fix the desired operation of each
159. ISTA SECURE WEB MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE DESCRIPTION tte ccc ied tc pe RE e dS 11 VLAN REGISTRATION LE OVER GARP DESCRIPTION c rete ta EROR ER i ERE RR CER GVRP OPERATIONS CONFIGURING GVRP THROUGH THE COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 11 7 COMMANDS e ER E t 11 7 GVRP OPERATION 11 7 CONFIGURING GVRP WITH ENERVISTA SECURE WEB MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE 11 9 sU I Kx c 11 9 12 SPANNING TREE DERI osa MEME ME E UI MI 12 1 PROTOCOL STP DESCRIPTION s np 12 1 FEATURES AND OPERATION 12 1 e ST EE TEE NO JUL EL dU DLE 12 3 13 RAPID SPANNING qul T M9 TREE PROTOCOL DESCRIPTION ie feti hm eui ise en bm ei Ds RSTP CONCEPTS eie men t C ERE EORR c rH dom TRANSITION FROM STP TO RSTP seen tentent tentent tentent CONFIGURING RSTP THROUGH THE COMMAND LINE INTERFACE NORMAL RSTP iussi meet temm E bee ca baec venistis SMART RSTP RING ONLY MODE THROUGH THE COMMAND LINE INTERFACE CLI 13 13 CONFIGURING STP RSTP WITH ENERVISTA SECURE WEB MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE iisisti sinsin 15 15 NORMAIURSTP mte m WETTER LOW 15 15 SMART RSTP RING ONLY MODE WITH ENERVISTA
160. L1200 stp cost port 2 value 20 CHAPTER 12 SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL STP Setting cost for STP Successfully set the path cost for port 2 ML1200 stp Show stp ports STP Port Configuration Priority Path Cost TP 10 100 TP 10 100 100MB Fiber 100MB Fiber 100MB Fiber 100MB Fiber TP 10 100 ML1200 stp port port 1 status disable State Forwarding Forwarding Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Successfully set the STP status for port 1 ML1200 stp Show stp ports STP Port Configuration Port Type Priority Path Cost TP 10 100 TP 10 100 100MB Fiber 100MB Fiber 100MB Fiber 100MB Fiber TP 10 100 ML1200 stp port port 1 status disable Since port 9 does not participate in STP it is not listed here Any changes State 3 made to STP parameters on port 9 will be ignored Forwarding 80 00 00 20 06 2b e1 54 80 01 Forwarding 80 00 00 20 06 2b e1 54 80 02 Disabled 80 00 00 i 1 54 80 03 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 2b e1 54 80 04 Disabled 80 00 00 d 61 54 80 05 Disabled 80 00 00 i e 1 54 80 06 Disabled 80 00 00 36554 80 07 Successfully set the STP status for port 1 12 10 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 12 SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL STP SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL STP Configuring STP parameters continued ML1200 stp port port 1 status enable Successfully set the STP status for port 1 R 28 stp
161. L1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL Add Access Entry b IP IP Mask Telnet Web gt SNMP D0 10 10 10 0 255 255 255 0 Allow amp Allow amp Allow Cancel ODeny ODeny ODeny OK ACCESS CONSIDERATIONS CHAPTER 6 ACCESS CONSIDERATIONS 6 18 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL Digital Energy Multilin Multilink ML1200 Managed Field Switch Chapter 7 Access Using RADIUS 7 1 Introduction to 802 1x 7 1 1 Description The TACACS protocol is the latest generation of TACACS TACACS is a simple UDP User Datagram Protocol based access control protocol originally developed by BBN for the MILNET Military Network Later the enhancements were called TACACS TACACS is a TCP Transmission Control Protocol based access control protocol TCP offers a connection oriented transport while UDP offers best effort delivery making the access authentication reliable Remote Authentication Dial In User Service or RADIUS is a server that has been traditionally used by many Internet Service Providers ISP as well as Enterprises to authenticate dial in users Today many businesses use the RADIUS server for authenticating users connecting into a network For example if a user connects PC into the network whether the PC should be allowed access or not provides the same issues as to whether or not a dial in user should be allowed access into the network or not A
162. L1200 via the serial port Download the MultiLink Switch Software from the GE Multilin web site Use the null modem cable to connect to the ML1200 serial port Login at the manager level with the proper password 1 24 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION D Save the existing configuration refer to section 5 4 4 Saving Configuration for details Enter the following command ML12004 xmodem get type app Do you wish to upgrade the image Y or N Y Please start XModem file transfer now Refer to Saving Configuration on page 20 for details on the xmodem command Once the upgrade is started the terminal emulation firmware will ask for the installation file location gt Indicate the file location to begin the file transfer gt Make sure the Xmodem protocol is also selected in this file location dialog window Xmodem file send for gki Sending X C TFTP GChConfigslRel30 bin Packet 6930 Error checking Checksum Retries 1 Total retries 0 Last error File Be6Kof2578K Elapsed Remaining 00 14 17 Throughput 2046 cps In some operating systems it maybe necessary to select the transfer option In this case gt Return to the HyperTerminal window used in step 5 Select the Transfer gt Send File menu item gt As shown below enter the location of the new firmware file Select the Xmo
163. LTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 10 23 VLAN CHAPTER 10 VLAN Graphical Display Tag Based VLAN Configuration Loot OOO Administration E Configuration H 0 Access Alarm Bridging O ICMP O LACP Logs E Port 605 Join and Leave H O RADIUS E ORSTP gt Port 2 SMTP SNMP gt VLAN ID 10 O Statistics gt Status m Ej O Set Type Cancel Port Based Tag Based 0 Fitter Tagging GVRP To enable the filter capability for each port use the Configuration gt VLAN gt Tag Based gt Settings menu as shown below Graphical Display Tag Based VLAN Configuration to DOO Administration a E Configuration Access Alarm E Bridging E O IGMP OLACP Logs Port Settings Port aos RADIUS ORSTP gt Default ID 30 Y SMTP SNMP Filter Status Enable vi SNTP Statistics VLAN ID 30 v Set Type Port Based El Tag Based 8 Cancel 0 Filter Tagging GVRP Port 5 6 Tagging Control Use the Configuration gt VLAN gt Tag Based gt Filter menu to view the filter information for the ports 10 24 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL Digital Energy Multilin Multilink ML1200 Managed Field Switch Chapter 11 VLAN Registration over GARP 11 1 Overview 11 1 1 Description The G
164. Learn Enables the port to dynamically join any VLAN for which it receives and advertisement and allows the port to forward the advertisement it receives Block Prevents the port from dynamically joining a VLAN that is not statically configured on the switch The port will still forward advertisements that were received by the switch on other ports Block should typically be used on ports in insecure networks where there is exposure to attack such as ports where intruders can connect Disable Causes the port to ignore and drop all the advertisements it receives from any source The show v1an command displays a switch s current GVRP configuration including the unknown VLANs show vlan A port must be enabled and configured to learn for it to be assigned to the dynamic VLAN To send advertisements one or more tagged or untagged static VLANs must be configured on one or more switches with GVRP enabled The ML1200 software allows a dynamic VLAN to be converted to a static VLAN with the static command static vian lt VID gt The show vlan type tag command will display VID in case the VID is not known Example 11 1 illustrates how to convert a dynamic VLAN into a static VLAN As the following table indicates a port that has a tagged or untagged static VLAN has the option for both generating advertisements and dynamically joining other VLANs MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 11
165. Link 2 10 10 3 Activity 4 FULL HALF The C6 Module when installed in a Multilink ML1200 Field Switch operates on copper at 100m distances The Fiber is multi mode and cable lengths can be as much as 2 Km see Power Budget Section 4 5 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 4 OPERATION OPERATION Each port has an Activity ACT LED indicating packets being received a Link LK LED that indicates proper connectivity with the remote device when lit and a FDX HDX LED to indicate full duplex mode when lit or half duplex when off The 10 100 LED indicates 100Mbps speed when lit and at 10Mbps speed when off 4 2 2 6 CC Module 4 69100Mb multi mode FX MTRJ Small Form factor The CC Module is a multi mode fiber optic 4 port module equipped with a small form factor MTRJ type connector It looks almost like an RJ 45 port but it is black in color The MT RJ s small compact size connector and ease of connection make it a good choice for 100Mbps fiber to the desktop Ethernet connectivity When installed in a Multilink ML1200 Switch it supports fiber optic cable distances up the IEEE standard 100Mbps distance limits i e typically 2km at full duplex or half duplex 48100 Mb MTRJ Fiber Port Link 2 Activity C3 FH The functionality of this LOOBASE FX multi mode 4 port module is essentially the same as the ST and SC types It has the same LEDs per port indicating port activity ACT Link LK
166. ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 16 SNMP SNMP e SNMP user A person for which an SNMP management operation is performed The user is the person on a remote SNMP engine who receives the information e SNMP view A mapping between SNMP objects and the access rights available for those objects An object can have different access rights in each view Access rights indicate whether the object is accessible by either a community string or a user e Write view A view name not to exceed 64 characters for each group that defines the list of object identifiers OIDs that are able to be created or modified by users of the group 16 1 3 Traps The traps supported by MNS are as follows SNMP Traps Warm Start Cold Start Link Up Link Down Authentication Failure RMON Traps Rising Alarm Falling Alarm for RMON groups 1 2 3 and 9 Statistics Events Alarms and History Enterprise Traps Intruder 16 1 4 Standards There are several RFC s defining SNMP MNS supports the following RFC s and standards SNMPv1 standards Security via configuration of SNMP communities Event reporting via SNMP Managing the switch with an SNMP network management tool Supported Standard MIBs include SNMP MIB II RFC 1213 Bridge MIB RFC 1493 ifGeneralGroup ifRcvAddressGroup ifStackGroup RMON MIB RFC 1757 RMON groups 1 2 3 and 9 Statistics Events Alarms and History V ersion 1 traps Warm Start Co
167. MP parameters This screen also enables and disables IGMP Graphical Display IGMP Configuration OOO Administration aa E Configuration Access E Bridging E O IGMP information Groups Set IGMP Parameters Routers O IPv6 E OLACP IGMP Status Disabled O Logs Port QoS Querier Enabled X E O RADIUS E O RSTP Querier Interval 60 270 125 0 SMTP F SNMP Querier Response Interval 1 125 10 SNTP E Statistics VLAN Immediate Leave Disabled Multicasting Unknown Streams Enabled v Cancel OK Changes are reflected on the Configuration gt IGMP gt Information screen The groups and routers screen displays the IGMP Groups and IGMP Routers information All edits to IGMP are done through the Information screen 15 12 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL Digital Energy Multilin Multilink ML1200 Managed Field Switch Chapter 16 SNMP 16 1 Overview 16 1 1 Description SImple Network Management Protocol SNMP enables management of the network There are many software packages which provide a graphical interface and a graphical view of the network and its devices These graphical interface and view would not be possible without SNMP SNMP is thus the building block for network management 16 1 2 SNMP Concepts SNMP provides the protocol to extract the necessary information from a networked device and display the information The
168. Mgmt O TACACS 5 5 manager Manager e Reboot operator Operator 9 E Configuration Adi MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION After clicking on the edit icon the screen opens up for modifying the password Graphical Display User Management Logout 9 Qo o E Administration 3 E E File Mgmt O Ping System O Set Telnet E User Mgmt OTACACS gt User Accounts Reboot E Configuration Update Password Login ID Peter Password gt Retype Cancel In this example the user ID peter was selected for modification The password for peter will be modified after the new password is entered 1 5 4 Modifying the Privilege Level Privilege levels cannot be changed from the EnerVista Secure Web Management SWM firmware This can only be done through the CLI interface or alternately by deleting the user and adding the same user with the proper privilege level MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL INTRODUCTION CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION 1 5 5 Help Help for the EnerVista Secure Web Management software can be obtained by clicking on the Help icon as shown below gt Graphical Display EnerVista MultiLink Software Logout eo o E Administration Configuration Device Ports Logical View Multilin EnerVista MultiLink Software combined with the MultiLink Model
169. Multilin Multilink ML1200 Managed Field Switch Chapter 14 Quality of Service 14 1 QoS Overview 14 1 1 Description Quality of Service QoS refers to the capability of a network to provide different priorities to different types of traffic Not all traffic in the network has the same priority Being able to differentiate different types of traffic and allowing this traffic to accelerate through the network improves the overall performance of the network and provides the necessary quality of service demanded by different users and devices The primary goal of QoS is to provide priority including dedicated bandwidth 14 1 2 QoS Concepts The MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch supports QoS as specified in the IEEE 802 1p and IEEE 802 1q standards QoS is important in network environments where there are time critical applications such as voice transmission or video conferencing which can be adversely effected by packet transfer delays or other latency in a network Most switches today implement buffers to queue incoming packets as well as outgoing packets In a queue mechanism normally the packet which comes in first leaves first FIFO and all the packets are serviced accordingly Imagine if each packet had a priority assigned to it If a packet with a higher priority than other packets were to arrive in a queue the packet would be given a precedence and moved to the head of the queue and would go out as soon as possible The packet
170. N MANUAL CHAPTER 9 PORT MIRRORING AND SETUP PORT MIRRORING AND SETUP gt Select a specific port by using the edit icon in the Configuration gt Port Settings menu O Ping 4 Port Configuration View ub OOO System O Set Telnet i um Pot Name Conto Oupl Meda Link Speed Auto STP Reboot 1 Enabled Full 100Tx Up 100Mb Enable 1 NOSTP 7 Configuration 2 A2 Enabled Half 10T Down 10Mb Enable 1 NOSTP Access 3 A3 Enabled Full 100Fx Down 100Mb Disable 1 NOSTP Alarm 4 Ad Enabled Full 100Fx Down 100Mb Disable 1 NOSTP Bridging 5 A5 Enabled Full 100Fx Down 100Mb Disable 1 NOSTP 5 O IGMP 6 AB Enabled Full 100Fx Down 100Mb Disable 1 NOSTP Q LACP T Enabled Full 100Tx Up 100Mb Enable 1 NOSTP Logs Ei Broadcast Protect Ou Security Mirroring 00905 E RADIUS E O RSTP 0 SMTP O SNMP SNTP E Statistics 3 O VLAN gt Click the edit icon to open the following window 0 Ping 4 Port Configuration View Logout DOO System H 0 Set Telnet User Mgmt gt Name A2 Reboot E Configuration ji control Enabled Y 3 Access gt Auto Enabled M Alarm 3 Bridging gt Speed 10 Mbps O GMP gt Duplex BO LACP b Back Pressure Disabled X Logs Port gt Flow Control Disabled v Broadcast Protect
171. N MANUAL 18 23 MODBUS PROTOCOL CHAPTER 18 MODBUS PROTOCOL Table 18 1 Modbus memory map Sheet 21 of 33 Address Description Range Step Format Default 0470 Port 19 Number of jabber frames 01 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 0472 Port 19 Number of collisions occurred 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0474 Port 19 Number of late collisions 0 to 1 F9 0 occurred 4294967295 0476 Port 19 Number of 64 byte frames Oto 1 F9 0 received sent 4294967295 0478 Port 19 Number of 65 to 127 byte 0to 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 047A Port 19 Number of 128 to 255 byte 01 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 047C Port 19 Number of 256 to 511 byte 01 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 047E Port 19 Number of 512 to 1023 byte 01 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 0480 Port 19 Number of 1023 to maximum 0 to 1 F9 0 byte frames received sent 4294967295 0482 Port 19 Number of MAC error packets Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 0484 Port 19 Number of dropped received 0to 1 F9 0 packets 4294967295 0486 Port 19 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sent 4294967295 0488 Port 19 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sent 4294967295 048A Port 19 Number of 64 byte fragments Oto 1 F9 0 with good CRC 4294967295 048C Port 20 Number of bytes received Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 048E Port 20 Number of bytes sent Oto 1 F9 0 42949
172. NDS Example 17 1 Configuring SMTP to receive SNMP trap information via e mail ML12004smtp ML1200 smtp Server ip 3 94 210 25 port 25 retry 3 domain ge com Successfully set global SMTP server configuration ML1200 smtp Show smtp config SMTP Global Configuration Status Disabled SMTP Server 33 922 0 25 SMTP Server Domain ge com SMTP Server Port e 25 Retry Count IS ML1200 smtp add id 1 email jsmith ge com traps s events CF Recipient successfully added ML1200 smtp add id 2 email xyz abc com traps all events all ip 3 30 154 28 port 25 domain abc com Recipient successfully added ML1200 smtp Show smtp recipients ID E mail Address SMTP Server From Domain Port Traps Events jsmith ge com xyz abc com ML1200 smtp delete id 2 Recipient successfully deleted ML1200 smtp Show smtp recipients ML1200 smtp Show smtp recipients ID E mail Address SMTP Server From Domain Traps Events jsmithege com 3 94 210 25 17 4 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 17 MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS 17 2 Statistics 17 2 1 Viewing Port Statistics with EnerVista Secure Web Management software The EnerVista Secure Web Management software allows for the display of several statistics in a graphical format These are described below To view statistics D Select the Configuration gt Statistics menu item To view port specific statistics gt Select the
173. NG AND SETUP 9 4 5 Broadcast Storms One of the best features of the MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch is its ability to keep broadcast storms from spreading throughout a network Network storms or broadcast storms are characterized by an excessive number of broadcast packets being sent over the network These storms can occur if network equipment is configured incorrectly or the network software is not properly functioning or badly designed programs including some network games are used Storms can reduce network performance and cause bridges routers workstations servers and PCs to slow down or even crash The ML1200 is capable of detecting and limiting storms on each port A network administrator can also set the maximum rate of broadcast packets frames that are permitted from a particular interface If the maximum number is exceeded a storm condition is declared Once it is determined that a storm is occurring on an interface any additional broadcast packets received on that interface will be dropped until the storm is determined to be over The storm is determined to be over when a one second period elapses with no broadcast packets received Broadcast storm protection can be configured through the Configuration Port Broadcast Storm menu Graphical Display 4 Broadcast Protection Loot POO Administration se File Mgmt Ping System Disable HO Set Telnet Port Status Threshold CurrRate fr Activ
174. NOTE Multilink ML1200 comes with Version 3 3 management firmware which allows the user to configure the Multilink ML1200 as a Managed Switch and implements security and other software enabled features Multilink ML1200 managed switch will work with Version 3 3 firmware or higher only using any other firmware version will not support the hardware MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2 7 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION CHAPTER 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2 2 Features and Benefits e Managed switching for high performance Ethernet LANs Multilink ML1200 Switches provide unicast non blocking all ports can run at full speed at once performance with standard Managed Network Software included They are typically used in LAN traffic centers with up to 12 100Mb 2 Gigabit ports for backbone connections where managed network services are desired e Switching services includes 802 1p QoS packet prioritization The Multilink ML1200 switching hardware supports QoS giving packet processing priority to priority tagged packets according to the IEEE 802 1p standard For port and application specific priorities of data the QoS software may be configured e Features Fiber Built In Multilink ML1200 Managed Field Switches are designed to naturally include fiber ports and support mixes of multi mode single mode 10Mb 100Mb and 1000Mb speed full and half duplex classic Small Form Factor SFF and GBIC fiber connectors RJ 45 10 100 p
175. OC V TABLE OF CONTENTS MAIN COMMANDS ceci e tii ra e en EHI A ERN 17 14 CONFIGURATION COMMANDS scsssssssesssesssesssesssesssesesecesecesecssseeseceseessesssssesscesssesscesseeseceseeees 17 16 18 MODBUS PROTOCOL MODBUS CONFIGURATION ics Ele ORO DU p PER 18 1 OVERVIEW MMC at 18 1 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE SETTINGS eerte tette tto tetto tontos tte itte 18 1 ENERVISTA SETTINGS trn teret eite e dert een P RE Re RESI MEMORY ei t EREEI MODBUS MEMORY FORMAT CODES anda aq EH D aT NE erben APPENDIX A REVERTITUR oru bsc to 1 1 CHANGES TO THE A 1 WARRANTY O A 2 GE MULTILIN WARRANTY STATEMENT A 2 APPENDIX B DC POWER SPECIFICATIONS FOR MULTILINK ML1200 SWITCHES DC POWER INPUT AT 24 V AND 48 V AND 125 V DC POWER INPUT B 2 48 V DC 24 V DC AND 125 V DC POWER THEORY OF OPERATION B 3 APPLICATIONS FOR DC POWERED ETHERNET SWITCHES stessi vost rector orient B 4 MET SDO 48 V 25V 125 V DC IMSTADEATIONM s scream inattn toot pa toten tbtteces B 5 UL REDUISEMENTS FOR DC PONWVERED DUIS tao a ebrei eese B 6 OPERATION SL ute Sedul lena ETE D ne testi Na DN B 7 APPENDIX C INTERNAL SPECIFICATIONS FDR
176. P GVRP commands are shown below Refer to Chapter 11 VLAN Registration over GARP for details gvrp help gvrp configures GVRP parameters for dynamic VLAN set forbid sets forbidden ports for a tag based VLAN show ports show ports current GVRP state show forbid show forbidden ports for tag based VLAN set ports set GVRP port state usage show v lan shows dynamic static tag based VLANs static convert dynamic VLAN to static VLAN The IGMP commands are shown below Refer to Chapter 15 IGMP for additional details mcast set leave enables or disables IGMP immediate leave status set port sets the port mode set qi sets the query interval 60 to 127 for router ports set qri set querier enables or disables switch as querier show group displays IGMP group list show port displays IGMP port mode show router displays IGMP router list The Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP commands are shown below MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH lacp add port del port edit port INSTRUCTION MANUAL 17 17 MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS 17 18 CHAPTER 17 MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS The port mirroring commands are shown below Refer to Chapter 9 Port Mirroring and Setup for additional details help port mirror e prtmr enables disables port mirroring functionality e setport defines the port mirroring ports The port security commands are shown below Refer to Chapter 6 Securing Access for additional details e acti
177. PROTOCOL 13 3 Configuring STP RSTP with EnerVista Secure Web Management software To setup and configure RSTP select the Configure gt RSTP menu items In setting up RSTP or STP it is advised that the system defaults are used for weights and other parameters Only when specific ports are required to be the active link should the default values change In the window below RSTP or STP is disabled The designated root is set to zero as RSTP is disabled Graphical Display Administration E Configuration Access Bridging E IGMP 6 H OLACP O Logs E O Port Qos E RADIUS O RSTP tb Bridge RSTP Port RSTP 0 RO Made SMTP SNMP SNTP E Statistics E VLAN RSTP Bridge Configuration Designated Root Root Path Cost Root Port x Protocol Bridge ID Priority Status Hello Time Forward Delay Max Age Hold Time Topology Change Time Since TC uw 9 O 80 00 00 20 06 2b e1 55 0 0 Normal RSTP 80 00 00 20 06 2b e1 55 32768 Disabled E 20 30 3 0 5321 Edit The RSTP bridge configuration parameters are defined below e Designated Root Shows the MAC address of the bridge in the network elected or designated as the root bridge Normally when STP is not enabled the switch MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL designates itself as the root switch Root Path Cost A
178. Port 1 Number of broadcast frames 0to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 00 4 Port 1 Number of multicast frames 0to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 00 6 Port 1 Number of frames with CRC 0to 1 F9 0 error 4294967295 00 8 Port 1 Number of oversized frames Oto 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 Port 1 Number of bad fragments 01 1 F9 0 received 64 bytes 4294967295 OOEC Port 1 Number of jabber frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 OOEE Port 1 Number of collisions occurred Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 18 7 MODBUS PROTOCOL CHAPTER 18 MODBUS PROTOCOL Table 18 1 Modbus memory map Sheet 5 of 33 Address Description Range Step Format Default OOFO Port 1 Number of late collisions 0 to 1 F9 0 occurred 4294967295 00 2 Port 1 Number of 64 byte frames 0to 1 F9 0 received sent 4294967295 OOF4 Port 1 Number of 65 to 127 byte 0 to 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 OOF6 Port 1 Number of 128 to 255 byte 0 to 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 00 8 Port 1 Number of 256 to 511 byte 0to 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 Port 1 Number of 512 to 1023 byte 01 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 OOFC Port 1 Number of 1023 to maximum 0 to 1 F9 0 byte frames received sent 4294967295 Port 1 Number of MAC error pac
179. Port 2 was already statically configured for VIDs 1 2 3 If a static VLAN is configured on at least one port of a switch and that port has established wy a link with another device then all other ports of that switch will send advertisements for that VLAN In the following figure tagged VLAN ports on switch A and switch C advertise VLANs 22 and 35 to ports on other GVRP enabled switches that can dynamically join the VLANs A port can learn of a dynamic VLAN through devices that are not aware of GVRP Switch B Switch C Port 5 dynamically joined VLAN 22 Ports 11 12 belong to Tagged VLAN 33 Switch C GVRP On Switch A GVRP On Tagged VLAN 22 Tagged VLAN 22 Dynamic VLAN 22 Switch B No GVRP Tagged VLAN 22 Switch E Port 2 dynamically joined VLAN 33 Ports 7 dynamically joined VLAN 33 Dynamic VLAN 22 Switch D Port 3 dynamically joined VLAN 33 Ports 6 dynamically joined VLAN 33 754722AL CDR FIGURE 11 2 VLAN assignment in GVRP enabled switches An unknown VLAN is a VLAN that the switch learns of by GVRP For example suppose that port 1 on switch A is connected to port 5 on switch C Because switch A has VLAN 22 statically configured while switch C does not have this VLAN statically configured VLAN 22 is handled as an Unknown VLAN on port 5 in switch C Conversely if VLAN 22 was statically configured on switch C but port 5 was not a mem
180. Port 29 Number of frames sent 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0656 Port 29 Total bytes received Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 0658 Port 29 Total frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 065A Port 29 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 065C Port 29 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 065E Port 29 Number of frames with CRC 0 to 1 F9 0 error 4294967295 0660 Port 29 Number of oversized frames Oto 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 0662 Port 29 Number of bad fragments Oto 1 F9 0 received 64 bytes 4294967295 0664 Port 29 Number of jabber frames Oto 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 0666 Port 29 Number of collisions occurred 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 18 32 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 18 MODBUS PROTOCOL MULTILINK ML1200 MANAG MODBUS PROTOCOL Table 18 1 Modbus memory map Sheet 30 of 33 Address Description Range Step Format Default 0668 Port 29 Number of late collisions Oto 1 F9 0 occurred 4294967295 066A Port 29 Number of 64 byte frames Oto 1 F9 0 received sent 4294967295 066C Port 29 Number of 65 to 127 byte Oto 1 F9 0 rames received sent 4294967295 066 Port 29 Number of 128 to 255 byte Oto 1 F9 0 rames received sent 4294967295 0670 Port 29 Number of 256 to 511 byte Oto 1 F9 0 rames received sent 4294967295 0672 Port 29
181. Power LED ON when external power is applied to the unit LK Steady ON Link status for 10 Mbps and 100Mbps operation ACT ON with port activity for 10 Mbps and 100Mbps operation F H Full Half duplex LED ON when the port is running full duplex OFF for half duplex 100 10 Speed LED ON when the speed is 100Mbps OFF when the speed is 10 Mbps 4 1 3 Auto Cross MDIX and Auto negotiation for RJ 45 ports 4 2 The RJ 45 ports independently support auto cross MDI or MDIX in auto negotiation mode and will work properly with all the other connected devices with RJ 45 ports whether they support Auto negotiation e g 10Mb Hub media converter or fixed mode at 10Mb or 100Mb Half Full Dupleximanaged switch or not No cross over cable is required while using the ML1200 s copper port to other devices Operation is according to the IEEE 802 3u standard The Managed ML1200 s Fast Ethernet copper ports can be set for either fixed 100Mb speed or for 10 100 F H N way auto negotiation per the IEEE802 3u standard The selection is made via MNS software The factory default setting is for auto negotiation At 10Mb or 100Mb fixed speed the user may select half or full duplex mode by management Software for each RJ 45 port separately One frequently used application for the Managed Multilink ML1200 Switch copper ports is to connect one of them using a fiber media converter to another Switch in the network backbone or to some other remote 100Mb devic
182. R 17 MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS 17 1 5 Example wv NOTE The delete command deletes the specific id specified The deleted id no longer receives the traps via e mail The id is added using the add command delete id lt 1 5 gt The sendmai 1 command customizes and also sends a test e mail to check SMTP settings the e mail delivered by specifying the e mail subject field server address to field and the body of the text See the example in this section for details sendmail server lt ip addr gt to lt email addr gt from lt email addr gt subject lt string gt body lt string gt The server command configures the global SMTP server settings server ip lt ip addr gt port lt 1 65535 gt retry2 0 3 domain lt domain gt For this command ip represents the SMTP server IP address port the TCP port to be used for SMTP communications default is 25 and retry specifies how many times to retry if an error occurs when sending e mail from 0 to 3 with default of 0 The optional domain parameter specifies the domain name of the SMTP server The following example shows how to set SMTP to receive SNMP trap information via e mail E mail alerts can be forwarded to be received by other devices such as cellphones and pages Most interfaces to SMTP are already provided by the service provider MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL lr 3 MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS CHAPTER 17 MISCELLANEOUS COMMA
183. RESSING To set the time to be 08 10 am in the 5 hours from GMT Eastern Standard Time and to set the date as 11 May 2005 the following sequence of commands are used ML1200 set time hour 8 min 10 sec 0 zone GMT 5 00 Success in setting device time ML1200 show time Time 8 10 04 ML1200 show timezone Timezone GMT 05hours 00minutes ML1200 set date year 2005 month 5 day 11 Success in setting device date ML1200 show date System Date Wednesday 15 11 2005 in mm dd yyyy format ML1200 The syntax for other date and time commands are set timeformat format lt 12 24 gt set daylight country lt country name gt The following command sequence sets the daylight location ML1200 set daylight country Canada Success in setting daylight savings to the given location country Canada ML1200 show daylight Daylight savings location name Canada ML1200 The date and time can only be set through the command line interface software 5 5 4 Network Time Many networks synchronize the time using a network time server The network time server provides time to the different machines using the Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP To specify the SNTP server one has to 1 Setthe IP parameters on the switch 2 Define the SNTP parameters To set the SNTP parameter with the command line software enter the SNTP configuration mode from the manager The setsntp sync and sntp commands can then be used to setup the time synchronization automati
184. RJ 45 port The user may select 10Mb or 100Mb speed and full or half duplex mode per port as per user requirements 2 1 5 PoE power pass through C2 Module MDIX 10 100Mb 4 port The PoE Power over Ethernet RJ 45 ports are similar to regular RJ 45 ports except they have the capability of providing power on each port to power up the PD devices per the IEEE802 3af PoE standard The power pass through PoE modules are dependent upon the 48VDC input power to supply the PD power for these RJ 45 10 100 ports Each port supplies up to 15watts to power the PoE PD devices A maximum of 8 PoE ports can be configured in the A and B slots of a ML1200 switch with 48vdc power input The PoE modules are also available with mix n match fiber modules configured in other ML1200 slots Please check the ordering information for all the various PoE module options 2 4 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The LEDs on C2 PoE modules are slightly different compared to regular non PoE RJ 45 modules as shown in the figure below When the PoE port is in use the PoE LED is ON when connected properly to an 803 af compliant PD device on that port When non PoE devices are connected the PoE LED is OFF The operation of Ethernet data traffic is not affected by PoE 2 35 Link Act 2 10 100 1 GDPoE Full Half LINK and ACTIVITY LEDS are combined on the PoE modules into one
185. S implementations provide mapping of ToS or IP precedence to Class of Service CoS A CoS setting in an Ethernet Frame is mapped to the ToS byte of the IP packet and vice versa A ToS level of 1 equals a CoS level of 1 This provides end to end priority for the traffic flow when MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switchs are deployed in the network B Not all packets received on a port have high priority IGMP and BPDU packets have high w priority by default NOTE The MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch has the capability to set the priorities based on three different functions They are e Port QoS assigns a high priority to all packets received on a port regardless of the type of packet TAG QoS if a packet contains a tag the port on which the packet was received then looks to see at which level that tag value is set Regardless of the tag value if there is a tag that packet is automatically assigned high priority sent to the high priority queue e ToS QoS Layer 3 when a port is set to ToS QoS the most significant 6 bits of the IPv4 packet which has 64 bits are used If the 6 bits are set to ToS QoS for the specific port number the packet went to that packet is assigned high priority by that port MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 14 3 QUALITY OF SERVICE CHAPTER 14 QUALITY OF SERVICE 14 2 Configuring QoS through the Command Line Interface 14 2 1 Commands v NOTE 14 4 The MultiLin
186. SECURE WEB MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE 13 19 14 QUALITY OF SERVICE wur DESCRIPTION M M OOS CONCEPTS dE EURER DIFFSERVAND QOS cce ntm em meri ntm du adim PRECEDENCE iret bn te eda CONFIGURING QOS THROUGH THE COMMAND LINE INTERFACE iim en i GR ORIG pu CONFIGURING QOS WITH ENERVISTA SECURE WEB MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE ici setis 14 9 TOC IV MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL TOC 15 IGMP 16 SNMP 17 MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS TABLE OF CONTENTS DESCRIPTION wx b e RE ERREUR 14 9 MUERE S cine une lume ets eb E EE RII E EE 15 1 DESGRIPTION E 15 1 IGMP CONCEPTS 15 1 IP MULTETICAST FIETERS zsocetcit cnet teo eerte e e pt on eve pe peo eden 15 4 RESERVED ADDRESSES EXCLUDED FROM IP MULTICAST IGMP FILTERING 15 5 IGMP SUPPORT e etta Re in ee ette e HE C RH MNA 15 5 CONFIGURING IGMP THROUGH THE COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 15 6 COMMANDS co e om aiite ntt 15 6 EXAM PLE eain certavit ved tec e RTT E E N 15 8 CONFIGURING IGMP WITH ENERVISTA SECURE WEB MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE oso tcr 15 11 EXAMPLE esami uem IM S EM un 15 11 estas dd 16 1
187. SERVICE 14 3 Configuring QoS with EnerVista Secure Web Management software 14 3 1 Description To access QoS settings gt Select the Configuration gt QoS menu items Graphical Display Quality of Service QoS tw 2009 Administration Configuration Access Bridging IGMP Orv Pot QoS Type Lace None E Logs None Port fone ofS None RADIUS NOS O RSTP Nona SMTP SNMP 5 Statistics VLAN NOOMFWH f Applicable Edi Weight MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 14 9 QUALITY OF SERVICE Graphical Display E Administration E Configuration T Access 4 Bridging E O IGMP IPv6 amp OLACP Logs amp Port ofS ORADUS T RSTP 0 SMTP SNMP SNTP 8j Statistics E O VLAN CHAPTER 14 QUALITY OF SERVICE D Select the Port and the type of QoS ToS settings The following window illustrates the setting of port 1 for port based QoS with a high priority Note the sections on Tag and TOS are ignored for Port settings Quality of Service QoS Port Priority Settings Applicable For Port Based QoS Only EE TOS Level Settings Applicable For TOS Based QoS Only 24 32 40 48 56 Tag Settings Applicable For Tag Based QoS Only 1 9 17 25 33 41 49 57 1 X Priority 0 4 Cancel 1 5 3 11 19 27 35 43 51
188. SNTP Date and Time updated from SNTP server 12 10 2004 6 38 13 P M SNTP Date and Time updated from SNTP server 12 11 2004 10 16 24 A M TELNET Telnet Session Started 12 11 2004 6 52 49 P M SNTP Date and Time updated from SNTP server 12 12 2004 12 40 35 P M TELNET Telnet Session Started I 12 12 2004 12 40 42 P M CLI manager console login A 12 17 2004 12 05 52 P M PS INTRUDER 00 e0 29 6c a4 fdeportll packet dropped A 12 17 2004 12 07 04 P M PS INTRUDER 00 50 0f 02 33 b6 port15 packet dropped A 12 17 2004 12 07 16 P M PS INTRUDER 00 60 29 2a f0 3a porti5 packet dropped ML1200 clear log informational Clear Logged Events Y or N ML1200 show log S Date Time Log Description A 12 17 2004 12 05 52 P M PS INTRUDER 00 60 29 6c a4 fd port3 packet dropped A 12 17 2004 12 07 04 P M PS INTRUDER 00 50 0f 02 33 b6 port5 packet dropped A 12 17 2004 12 07 16 P M PS INTRUDER 00 60 29 2a f0 3a port5 packet dropped MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL ACCESS CONSIDERATIONS CHAPTER 6 ACCESS CONSIDERATIONS When the switch detects an intrusion attempt on a port it records the date and time stamp the MAC address the port on which the access was attempted and the action taken by ML1200 software The event log lists the most recently detected security violation attempts This provides a chronological entry of all intrusions attempted on a specific port The event log records events as single line entries listed in chr
189. T sm Fiber 18 0km 95K ft ST small form factor mm Fiber 2 0km 6 562 ft MTRJ MLC small form factor sm Fiber 15 km SLC Copper 10BASE T twisted pair 100m 328 ft RJ 45 100BASE TX twisted pair 100m 328 ft RJ 45 1000BASE TX twisted pair 100m 328 ft RJ 45 mm multi mode sm single mode 3 2 0 1 Connecting Fiber Optic ST type twist lock The following procedure applies to installations using a PM with ST type fiber connectors This procedure applies to ports using a ML1200 module MST type port 1 Before connecting the fiber optic cable remove the protective dust caps from the tips of the connectors on the PM Save these dust caps for future use 2 Wipe clean the ends of the dual connectors with a soft cloth or lint free lens tissue dampened in alcohol Make certain the connectors are clean before connecting One strand of the duplex fiber optic cable is coded using color bands at regular intervals you must use the color coded strand on the associated ports at each end of the fiber optic segment 3 Connect the Transmit TX port light colored post on the Multilink PM to the Receive RX port of the remote device Begin with the color coded strand of the cable for this first TX to RX connection 4 Connectthe Receive RX port dark colored post on the PM to the Transmit TX port of the remote device Use the non color coded fiber strand for this The LINK LED on the front of the PM will illuminate when a proper connectio
190. TCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL Digital Energy Multilin Multilink ML1200 Managed Field Switch Chapter 13 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol 13 1 Overview 13 1 1 Description The Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RTSP like STP was designed to avoid loops in an Ethernet network Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP IEEE 802 1w is an evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol STP 802 1d standard and provides for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change 13 1 2 RSTP concepts The IEEE 802 1d Spanning Tree Protocol STP was developed to allow the construction of robust networks that incorporate redundancy while pruning the active topology of the network to prevent loops While STP is effective it requires that frame transfer must halt after a link outage until all bridges in the network are sure to be aware of the new topology Using STP IEEE 802 1d recommended values this period lasts 30 seconds The Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1w is a further evolution of the 802 1d Spanning Tree Protocol It replaces the settling period with an active handshake between switches bridges that guarantees topology information to be rapidly propagated through the network RSTP converges in less than one second RSTP also offers a number of other significant innovations These include e Topology changes in STP must be passed to the root bridge before they can be propagated to the network Topology changes in RSTP can be originated fro
191. TCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 1 INTRODUCTION 1 8 CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION 1 4 3 Console Screen 14 4 Logging In 1 4 5 Automatic Once the console cable is connected to the PC and the firmware configured ML1200 legal disclaimers and other text scrolls by on the screen The line interface prompt appears displaying the switch model number e g ML1200 gt The switch has three modes of operation operator least privilege manager and configuration The prompts for the switches change as the switch changes modes from operator to manager to configuration The prompts are shown below with a brief description e ML1200 gt Operator Level for running operations queries e ML1200 Manager Level for setting and reviewing commands e ML1200 Configuration Level for changing the switch parameter values For additional information on default users user levels and more refer to section 1 4 8 User Management for the First Time For the first time use the default user name and passwords assigned by GE They are e Username manager Password manager e Username operator Password operator We recommend you login as manager for the first time to set up the IP address as well as change user passwords or create new users IP Address Configuration The ML1200 is operational immediately after it is powered up The advanced management and configuration capabilities of the ML1200 allows you to easily configure manage and
192. TP No GVRP None Enable Disable Disable Enabled ML1200 devicel setport port 11 flow enable bp enable continued on next page MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 9 PORT MIRRORING AND SETUP Back pressure and flow control continued ML1200 devicel show port PORT MIRRORING AND SETUP Keys E Enable D Disable H Half Duplex F Full Duplex M Multiple VLAN s NA Not Applicable LI Listening LE Learning F Forwarding B Blocking Port Name Control Dplx Media Link Speed Part Auto VlanID GVRP STP dt B1 E H 10Tx UP 10 No E ab 2 B2 E ORES DOWN 10 No E L 3 3 JohnDoe E H TOTES DOWN 10 No E db 5 4 JaneDoe E H 10Tx DOWN 10 No E 1 e 5 B5 E F 100 UP 100 No E 1 6 6 H 10Tx DOWN 10 No E aE ML1200 device J show port 11 Configuration details of port 11 Eee ee EN OR Se CD Note that the flow control and back pressure is Bresse Name JohnDoe shown as enabled for the specific port The global Powe D Meses RONN show port command does not provide this detail POTET TYPE wd de The back pressure and flow control parameters Port Admin State Enable P P are global i e the same for all ports Port VLAN ID 1 Port Speed 10Mbps Port Duplex Mode half duplex Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Auto negotiation State STP State GVRP State Priority Type Security Flow Control Back Pressure Link Loss Alert Enable NO STP
193. TRUCTION MANUAL ge9 INSTALLATION CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 3 44 Connecting a Management Console Terminal to Multilink 1200 Serial RJ 45 Console Port The serial console port on the Multilink ML1200 is different from other Multilink family switches The Serial RJ 45 port as shown in the picture requires an 8 pin RJ 45 male connector to have the proper communication Note the serial RJ 45 console port on the Multilink ML1200 is compatible with Cisco type RJ 45 console port cables The Serial port pin out for the RJ 45 console port used on Multilink ML1200 is shown below Table 3 1 Pinout information for above connector Pin Name Description Direction 1 RTX Request to Send OUT 3 TXD Transceiver Data OUT 4 GND Ground 5 GND Ground 6 RXD Receive Data IN 8 CTS Clear to Send IN iy The console RJ 45 Serial cable may be ordered from the Factory using the model number and description here NOTE CONSOLE CBLQD Console attachment cable serial null modem cable with one side RJ 45 for the ML1200 and a male DB 9 Female connector on the other end CONSOLE CBLQU Console attachment cable serial null modem cable Combo with one serial RJ 45 for the 1200 side and a USB cable connector option on the other end e g computer Ix For Power Substations In support of the IEEE 1613 Class 2 standard GE Multilin advises vy that for substation applications the serial RJ 45console ports are intend
194. This command is only intended for first time users and values can be changed by administrators who want more strict access quickcfg The engineid command allows the user to change the engine ID Every agent has to have an enginerb name to be able to respond to SNMPv3 messages engineid string string The authtrap command enables or disables authentication traps generation authtrap lt enable disable gt The show authtrap command displays the current value of authentication trap status show authtrap The deftrap command defines the default community string to be used when sending traps When user does not specify the trap community name when setting a trap station using the trap command the default trap community name is used deftrap community lt string gt The show deftrap command displays the current value of default trap show deftrap The trap command defines the trap and inform manager stations The station can receive v1 v2 traps and or inform notifications An inform notification is an acknowledgments that a trap has been received A user can add up to 5 stations MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 16 5 SNMP 16 6 16 2 2 Example CHAPTER 16 SNMP trap lt add delete gt id lt id gt type v1 v2 inform host lt host ip gt community lt string gt port lt 1 65534 gt The show trap command shows the configured trap stations in tabular format The id argument is optional and is the n
195. UCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 12 SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL STP SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL STP Configuring STP parameters continued ML1200 stp Show stp ports STP Port Configuration Priority Path Cost State TP 10 100 Forwarding 80 00 00 20 06 2b e1 54 80 01 TP 10 100 Forwarding 80 00 00 20 06 2b e1 54 80 02 100MB Fiber Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 2b 61 54 80 03 100MB Fiber Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 2b e1 54 80 04 100MB Fiber 100MB Fiber TP 10 100 ML1200 stp priority value 15535 Disabled 80 Disabled 80 Disabled 80 Successfully set the bridge priority ML1200 stp show stp config STP CONFIGURATION Spanning Tree Enabled Global Spanning Tree Enabled Ports Protocol Bridge ID Bridge Priority Bridge Forward Delay Bridge Hello Time Bridge Max Age Root Port Root Path Cost Designated Root Designated Root Priority Root Bridge Forward Delay Root Bridge Hello Time Root Bridge Max Age ML1200 stp priority port 2 value 20 YES WES EI au 5G Normal STP 3ciza 10017201106 20 6 254 115535 15 2 20 0 0 3ciaE 00192017 06 120b 6 15 154 15535 15 2 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 20 06 25 80 ports that have connected devices now participate in STP 20 06 2b e1 54 80 07 STP is now enabled Note the default values for the discussed variables 12 9 SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL STP Configuring STP parameters continued M
196. Use the PWR LEDs to verify each unit is receiving power If the problem is isolated to a network device other than the Multilink ML1200 Switch product it is recommended that the problem device be replaced with a known good device Verify whether or not the problem is corrected If not go to Step 5 below If the problem is corrected the Multilink ML1200 Switch and its associated cables are functioning properly If the problem continues after completing Step 4 above contact your supplier of the Multilink ML1200 Switch unit or if unknown contact GE Multilin for assistance MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 13 OPERATION CHAPTER 4 OPERATION 4 14 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL Digital Energy Multilin Multilink ML1200 Managed Field Switch Chapter 5 IP Addressing 5 1 IP Address and System Information 5 1 1 Overview It is assumed that the user has familiarity with IP addresses classes of IP addresses and related netmask schemas for example class A B and C addressing Without an IP address the switch operates as a standalone Layer 2 switch Without an IP address you cannot Use the web interface to manage the switch e Use telnet to access the CLI e Use any SNMP Network Management software to manage the switch e Use NTP protocol or an NTP server to synchronize the time on the switch e Use TFTP or FTP to download the configurations or upload software updates
197. User manager on Ci CLI Session Term User manager on Console SYSMGR System Vas Rebooted By power cycle SNTP System Clock Setto Default SYSMGR System IP Address changed to 3 94 2 SNTP System Time Zone Setto 05 00 SNTP SNTP Client Started SNTP SNTP Request Timeout Clear Each specific type of log can be viewed by using the drop down menu as shown below In this example only informational logs are displayed Graphical Display Administration E Configuration E Access F Bridging F IGMP IPv6 amp OLACP omg Port QoS RADIUS 5 RSTP SMTP SNMP 5 E Statistics Log Statistics Port Statistics 5 O VLAN m Logged Events 01 01 2001 12 0 01 01 2001 12 0 01 01 2001 12 C 12 31 2000 O7 C 12 31 2000 O7 C 12 31 2000 07 C 12 31 2000 07 C 12 31 2000 07 2 12 31 2000 07 2 12 31 2000 08 C 12 31 2000 08 C 01 01 2001 121 01 01 2001 12 0 01 01 2001 12 C 12 31 2000 O7 C 12 31 2000 07 C 12 31 2000 07 C Severity Notice Notice Notice Notice Notice Notice Notice Notice Notice Notice Notice Notice Notice Notice Notice Notice Notice 009 Logout Events Events SYSMGR System Was Re SNTP System Clock Set tc SYSMGR System IP Addre SNTP System Time Zone SNTP SNTP Client Startec SNTP SNTP Request Tim atal SNTP SNTP Request Timev
198. WITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 10 VLAN VLAN Converting Port VLAN to Tag VLAN continued VLAN ID 1 Name Default VLAN Status Active UNTAGGED Note that ports 3 to 5 are DOWN the UNTAGGED VLAN configuration is preferably done UNTAGGED before devices are plugged in to avoid UNTAGGED connectivity repercussions UNTAGGED UNTAGGED UNTAGGED ML1200 Vvlan type tag ML1200 tag vlan add id 10 name mkt port 3 5 Tag based vlan Added Successfully Vian id Vlan name engineering Ports OLI ML1200 tag vlan edit id 10 name engineering port 3 5 Tag based vlan edited Successfully Vian id gon Vlan name engineering Ports 8 ups ML1200 tag vlan add id 20 name sales port 3 5 Tag based vlan Added Successfully Vlan id 22 0 Intentionally executed to show the effect of adding a Ports 3 5 duplicate VLAN Vlan name sales ML1200 tag vlan add id 20 name marketing port 3 5 ERROR Duplicate Vlan Id ML1200 tag vlan add id 30 name marketing port 3 5 Tag based vlan Added Successfully Vlan id 30 Vlan name marketing Ports Jb ML1200 tag vlan show vlan type tag continued on next page MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 10 15 VLAN CHAPTER 10 VLAN Converting Port VLAN to Tag VLAN continued VLAN ID 1 Name Default VLAN Status Active UNTAGGED UNTAGGED UNTAGGED UNTAGGED UNTAGGED UNTAGGED UNTAGGED Na
199. age with STP information is allowed by the switch before the switch discards the information and updates the address table again The value ranges from 6 to 40 seconds with a default 20 Hold Time This is the minimum time period to elapse between the transmissions of configuration BPDUs through a given LAN Port At most one configuration BPDU shall be transmitted in any hold time period This parameter is a fixed parameter with values as specified in RSTP standard 3 seconds Topology Change A counter indicating the number of times topology has changed Time since TC Indicates time that has elapsed since the last topology change Use this in conjunction with uptime on the graphical display screen shown after a successful login to find the frequency of the topology changes Click on Edit to make any changes On this screen you can select and enable STP or RSTP Graphical Display RSTP Bridge Configuration toot POO Administration E Configuration Access Bridging E IGMP O IPv6 E OLACP Logs Port aos E ORADIUS El O RSTP fb Bridge RSTP Port RSTP 0 RO Mode SMTP SNMP Statistics E VLAN Designated Root 80 00 00 20 06 2b e1 55 X Hello Time 5 Forward Delay 20 Max Age 30 Priority 32768 Protocol Normal RSTP X Cancel OK Under protocol select Force to STP if there are legacy or other third party devices that do not support RSTP
200. ait from listening to learning states and from learning to forwarding states The value ranges from 4 to 30 seconds with a default value of 15 When the switch is the root device the hello parameter represents the time between messages being transmitted The value is from 1 to 10 seconds with a default value is 2 The age parameter is the maximum time a message with STP information is allowed by the switch before the switch discards the information and updates the address table again Value ranges from 6 to 40 seconds with default value of 20 timers forward delay lt 4 30 gt hello lt 1 10 gt age lt 6 40 gt MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 127 SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL STP CHAPTER 12 SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL STP Example 12 4 Configuring STP parameters ML1200 stp Show stp config STP CONFIGURATION Spanning Tree Enabled Global NO Spanning Tree Enabled Ports YES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Protocol Normal STP Bridge ID 80 00 00 20 06 2b e1 54 Bridge Priority 921668 Bridge Forward Delay 8 15 Bridge Hello Time gp Bridge Max Age EO Root Port NO Root Path Cost g w Designated Root 80 00 00 20 06 2b e1 54 Designated Root Priority 32768 Root Bridge Forward Delay Bou Root Bridge Hello Time Root Bridge Max Age T20 ML1200 stp show stp ports STP Port Configuration TP 10 100 128 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 2b e1 54 80 01 12 8 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTR
201. are designed to provide reliability and consistently high performance in all network environments The installation of a Multilink ML1200 Switch is a straightforward procedure see INSTALLATION Section 3 0 The operation is also straightforward and is discussed in Section 4 Should problems develop during installation or operation this section is intended to help locate identify and correct these types of problems Please follow the suggestions listed below prior to contacting your supplier However if you are unsure of the procedures MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 4 OPERATION OPERATION described in this section or if the Multilink ML1200 Switch is not performing as expected do not attempt to repair the unit instead contact your supplier for assistance or contact GE Multilin Customer Support 4 2 5 Before Calling for Assistance 1 If difficulty is encountered when installing or operating the unit refer back to the Installation Section of the applicable chapter of this manual Also check to make sure that the various components of the network are interoperable Check the cables and connectors to ensure that they have been properly connected and the cables wires have not been crimped or in some way impaired during installation About 9096 of network downtime can be attributed to wiring and connector problems Make sure that DC power is properly attached to each Multilink ML1200 Switch unit
202. ariables can be changed Below is a list of system variables which GE recommends changing System Name Using a unique name helps you to identify individual devices in a network e System Contact and System Information This is helpful for identifying the administrator responsible for the switch and for identifying the locations of individual switches To set these variables change the mode to be SNMP configuration mode from the manager mode using the following syntax snmp setvar sysname syscontact syslocation lt string gt The following command sequence sets the system name system location and system contact information 12008 snmp ML1200 snmp setvar setvar Configures system name contact or location Usage setvar sysname syscontact syslocation lt string gt ML1200 snmp setvar syslocation Fremont System variable s set successfully ML1200 snmp exit ML1200 5 5 3 Date and Time It may be necessary to set the day time or the time zone manually This can be done by using the set command with the necessary date and time options with the following syntax set timezone GMT or hour lt 0 14 gt min 0 59 set date year lt 2001 2035 gt month lt 1 12 gt day lt 1 31 gt format mmddyyyy ddmmyyyy yyyymmdd set time hour lt 0 23 gt min lt 0 59 gt sec 0 59 zone GMT Jhh mm MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 9 IP ADDRESSING CHAPTER 5 IP ADD
203. ate Otol 1 F3 0 0097 Port 2 STP state Otol 1 F3 0 0098 Port 5 STP state Otol 1 F3 0 0099 Port 4 STP state Otol 1 F3 0 009A Port 5 STP state Otol 1 F3 0 009B Port 6 STP state Otol 1 F3 0 009C Port 7 STP state Otol 1 F3 0 009D Port 8 STP state Otol 1 F3 0 009E Port 9 STP state Otol 1 F3 0 009F Port 10 STP state Otol 1 F3 0 00A0 Port 11 STP state Otol 1 F3 0 00A1 Port 12 STP state Otol 1 F3 0 00A2 Port 13 STP state Otol 1 F3 0 00A3 Port 14 STP state Otol 1 F3 0 00A4 Port 15 STP state Otol 1 F3 0 00A5 Port 16 STP state Otol 1 F3 0 00 6 Port 17 STP state Otol 1 F3 0 00A7 Port 18 STP state Otol 1 F3 0 0048 Port 19 STP state Otol 1 F3 0 0049 Port 20 STP state Otol 1 F3 0 00AA Port 21 STP state Otol 1 F3 0 00AB Port 22 STP state Otol 1 F3 0 OOAC Port 23 STP state 01 1 1 F3 0 00AD Port 24 STP state 01 1 1 F3 0 OOAE Port 25 STP state 01 1 1 F3 0 OOAF Port 26 STP state 01 1 1 F3 0 0080 Port 27 STP state Otol 1 F3 0 0081 Port 28 STP state 0to1 1 F3 0 00B2 Port 29 STP state Otol 1 F3 0 00B3 Port 30 STP state 01 1 1 F3 0 00B4 Port 31 STP state 01 1 1 F3 0 00B5 Port 32 STP state Otol 1 F3 0 00B6 Port 1 activity Otol 1 F3 0 00B7 Port 2 activity Otol 1 F3 0 0088 Port 3 activity Otol 1 F3 0 00B9 Port 4 activity Otol 1 F3 0 00BA Port 5 activity Otol 1 F5 0 00 Port 6 activity Otol 1 F3 0 OOBC Port 7 activity Otol 1 F3 0 00BD Port 8 activity Otol 1 F3 0 18 6 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 18 MOD
204. ates flow control packets and processes received flow control packets fi With the port speed set to auto the default and flow control set to enabled the switch y negotiates flow control on the indicated port If the port speed is not set to auto or if flow e control is disabled on the port then flow control is not used Use the f lowcontrol command to set flow control flowcontrol xonlimit lt value gt xofflimit lt value gt where xonlimit can be from 3 to 127 default value is 4 and xofflimit ranges from 3 to 127 default value is 6 9 3 3 Back Pressure The backpressure command disables enables back pressure based flow control mechanisms The default state is disabled When enabled the port uses 802 3 Layer 2 back off algorithms Back pressure based congestion control is possible only on half duplex 10 Mbps Ethernet ports Other technologies are not supported on the MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch backpressure rxthreshold lt value gt where the rxthreshold value can be from 4 to 30 default is 28 Back pressure and flow control are used in networks where all devices and switches can participate in the flow control and back pressure recognition In most networks these techniques are not used as not all devices can participate in the flow control methods and notifications Alternately QoS and other techniques are widely used today In the example below the MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch is set up with flow
205. ation on the other device Possible port setting combinations for copper ports are e 10HDx 10 Mbps half duplex e 10FDx 10 Mbps full duplex e 100HDx 100 Mbps half duplex e 100FDx 100 Mbps full duplex Possible port settings for 100FX fiber ports are e 100FDx default 100 Mbps full duplex e 100HDx 100 Mbps half duplex To change the port speed on a transceiver port it is required to reboot the switch Example 9 1 Port setup ML1200 device ML1200 devicel setport port 3 name JohnDoe ML1200 device setport port 4 name JaneDoe ML1200 device J show port Keys E Enable D Disable H Half Duplex F Full Duplex M Multiple VLAN s NA Not Applicable LI Listening LE Learning F Forwarding B Blocking Name Control Dplx Media Link Speed Part Auto VlanID GVRP STP Al E H 10Tx UP 10 No E al 5 A2 E H 10Tx DOWN 10 No E 1 JohnDoe E H 10Tx DOWN 10 No E al 5 JaneDoe E H 10Tx DOWN 10 No E all A5 E F 100Tx UP 100 No E alk A6 E H 10Tx DOWN 10 No E all A7 E H 10Tx DOWN 10 No E 1 ML1200 device exit ML1200 9 4 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 9 PORT MIRRORING AND SETUP PORT MIRRORING AND SETUP 9 3 2 Flow Control The flow setting is disabled by default In this case the port will not generate flow control packets and drops received flow control packets If the flow setting is enabled the port uses 802 3x Link Layer Flow Control gener
206. be 340 282 366 920 938 463 463 374 607 431 768 211 456 This is an extremely large address space In a theoretical sense this is approximately 665 570 793 348 866 943 898 599 addresses per square meter of the surface of the planet Earth assuming the earth surface is 511 263 971 197 990 square meters In the most pessimistic estimate this would provide 1 564 addresses for each square meter of the surface of Earth The optimistic estimate would allow for 3 911 873 538 269 506 102 addresses for each square meter of the surface Earth Approximately fifteen percent of the address space is initially allocated The remaining 85 is reserved for future use MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 IP ADDRESSING IP ADDRESSING Details of the addressing are covered by numerous articles on the WWW as well as other literature and are not covered here 5 5 4 Configuring IPv6 The commands used for IPv6 are the same as those used for IPv4 Some of the commands will be discussed in more details later The only exception is the ping command where there is a special command for IPv6 That commands is ping6 and the syntax is as Syntax ping6 IPv6 address pings an IPv6 station There is also a special command to ping the status of IPv6 That command is Syntax show ipv6 displays the IPv6 information To configure IPv6 the following sequence of commands can be used ML1200 ipconfig 2 ipconfig Configures
207. ber port 5 would become a member when advertisements for VLAN 22 were received from switch A GVRP provides a per port join request option which can be configured VLANs must be disabled in GVRP unaware devices to allow tagged packets to pass through A GVRP aware port receiving advertisements has these options e If there is no static VLAN with the advertised VID on the receiving port then dynamically create a VLAN with the same VID as in the advertisement and allow that VLAN s traffic e Ifthe switch already has a static VLAN with the same VID as in the advertisement and the port is configured to learn for that VLAN then the port will dynamically join the VLAN and allow that VLAN s traffic e Ignore the advertisement for that VID and drop all GVRP traffic with that VID e Don t participate in that VLAN Aport belonging to a tagged or untagged static VLAN has these configurable options MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 11 3 VLAN REGISTRATION OVER GARP NOTE CHAPTER 11 VLAN REGISTRATION OVER GARP e Send VLAN advertisements and also receive advertisements for VLANs on other ports and dynamically join those VLANs Send VLAN advertisements but ignore advertisements received from other ports Avoid GVRP participation by not sending advertisements and dropping any advertisements received from other devices Table 11 1 Port settings for GVRP operations Unknown Operations VLAN mode
208. by the failure of the power supply inside of the Multilink Switch Useful information about Alarm contacts 1 There are four terminal blocks 1 2 3 4 provided next to the DC power supply 2 Thetop two pins 1 2 are software operated 3 The bottom two pins 3 4 are hardware operated 4 These are both NC normally closed relays 5 The switch s software operation needs to be enabled and set to get the Alarm traps For detailed information about the Software Alarm and software control of SNMP alarm traps please refer to chapter 5 of this manual 3 8 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION INSTALLATION Relay Contacts The Alarm Contacts are on the front left area next to the DC power source of the Multilink ML1200 unit and are green in color as shown in the picture 3 4 5 ML1200 Port Module PM Installation Multilink ML1200 Switches are normally received from the factory with all required Port Modules installed B There may be situations where the PMs need to be added or replaced Any change in v configuration of the modules can be done only via factory installation There is no field upgrade option for ML1200 port modules Please contact Tech Support for changing modules The ML1200 port modules are not compatible with or inter changeable with the other Multilink Family Switches PMs which use larger typically 8 port modules MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INS
209. bytes sent Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 O5EE Port 27 Number of frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 5 Port 27 Number of frames sent 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 O5F2 Port 27 Total bytes received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 O5F4 Port 27 Total frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 O5F6 Port 27 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 18 30 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 18 MODBUS PROTOCOL MULTILINK ML1200 MANAG MODBUS PROTOCOL Table 18 1 Modbus memory map Sheet 28 of 33 Address Description Range Step Format Default 05 8 Port 27 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 O5FA Port 27 Number of frames with CRC Oto 1 F9 0 error 4294967295 O5FC Port 27 Number of oversized frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 O5FE Port 27 Number of bad fragments Oto 1 F9 0 received 64 bytes 4294967295 0600 Port 27 Number of jabber frames Oto 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 0602 Port 27 Number of collisions occurred 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0604 Port 27 Number of late collisions 0 to 1 F9 0 occurred 4294967295 0606 Port 27 Number of 64 byte frames Oto 1 F9 0 received sent 4294967295 0608 Port 27 Number of 65 to 127 byte Oto 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 060A Port 27 Number of 128 to 255 byte 01 1 F9 0 frames received sent 42
210. cally from the SNTP server Note it is not sufficient to setup the SNTP variables Make sure to setup the synchronization frequency as well as enable SNTP The syntax for the above commands is shown below setsntp server lt ipaddress gt timeout 1 10 retry 2 1 3 sync hour 0 24 min lt 0 59 gt default 24 hours sntp enable disable 5 10 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 IP ADDRESSING IP ADDRESSING To set the SNTP server to be 3 94 210 5 with a time out of 3 seconds and a number of retries set to 3 times allowing the synchronization to be ever 5 hours the following sequence of commands are used 12008 sntp ML1200 sntpl setsntp server 3 94 210 5 timeout 3 retry 3 SNTP server is added to SNTP server database ML1200 sntp sync hour 5 ML1200 sntp sntp enable SNTP is already enabled ML1200 sntpHHE exit ML1200 sntp SNTP parameters can be configured through the EnerVista Secure Web Management software with the Configuration gt SNTP menu item The SNTP menu allows the time zone hours from GMT to be defined along with other appropriate parameters on setting the time and synchronizing clocks on network devices Graphical Display SNTP Configuration Loot OOO O Administration Configuration E Access Alarm E Bridging SNTP Status Disabled E O IGMP E OLACP Max SNTP Servers 10 Logs E Port QoS E O RADIUS E O RSTP
211. cast Address in this range will continue in effect unless IGMP learns of a multicast group destination in this range In that case IGMP takes over the filtering function for the multicast destination address es for as long as the IGMP group is active If the IGMP group subsequently deactivates the static filter resumes control over traffic to the multicast address formerly controlled by IGMP MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 15 IGMP IGMP 15 1 4 Reserved Addresses Excluded from IP Multicast IGMP Filtering Traffic to IP multicast groups in address range 224 0 0 0 to 224 0 0 255 will always be flooded because addresses in this range are well known or reserved Thus if IP Multicast is enabled and there is an IP multicast group within the reserved address range traffic to that group will be flooded instead of filtered by the switch 15 1 5 IGMP Support The MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch supports IGMP version 1 and version 2 The switch can act either as a querier or a nonquerier The querier router periodically sends general query messages to solicit group membership information Hosts on the network that are members of a multicast group send report messages When a host leaves a group it sends a leave group message The difference between Version 1 and Version 2 is that version 1 does not have a Leave mechanism for the host The MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch does pruning when there is
212. cati ML1200 snmpv3 quickcfg This will enable default VACM Do you wish to proceed Y or N Y Quick configuration done default VACM enabled ML1200 snmpv3 engineid string Multi 1200 Engine ID is set successfully ML1200 snmpv3 authtrap enable Authentication trap status is set successfully ML1200 snmpv3 show authtrap Authentication Trap Status Enabled ML1200 snmpv3HHt deftrap community mysecret Default trap community is set successfully ML1200 snmpv3 show deftrap Default Trap Community mysecret continued on next page MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 16 7 SNMP 16 8 CHAPTER 16 SNMP Configuring SNMP continued ML1200 snmpv3 trap add id 1 type v1 host 3 94 200 107 Entry is added successfully ML1200 snmpv3 show trap Trap Type Host IP Community Port ML1200 snmpv3 show trap id 1 Trap ID 8 db Trap Type val Host IP 3 94 200 107 Community Auth Type ML1200 snmpv3 com2sec add id 1 secname public source default q Entry is added successfully ML1200 snmpv3 com2sec add id 2 ERROR secname parameter is required for add directive ML1200 snmpv3 com2sec add id 2 secname BCM Entry is added successfully ML1200 snmpv3 show com2sec ID Sec Name Source Community default default WNP eo ML1200 snmpv3 show com2sec id 2 Com2Sec ID B 2 Security Name BCM Source default Community public ML1200 snm
213. cation characteristics between the ML1200 and the RADIUS Server are defined through the Configuration Radius Port Access Backend menu item Graphical Display 802 1x Authenticator Port Backend toot OOO Administration E Configuration Access Bridging jode Port SuppTimeout set Server Ti Max Request 4 IPv6 1 30 qu r OLACP 2 30 30 2 A Logs 3 30 30 2 Port 4 30 30 2 2 aos 5 30 30 2 E O RADIUS 6 30 30 2 a Server 7 30 30 2 Set E Access gt Backend Reauth O Stats m RSTP L pas Port used for RADIUS Server m SNMP SNTP Port not available E Statistics Ej VLAN The Supp Timeout column represents the timeout the authenticator waits for the supplicant to respond The values range from 1 to 240 seconds with a default of 30 The Server Timeout column represents the timeout the authenticator waits for the backend RADIUS server to respond The values range from 1 to 240 seconds with a default of 30 The Max Request column represents the maximum times the authenticator retransmits an EAP request packet to the supplicant before it times out Values are integers ranging from 1 to 10 with a default of 2 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 7 ACCESS USING RADIUS ACCESS USING RADIUS The port authentication characteristics define how the authenticator ML1200 switch does the re authentication with th
214. cedence The queuing technologies throughout the network can then use this signal to provide the appropriate expedited handling MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 14 QUALITY OF SERVICE QUALITY OF SERVICE Data FCS CLE IP precedence 754726A1 CDR FIGURE 14 2 IP Precedence ToS Field in an IP Packet Header The three most significant bits correlating to binary settings 32 64 and 128 of the Type of Service ToS field in the IP header constitute the bits used for IP precedence These bits are used to provide a priority from 0 to 7 for the IP packet Because only three bits of the ToS byte are used for IP precedence you need to differentiate these bits from the rest of the ToS byte The MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch has the capability to provide QoS at Layer 2 At Layer 2 the frame uses Type of Service ToS as specified in IEEE 802 1p ToS uses 3 bits just like IP precedence and maps well from Layer 2 to layer 3 and vice versa The switches have the capability to differentiate frames based on ToS settings With two queues present high or low priority queues or buffers in MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch frames can be placed in either queue and serviced via the weight set on all ports This placement of queues added to the weight set plus the particular tag setting on a packet allows each queue to have different service levels MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch Qo
215. cessfully set port control parameter s The auth disable command is not 1200 auth disable necessary However it is shown for 802 1X Authenticator is disabled completeness in case a RADIUS server was defined with a previously ML1200 authHtt authserver ip 3 204 240 1 secret secret M set authentication scheme Successfully set RADIUS Authentication Server parameter s ML1200 auth auth enable 802 1X Authenticator is enabled ML1200 authHHt show auth ports Port Status Control Initialize Current State F Enabled Auto Deasserted Authorized The RADIUS server is 2 Enabled ForcedAuth Asserted Grent neria E connected on port 2 2 Enabled Auto Deasserted Authorized 4 Enabled Auto Deasserted Unauthorized D Enabled Auto Deasserted Unauthorized Enabled Auto Deasserted Unauthorized Port not available ML1200 auth show auth config 802 1X Authenticator Configuration Status Enabled RADIUS Authentication Server IP Address 3 204 240 1 UDP Port 1812 Shared Secret secret continued on following page MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 7 ACCESS USING RADIUS ACCESS USING RADIUS Setting port control parameters continued MLi200 authHHt backend port 2 supptimeout 45 servertimeout 60 maxreq 5 Successfully set backend server authentication parameter s This command sets timeout MLi200 authiHt show port backend characteristics and the number of p requests before access is d
216. ch the name of the site Do you want to proceed Yes FIGURE 1 2 Security certificate Once you click Yes on the security certificate the browser will prompt you to login MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 15 INTRODUCTION CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION MLI 200 Enervista Setup EnerVista MULTILINK ML1200 setup Login ID Password Login FIGURE 1 3 Login screen For the first time gt Login with the name manager and password manager gt Click on Login After a successful login the welcome screen is shown Note the different information provided on the screen and different areas The menus are used to configure settings on the switch Users can click on a specific port to open the port configuration view 1 16 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION 0 Graphical Display EnerVista MultiLink Software Loot DOO Administration Configuration Device Ports Logical View f Multilin EnerVista MultiLink Software combined with the MultiLink Model ML2400 ML1600 switches and UR switch module provide power and efficiency in a managed Ethernet platform A full range of industry standard software functions enables the versatile MultiLink products to perform effectively in a wide range of managed LAN Boot Mode manual b Gateway 0 0 0 0 gt IP Address 192 168 100 3 Mac Address 00 20 06 2c 28 c0 Subnet Mask 255 255 25
217. connector is shielded to minimize emissions and will allow both unshielded twisted pair UTP and shielded twisted pair STP cable connections MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 4 OPERATION NOTE v NOTE OPERATION 4 Ports 10 100 Mbps RJ 45 Cink 210 100 3 2 Activity 4 FULL HALF Each port has an Activity ACT LED indicating packets being received a Link LK LED that indicates proper connectivity with the remote device when lit a FDX HDX LED to indicate full duplex mode when lit or half duplex when off and a 10 100 LED indicating 100Mb when lit or 10 Mbps when off The 10 100 RJ 45 ports are supported with Auto negotiation and Auto crossover MDIX which allow the RJ 45 ports to automatically Link with any RJ 45 device and eliminate the use of cross over cable For Power Substations In support of the IEEE 1613 Class 2 standard GE Multilin advises that for substation applications the RJ 45 ports are intended for connectivity to other communication equipment such as routers or telecommunication multiplexers installed in close proximity i e less than 2 meters or 6 5ft to the ML1200 It is not recommended to use these ports in substation applications to interface to field devices across distances which could produce kigh greater than 2500V levels of ground potential rise GPR during line to ground fault conditions The ML1200 passes the 1613specifications for
218. ction 5 4 4 Saving Configuration for details on saving the configuration D Load the new firmware as shown below TFTP wu 1200 As the file is being loaded the firmware will display the transfer in progress window Please Wait Lh Cancel 1 56 MULTILINK 1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION gt Reboot the switch when the transfer is complete After reboot the firmware is ready for use gt If using TFTP save the configuration before proceeding GE Multilin recommends a two step update e first save the configuration to the server e then load the new image and restart the switch refer to section 5 4 4 Saving Configuration for details on saving the configuration Load the new firmware as shown below FTP um 7 0009 As the file is being loaded the firmware will display the transfer in progress window Please Wait Cancel Reboot the switch when the transfer is complete After reboot the firmware is ready for use MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 67 INTRODUCTION CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION 1 28 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2 1 Digital Energy Multilin Overview Multilink ML1200 Managed Field Switch Chapter 2 Product Description Multilink ML1200 Managed Field Switches provide maximum configurability in their class The fiber rich ML1200 can be config
219. ction cooling of the unit The Multilink ML1200 requires one DIN Rail mounting clip or latch for secure mounting These may be ordered as Model DIN RAIL ML1200 See a ML1200 viewed from the side at the left with model DIN RAIL ML1200 in place on the unit The Din Rail Latching clips are mounted on the upper side corners of the ML1200 unit Two threaded holes are provided on the sides of ML1200 for DIN Rail mounting purposes See side view at the left The required two screws are included with the DIN Rail brackets and are no 10 32 X 3 8 PHIL PAN w star washer The two heavy duty Din Rail latches are designed as if that they can be manually accessed from the top when the ML1200 is installed on a DIN Rail To install the ML1200 with the DIN Rail brackets and latches attached to it hold the ML1200 in the side vertical position with the bottom out and with the top moved in toward the DIN Rail Position the latches over the top of the DIN Rail Then snap the latches into holding position by moving the bottom of the ML1200 inwards to a vertical position The DIN Rail latches and brackets are heavy duty and will hold the ML1200 securely in position even with cabling attached to the unit To release the ML1200 from the DIN Rail mounting press the top of the two DIN Rail latches down simultaneously to release the ML1200 so that it can be dismounted by pulling the bottom out Once the bottom of the ML1200 is rotated out the DIN Rail latch is not en
220. curity use the Status drop down menu as shown below 6 12 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 ACCESS CONSIDERATIONS Graphical Display Ej O Administration E Configuration Access Bridging E IGMP IPv6 Port Signal E LACP None Logs None Port None Broadcast Protect None Settings None None None Port Security View c 4 M Mirroring 605 E RADIUS E O RSTP SMTP SNMP E Statistics E VLAN Status Action None None None None None None None ACCESS CONSIDERATIONS Logout oQ Enabled M Learn EA Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable SS S Note that the screen also provides an overview of each port on the switch Each port can be individually configured for the proper port security action Each individual port can be configured by clicking on the edit icon 4P Once the edit screen is shown the following actions can be taken for each port 1 The port can be specified to create a log entry or send a trap do both or do nothing This is done through the Signal Status drop down menu 2 The port can be specified to drop the connection disable the port or do nothing This is indicated by the Action Status drop down menu 3 The port can be put in the learn mode or the learning can be disabled This is indicated by the Learn Status drop down menu
221. d a transient group is dynamically assigned an address when the group is created at the request of a host A transient group ceases to exist and its address becomes eligible for reassignment when its membership drops to zero The creation of transient groups and the maintenance of group membership is the responsibility of multicast agents entities that reside in internet gateways or other special purpose hosts There is at least one multicast agent directly attached to every IP network or sub network that supports IP multicasting A host requests the creation of new groups and joins or leaves existing groups by exchanging messages with a neighboring agent The Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP is an internal protocol of the Internet Protocol IP suite IP manages multicast traffic by using switches multicast routers and hosts that support IGMP in the MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch implementation of IGMP a multicast router is not necessary as long as a switch is configured to support IGMP with the querier feature enabled A set of hosts routers and or switches that send or receive multicast data streams to or from the same sourcels is termed a multicast group and all devices in the group use the same multicast group address The multicast group running version 2 of IGMP uses three fundamental types of messages to communicate e Query A message sent from the querier multicast router or switch asking for a response from
222. d 10BASE T CAT 5 cables should be used when making 100BASE TX connections When the ports are used as 10BASE T ports CAT 3 may be used In either case the maximum distance for unshielded twisted pair cabling is 100 meters 328 ft Media IEEE Standard Connector Twisted Pair CAT 3 4 5 10BASE T RJ 45 Twisted Pair CAT 5 100BASE TX RJ 45 It is recommended that high quality CAT 5 cable be used whenever possible in order to provide flexibility in a mixed speed network since 10 100 copper switched ports are auto sensing for either 10 and 100Mb s The following procedure describes how to connect a 10BASE T or 100BASE TX twisted pair segment to the RJ 45 port The procedure is the same for both unshielded and shielded twisted pair cables 1 Using standard twisted pair media insert either end of the cable with an RJ 45 plug into the RJ 45 connector of the port Note that even though the connector is shielded either unshielded or shielded cables and wiring may be used 2 Connectthe other end of the cable to the corresponding device 3 Usethe LINK LED to ensure proper connectivity by noting that the LED will be illuminated when the unit is powered and proper connection is established For Power Substations In support of the IEEE 1613 Class 2 standard GE Multilin advises that for substation applications the RJ 45 ports are intended for connectivity to other communication equipment such as routers or telecommunication multiplexers ins
223. d defines the RMON statistics group and the community string associated with the group statistics def owner string def comme string The alarm command defines the RMON alarm group and the community string associated with the group alarm def owner lt string gt def comme string The event command defines the RMON event group and the community string associated with the group event def owner lt string gt def comm lt string gt The show romcommand lists the specific RMON data as defined by the group type show rmon lt stats hist event alarm gt The following command sequence illustrates how to configure RMON groups ML1200 rmon rmon ML1200 rmon event def owner test def comm somestring RMON Event Default Owner is set RMON Event Default Community is set MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 16 15 SNMP CHAPTER 16 SNMP ML1200 rmon show rmon event RMON Event Default Owner test RMON Event Default Community somestring ML1200 rmon exit ML1200 16 16 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL Digital Energy Multilin Multilink ML1200 Managed Field Switch Chapter 17 Miscellaneous 17 1 E mail 17 1 1 Description SMTP RFC 821 is a TCP IP protocol used in sending e mail However since it s limited in its ability to queue messages at the receiving end it s usually used with one of two other protocols POP3 or Internet Message Access Protocol IMAP that lets
224. de manual Inactivity Timeout min 120 Address Age Interval min 300 Inbound Telnet Enabled Yes Web Agent Enabled Yes Time Zone GMT 05hours 00minutes Day Light Time Rule Canada System UpTime 0 Days 0 Hours 45 Mins 55 Secs ML1200 Some of the parameters in the MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch are shown above The list of parameters below indicates some of the key parameters on the switch and the recommendations for changing them or optionally keeping them the same 1 4 7 Privilege Levels Two privilege levels are available manager and operator Operator is at privilege level 1 and the manager is at privilege level 2 the privilege increases with the levels For example to set up a user for basic monitoring capabilities use lower number or operator level privilege level 1 The Manager level provides all operator level privileges plus the ability to perform system level actions and configuration commands To select this level enter the enable user name command at the Operator level prompt and enter the Manager password when prompted enable user name For example switching from an operator level to manager level using the enable command is shown below ML1200 enable manager Password 12008 Note the prompt changes with the new privilege level Operator privileges allow views of the current configurations but do not allow changes to the configuration A gt character
225. delimits the operator level prompt Manager privileges allow configuration changes The changes can be done at the manager prompt or for global configuration as well as specific configuration A character delimits any manager prompt MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 11 INTRODUCTION CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION 1 4 8 User Management A maximum of five users can be added per switch Users can be added deleted or changed from a manager level account There can be more than one manager account subject to the maximum number of users on the switch being restricted to five To add a user use the add command as shown below The user name has to be a unique name The password is recommended to be at least 8 characters long with a mix of upper case lower case numbers and special characters add user lt name gt level lt number gt The following example adds a user peter with manager level privilege ML1200 user ML1200 userMHt add user peter level 2 Enter User Password Confirm New Password ML1200 user To delete a user use the delete command as shown below delete user lt name gt The following example deletes the user peter ML1200 user delete user peter Confirm User Deletion Y N Y User successfully deleted ML1200 user The syntax to modify a password is shown below passwd user lt name gt The following example changes the password for user peter ML1200 user
226. dem protocol Folder Documents NMultilink 1 7 Filename CAMy Documents Multilinks 2 0 ML Rel 2 0 1hir B Protocol modem Y Send Close Cancel gt Select the Send button and to begin the file transfer MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 65 INTRODUCTION CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION Once the file transfer is completed reboot the switch with the reboot command or by cycling power Login to the switch and use the show version command to verify and upload the configuration file if necessary 1 6 4 Updating through the EnerVista Secure Web Management software Use the following procedure to install the EnerVista Secure Web Management software Download the latest MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch firmware from the GE Multilin web site Save this file on FTP or Ensure the FTP or path is configured If using FTP record the FTP login name and password Select the switch to upgrade Ensure you have system administration privileges available on the switch gt Open an EnerVista Secure Web Management software session with the switch by typing in the following URL https lt IP address of the switch If using FTP save the configuration before proceeding GE Multilin recommends a two step update first save the configuration to the ftp server then load the new image and restart the switch refer to se
227. disable gt p2p lt on offlauto gt The p2p parameter sets the point to point value to off on all ports connected to shared LAN segments i e connections to hubs The default value is auto P2P ports would typically be end stations or computers on the network The edge parameter enables disables all ports connected to other hubs bridges and switches as edge ports The migration parameter is set for all ports connected to devices such as hubs bridges and switches known to support IEEE 802 1d STP services but not RSTP services The show active stp command displays whether STP or RSTP is running show active stp The show stp command display the RSTP or STP parameters show stp config ports Users may notice extended recovery time if there is a mix of firmware revisions in the Mesh EA or Ring NOTE 13 4 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 13 RAPID SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL RAPID SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL The variables listed by the show stp config command are Rapid Spanning Tree Enabled Global Indicates whether STP is enabled or disabled globally i e if the values is YES all ports have STP enabled otherwise all ports have STP disabled Rapid Spanning Tree Enabled Ports Indicates which ports have RSTP enabled Protocol Indicates whether STP or RSTP is being used It also indicates if RSTP is used in Smart RSTP ring only mode or normal mode Bridge Priority Specifies the switch br
228. e In this case it is desirable to operate the fiber link at 100Mb speed and at either half or full duplex mode depending on the capabilities of the remote device Standard commercially available Fast Ethernet media converters mostly do not support auto negotiation properly and require that the switched port to which they are connected be at the 100Mb fixed speed Attachments to a 10 100 auto negotiation port typically will not work properly The ML1200 Switch s RJ 45 ports handle this situation by configuring the ports as per desired through MNS software port settings and can check the port status of each port after the change When Multilink ML1200 RJ 45 copper ports are set for auto negotiation and are connected to another auto negotiating device there are 4 different speed and F H modes possible depending on what the other device supports These are 1 100Mb full duplex 2 100Mb half duplex 3 10 Mb full duplex and 4 10 Mb half duplex MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 4 OPERATION NOTE OPERATION The auto negotiation logic will attempt to operate in descending order and will normally arrive at the highest order mode that both devices can support at that time Since auto negotiation is potentially an externally controlled process the original highest order mode result can change at any time depending on network changes that may occur If the device at the other end is not an auto negot
229. e ensure the first three of the four situations described above are met RSTP mode has to be enabled before any configuration to the ring only mode The RSTP command enters the RSTP configuration mode and enables disables RSTP By default RSTP is disabled and has to be manually activated rstp rstp enable disable The syntax for the romode command on RSTP is shown below romode add port port listlrange romode del port lt portl list range gt MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 13 15 RAPID SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL CHAPTER 13 RAPID SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL romode enable disable romode show The sequence of commands for enabling ring only mode is shown in the following example Example 13 5 Configuring smart RSTP ring only mode 112004 rstp ML1200 rstp rstp enable Successfully set the RSTP status ML1200 rstp romode show RO MODE status Disabled RO MODE set on ports NONE ML1200 rstp romode add port 1 2 Added Ports 1 2 ML1200 rstp romode enable RSTP Ring Only Mode Enabled ML1200 rstp romode show RO MODE status Enabled RO MODE set on ports 1 2 ML1200 rstp romode disable RSTP Ring Only Mode Disabled ML1200 rstp romode show RO MODE status Disabled RO MODE set on ports 1 2 13 14 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 13 RAPID SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL 13 3 1 Normal RSTP RAPID SPANNING TREE
230. e from 32 bits to 128 bits to support more levels of addressing hierarchy a much greater number of addressable nodes and simpler auto configuration of MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL be31 IP ADDRESSING 59 3 S 352 CHAPTER 5 IP ADDRESSING addresses The scalability of multicast routing is improved by adding a scope field to multicast addresses e Anew type of address called an anycast address is defined that identifies sets of nodes where a packet sent to an anycast address is delivered to one of these nodes The use of anycast addresses in the IPv6 source route allows nodes to control the path along which their traffic flows e Header Format Simplification Some IPv4 header fields have been dropped or made optional to reduce the common case processing cost of packet handling and to keep the bandwidth cost of the IPv6 header as low as possible despite the increased size of the addresses Even though the IPv6 addresses are four times longer than the IPv4 addresses the IPv6 header is only twice the size of the IPv4 header e Improved Support for Options Changes in the way IP header options are encoded allow more efficient forwarding less stringent limits on the length of options and greater flexibility for introducing new options in the future e Quality of Service Capabilities A new capability is added to enable the labeling of packets belonging to particular traffic flows for which the se
231. e a E O User Mgmt 1 Disabled 19531 No Reboot 2 Disabled 19531 No E Configuration 3 Disabled 19531 No E Access 4 Disabled 19531 No Alarm 5 Disabled 19531 No 5 0 Bridging B Disabled 19531 No m 7 Disabled 19531 No H OLACP Logs E Port gt Broadcast Protect Settings Security Mirroring 0005 E RADIUS E ORSTP SMTP SNMP SNTE Cc Ovi dmo 7 To edit the threshold level click on the edit icon as seen below MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 9 15 PORT MIRRORING AND SETUP CHAPTER 9 PORT MIRRORING AND SETUP See details in Broadcast Storms on page 9 7 to determine the threshold level Graphical Display Administration 3j File Mgmt O Ping System E O Set Telnet F User Mgmt Reboot Configuration 5 0 Access Alarm Bridging O ICMP E OLACP Settings Security Mirroring 005 O RADIUS 8 RSTP SMTP SNMP SNTE 009 Logout gt Threshold 19531 Cancel OK E gt After changes are made do not forget to save the changes using the save icon If the switch is rebooted before the changes are made the changes will be lost MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL Digital Energy Multilin Multilink ML1200 Managed Field Switch Chapter 10 VLAN 10 1 VLAN Description 10 1 1 Ov
232. e can be either Tag VLAN or Port VLAN Both VLANs cannot co exit at the same time 3 Therecan only be one default VLAN for the switch The default is set to VLAN 1 and can be changed to another VLAN A word of caution on changing the default VLAN as well there can be repercussions on management as well as multicast and other issues 4 Tag VLAN support VLAN ids from 1 to 4096 VLAN ids more than 2048 are reserved for specific purposes and it is recommended they not be used MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 10 15 VLAN Example 10 1 Converting Port VLAN to Tag VLAN L1200 vlan type port 11200 port vlan Show vlan type port LAN ID 1 Name Default VLAN Status Active VLAN ID 10 Name engineering Status Active VLAN ID 20 Name sales Status Active VLAN ID 30 Name marketing Status Active VLAN ID 40 Name Support Status Active CHAPTER 10 VLAN To switch to Tag VLAN the port VLAN has to be disabled or stopped Only one type of VLAN can co exist at the same Po time Exit out of Port VLAN configuration mode and set the VLAN type to be Tag VLAN L1200 port vlan Stop vlan all ll active VLAN s stopped 1200 port vlan exit LAN set to Tag based L1200stshow active vlan ag VLAN is currently active MI A MI ML1200 Set vlan type tag VI MI T M 11200 Show vlan type tag Continued on next pagel 10 14 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD S
233. e console session use the logout command This command prompts to ensure that the logout was not mistakenly typed The following syntax applies logout The following example illustrates logging out from a session ML1200 gt logout Logging out from the current session Y or N Y Connection to the host lost 1 14 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION 1 5 EnerVista Secure Web Management 1 5 1 Logging in for the First Time Enter the following URL in the web browser to login to the EnerVista Secure Web Management software https IP Address assigned to the switch y Make sure you use HTTPS secure HTTP and not HTTP in the URL NOTE In the example shown in the previous section the URL is https 3 94 247 41 If your site uses name services you can use a name instead of the IP address Please make sure that the name is resolved to the IP address assigned to the switch The secure site will issue the certificate check shown below Security Alert Information you exchange with this site cannot be viewed or changed by others However there is a problem with the site s security certificate The security certificate was issued by a company you have not chosen to trust View the certificate to determine whether you want to trust the certifying authority The security certificate date is valid The name on the security certificate is invalid or does not mat
234. e gt quiet lt 0 65535 gt maxreauth lt 0 10 gt transmit lt 1 65535 gt The port argument is mandatory and identifies the ports to be configured The quiet argument is optional and represents the quiet period the amount of time in seconds the supplicant is held after an authentication failure before the authenticator retries the supplicant for connection The default value is 60 seconds and values can range from 0 to 65535 seconds The maxreauth argument is optional and represents the number of re authentication attempts permitted before the port is unauthorized The default value is 2 7 4 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 7 ACCESS USING RADIUS ACCESS USING RADIUS and integer values can range from 0 to 10 The transmit argument is optional and represents the transmit period This is the time in seconds the authenticator waits to transmit another request for identification from the supplicant The default value is 30 and values range from 1 to 65535 seconds The reauth command determines how the authenticator MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch performs the re authentication with the supplicant or PC reauth port lt numllist range gt status lt enable disable gt period lt 10 86400 gt The port argument is mandatory and sets the ports to be configured The status argument is optional and enables disables re authentication The period argument is optional and represents the re authentica
235. e if port 1 belongs to VLAN 10 20 30 40 the command set port port 1 leave id 40 makes port 1 belong to VLAN 10 20 30 dropping VLAN 40 set port port lt number list range gt leave id lt number gt The show port command lists all parameters related to tag VLAN for the list of ports If the port parameter is omitted it will display all ports show port port lt port list range gt To move Management Control on any VLAN add id vlan Id name vlan name gt port lt number list range gt Forbid lt number list range gt lt mgt nomgt gt To enable or disable Management Control on any VLAN edit id vlan Id name vlan name port number list range mgt nomgt 10 12 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 10 VLAN VLAN 10 4 5 Example In the following example we start with Port VLAN and convert to TAG VLAN We define ports 3 through 5 to belong to VLANs 10 20 and 30 and the rest of the ports belong to the default VLAN in this case VLAN 1 Filtering is enabled on ports 3 to 5 The VLAN setup is done before devices are plugged into ports 3 to 5 as a result the status of the ports show the port status as DOWN 1 A word of caution when Tag VLAN filtering is enabled there can be serious connectivity repercussions the only way to recover from that it is to reload the switch without saving the configuration or by modifying the configuration from the console serial port 2 Ther
236. e supplicant or PC These are defined through the Configuration Radius Port Access Reauth menu item Graphical Display Administration Configuration Access Bridging IGMP IPv6 OLACP Logs Port 055 E O RADIUS Server E Port Set E Access Backend omm Stats ORSTP SMTP SNMP SNTP Statistics VLAN 802 1x Authenticator Port Reauth 1 enable 3600 2 enable 3600 3 enable 3600 4 enable 3600 5 enable 3600 B enable 3600 7 enable 3600 Logout 9 SS SB The Reauth Period represents the time the authenticator waits before a re authentication process will be done again to the supplicant Values range from 10 to 86400 seconds with a default of 3600 1 hour The Configuration Radius Port Stats menu item illustrates the radius statistics for each port Graphical Display Administration E Configuration Access Bridging IGMP O v6 O LACP Logs Port aos Ej O RADIUS Server Ej Port Set Access Backend Reauth oE E O RSTP SMTP SNMP Statistics VLAN 802 1x Authenticator Port Stats Authentication Counters Auth Enters Connecting Auth Eap Logoffs While Connecting Auth Enters Authenticating Auth Success While Authenticating Auth Timeouts While Authenticating Auth Failed While Authenticating Auth Reauths While Auth
237. e switch for the changes to take effect 5 30 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 IP ADDRESSING IP ADDRESSING 5 5 IPv6 This section explains how to access the GE MultiLink switches using IPv6 instead of IPv4 addressing IPv6 provides a much larger address space and its use is often required Assumptions It is assumed here that the user is familiar with IP addressing schemes and has other supplemental material on IPv6 configuration routing setup and other items related to IPv6 This user guide does not discuss these details 5 5 1 Introduction to IPv6 IPv6 is short for Internet Protocol Version 6 IPv6 is the next generation protocol or IPng and was recommended to the IETF to replace the current version Internet Protocol IP Version 4 IPv4 IPv6 was recommended by the IPv6 or IPng Area Directors of the Internet Engineering Task Force at the Toronto IETF meeting on July 25 1994 in RFC 1752 The Recommendation for the IP Next Generation Protocol The recommendation in question was approved by the Internet Engineering Steering Group and a proposed standard was created on November 17 1994 The core set of IPv6 protocols was created as an IETF draft standard on August 10 1998 IPv6 is a new version of IP designed to be an evolutionary step from IPv4 It is a natural increment to IPv4 It can be installed as a normal software upgrade in internet devices and is interoperable with the current IP
238. e switch is eliminated and bandwidth is saved by not allowing packets to flood out on all ports For many reasons a port may be configured to belong to multiple VLANs As shown below ports can belong to multiple VLANs In this figure a simplistic view is presented where some ports belong to VLANs 1 2 and other ports belong to VLANs 2 3 Ports can belong to VLANs 1 2 and 3 This is not shown in the figure SEGMENT 1 SECMENT SEGMENT 3 CONSOLE FIGURE 10 2 Ports assigned to multiple VLANs By default on the MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch VLAN support is enabled and all ports on the switch belong to the default VLAN DEFAULT VLAN This places all ports on the switch into one physical broadcast domain 16 2 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 10 VLAN VLAN If VLANs are entirely separate segments or traffic domains how can the VLANs route traffic or talk to each other This can be done using routing technologies e g a router or a L3 switch The routing function can be done internally to a L3 switch One advantage of an L3 switch is that the switch can also support multiple VLANs The L3 switch can thus route traffic across multiple VLANs easily and provides a cost effective solution if there are many VLANs defined As shown below routing between different VLANs is performed using a router or a Layer 3 switch L3 switch SEGMENT 1 SEGMENT 2 ROUTER CONSOLE
239. eading by users belonging to the group Security level A type of security algorithm performed on each SNMP packet The three levels are noauth auth and priv noauth authenticates a packet by a string match of the user name auth authenticates a packet by using either the HMAC MD5 algorithms priv authenticates a packet by using either the HMAC MD5 algorithms and encrypts the packet using the CBC DES DES 56 algorithm Security model The security strategy used by the SNMP agent Currently ML1200 supports three security models SNMPv1 SNMPv2c and SNMPv3 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP A network management protocol that provides a means to monitor and control network devices and to manage configurations statistics collection performance and security Simple Network Management Protocol Version 2c SNMPv2c The second version of SNMP it supports centralized and distributed network management strategies and includes improvements in the Structure of Management Information SMI protocol operations management architecture and security SNMP engine A copy of SNMP that can either reside on the local or remote device SNMP group A collection of SNMP users that belong to a common SNMP list that defines an access policy in which object identification numbers OIDs are both read accessible and write accessible Users belonging to a particular SNMP group inherit all of these attributes defined by the group MULTILINK
240. earch will yield information about these servers You can use the IP address of these servers however please ensure the server can be reached by using the ping command The ping command can also be launched from the EnerVista software MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 IP ADDRESSING IP ADDRESSING Graphical Display SNTP Configuration Logout amp o Administration NI Configuration Access Alarm Bridging E O IGMP OLACP Logs E O Port 9905 Time Out 1 10 RADIUS RSTP gt Retries Count 1 3 SMTP SNMP Sync 3 Ej 0 Statistics VLAN Add SNTP Server IP Address Hour 12 i Sync Now ar ap Minute 00 _ Cancel The Time Out value is in seconds Note the time server can be a NTP server available on the Internet Ensure the IP parameters are configured for the switch and the device can be pinged by the switch Once the server is added it is listed with the other SNTP servers MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 13 IP ADDRESSING CHAPTER 5 IP ADDRESSING 5 4 System Configuration 5 4 1 Saving and Loading Command Line 5 4 2 Config file Place the Switch offline while transferring Setting Files to the Switch When transferring Settings Files from one Switch to another the IP address of the originating Switch will also be transferred The user must t
241. ed Configured Configured Configured MAC ADDRESS 230 48 E 3273 IS icas ac Configured Configured Configured Configured Configured bd 109 40 85 45 23 bd 89 40 85 45 abs 23 6 5 ACCESS CONSIDERATIONS 6 6 CHAPTER 6 ACCESS CONSIDERATIONS Example 6 2 shows how to enable learning on a port After the learning is enabled the port security can be queried to find the status of MAC addresses learnt If there were machines connected to this port the MAC address would be shown on port 3 as they are shown on port 1 Example 6 3 shows how to allow specific MAC address on specific ports After the MAC address is specified the port or specific ports or a range of ports can be queried as shown Example 6 4 shows how to remove a MAC address from port security To set logging on a port use the following command sequence ML1200 port securityHt signal port 3 logandtrap Port security Signal type set to Log and Trap on selected port s The examples provided illustrate the necessary commands to setup port security The recommended steps to setup security are Set the ML1200 software to allow port security commands use the port security command gt Enable port security use the enable ps command Enable learning on the required ports for example use the learn port 3 enable command for port 3 Verify learning is enables and MAC addresses are being learn
242. ed VLANs 10 4 2 Commands The set port command for setting Tag VLANs has the following parameters The default id parameter sets the default VLAN id termed PVID in previous versions The default VLAN id is the VLAN id assigned to the untagged packets received on that port For the MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch the default VLAN id is 1 set port port lt number list range gt default id lt number gt The filter parameter enables or disables the VLAN filtering function When enabled the switch will drop the packets coming in through a port if the port is not a member of the VLAN For example if port 1 is a member of VLANs 10 20 and 30 if a packet with VLAN id 40 arrives at port 1 it will be dropped set port port lt number list range gt filter status lt enable disable gt The tagging id and status parameters define whether the outgoing packets from a port will be tagged or untagged This definition is on a per VLAN basis For example the command set port port 1 tagging id 10 status tagged will instruct the switch to tag all packets going out of port 1 to belong to VLAN 10 set port port lt number list range gt tagging id lt number gt status lt tagged untagged gt The join id parameter adds the specified port s to the specified VLAN id This parameter works with active or pending VLANs set port port lt number list range gt join id lt number gt The leave id parameter releases a specific port from a VLAN For exampl
243. ed for temporary connectivity to other equipment such as PCs Since the console port connection is temporary it is excluded from IEEE 1613 packet loss testing per the 1613 standard defined test procedure 5 10 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL Digital Energy Multilin Multilink ML1200 Managed Field Switch Chapter 4 Operation This chapter describes the functions and operation of the Multilink ML1200 Switch 4 1 Functionality 4 1 1 Switching Functionality A Multilink ML1200 provides switched connectivity at Ethernet wire speed among all of its ports The Multilink ML1200 supports10 100Mbs for copper media and 10 or 100Mb separate traffic domains for fiber ports to maximize bandwidth utilization and network performance All ports can communicate to all other ports in a Multilink ML1200 but local traffic on a port will not consume any of the bandwidth on any other port The Multilink ML1200 units are plug and play devices There is no software configuring necessary to be done for basic operation at installation or for maintenance The only hardware configuration settings are user options for an UP LINK Switch resides inside the unit on the ML1200 RJ 45 There is an optional Half Full duplex mode and 10Mbps or 100Mbps selection for the switched ports which must be configured through management software per unit as per the requirement The internal functions of both are described below 4 1 1 1 Filteri
244. efore reset the IP address on the receiving Switch before connecting to the network After configuration changes are made all the changes are automatically saved It is a good practice to save the configuration on another server on the network using the tftp or ftp protocols Once the configuration is saved the saved configuration can be reloaded to restore the settings At this time the saved or loaded configuration parameters are not in a human readable format The following figure illustrates the FTP window which can be used to save the configuration as well as up load new images or reload a saved configuration Graphical Display 4 FTP Logout 200 E Administration E File Mgmt og TFTP Ping System E Set Telnet E User Mgmt Reboot Configuration Access Alarm gt Host Name gt Server IP gt File Name Bridging 5 O IGMP OLACP Logs Port 005 5 O RADIUS Login ID y Password gt Transfer Type Image Download OK H O RSTP SMTP SNMP 5 E O Statistics FA SIL Ensure the machine specified by the IP address has the necessary services running on it For serial connections x modem or other alternative methods can be used Generally the filename name must be a unique filename as over writing files is not permitted by most FTP and servers or services The following figure illustrates saving the configuration on
245. el 12 watts typical for a small 4 port copper only model 24 V DC Power Input nominal 18 to 36VDC range 48 V DC Power Input nominal 36 to 60 VDC range 125 V DC Power Input nominal 88 to 150VDC range Standard 1200 DC Power Input Terminal Block GND See also Section xx Technical Specifications for the ML1200 base unit MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER B DC POWER INPUT DC POWER INPUT B 2 48V DC 24 V DC and 125 V DC Power Theory of Operation POWER SWITCH HUB SUPPLY A m CHASSIS GND GND The 48VDC 24VDC and 125VDC power options are designed using diodes inside on each DC power input line behind the two external power connection terminals so that the power from an external source can only flow into the hub This allows the Switch to operate only whenever DC power is correctly applied to the two inputs It protects the Switch from incorrect DC input connections An incorrect polarity connection for example will neither affect the Switch its internal power supply nor will it blow the fuse in the internal power supply MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3 DC POWER INPUT CHAPTER B DC POWER INPUT B 3 Applications for DC Powered Ethernet Switches Multilink ML1200 Switches are easily installed in a variety of applications where 48VDC 24 or 125VDC power is used as the primary power source The DC power configuration capability provides
246. eneric Attribute Registration Protocol GARP and VLAN registration over GARP is called GVRP GVRP is defined in the IEEE 802 1q and GARP in the IEEE 802 1p standards To utilize the capabilities of GVRP GE Multilin recommends that the user become familiar with the concepts and capabilities of IEEE 802 1q 11 1 2 GVRP Concepts GVRP makes it easy to propagate VLAN information across multiple switches Without GVRP a network administrator has to go to each individual switch and enable the necessary VLAN information or block specific VLANs so that the network integrity is maintained With GVRP this process can be automated It is critical that all switches share a common VLAN This VLAN typically is the default VLAN VID 1 on most switches and other devices GVRP uses GVRP Bridge Protocol Data Units GVRP BPDUs to advertise static VLANs We refer to GVRP BPDU is as an advertisement GVRP enables the MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch to dynamically create 802 1q compliant VLANs on links with other devices running GVRP This enables the switch to automatically create VLAN links between GVRP aware devices A GVRP link can include intermediate devices that are not GVRP aware This operation reduces the chances for errors in VLAN configuration by automatically providing VLAN ID VID consistency across the network GVRP can thus be used to propagate VLANs to other GVRP aware devices instead of manually having to set up VLANs across t
247. enied Port Supp Timeout Server Timeout Max Request sec sec ene wit The authenticator waits for the supplicant 2 45 60 5 to respond back for 45 seconds the 3 30 30 2 honc authenticator waits for 60 seconds for the 4 30 30 2 back end RADIUS server to respond back 5 30 30 2 and the authenticator will retransmit an 6 30 30 2 EAP request packet 5 times to the MLi1200lauthMBE portaccess port 2 quiet 120 maxreauth 7 tra Supplicant before it times out the authentication session Successfully set port access parameter s ML1200 authHHt show port access Port Quiet Period Max Reauth Tx Period sec sec dL 60 2 30 2 120 7 120 3 60 2 30 4 60 2 30 5 60 2 30 6 60 2 30 continued on following page The time the supplicant is held after an authentication failure before the authenticator retries the supplicant for connection is changed to 120 seconds the number of re authentication attempts permitted before the port becomes Unauthorized is set to 7 and the time the authenticator waits to transmit another request for identification from the supplicant is changed to 120 seconds These values can be changed on all ports depending on devices being authenticated MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL Pu ACCESS USING RADIUS 7 8 Setting port control parameters continued CHAPTER 7 ACCESS USING RADIUS ML1200 authHHt reauth port 1 status enable period 300 Successful
248. enticating Auth Eap Starts While Authenticating Auth Eap Logoff While Authenticating Auth Reauths While Authenticated Auth Eap Starts While Authenticated Auth Eap Logoff While Authenticated Backend Responses Backend Access Challenges Backend Other Requests To Supplicant Backend Non Nak Responses From Supplicant Backend Auth Successes Backend Auth Fails Port 1 out of 7 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL ww OO oOoo0o0o0oo0ooooooooooooc ACCESS USING RADIUS CHAPTER 7 ACCESS USING RADIUS After all the port characteristics are enabled gt Do not forget to save the configuration using the save 3 icon and enabling RADIUS from the Configuration Radius Server menu 7 14 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL Digital Energy Multilin Multilink ML1200 Managed Field Switch Chapter 8 Access using TACACS 8 1 Introduction to TACACS 8 11 Overview The TACACS protocol short for Terminal Access Controller Access Control System provides access control for routers network access servers and other networked computing devices via one or more centralized servers TACACS provides separate authentication authorization and accounting services TACACS allows a client to accept a username and password and send a query to a TACACS authentication server sometimes called a TACACS daemon server or simply TACACSD This server was normally a program running
249. er VLAN with VID 40 and VLAN name Support Graphical Display Port Based VLAN Configuration tw OO Administration E Configuration E Access Alarm Bridging E O IGMP OLacP VLAN ID 40 0 Logs E Port gt VLAN Name Support 005 O Raous oto 88s HORT Port v Port 2 v e o O SNTP Port4 Statistics Port 5 O VLAN Port amp GVRP Cancel OK add gt Add the ports gt Define the VLAN gt Click OK Graphical Display Port Based VLAN Configuration Loot OO Administration Configuration Ej 0 Access Alarm Bridging 20 es Se 1 Default VLAN Active 1 2 3 5 6 7 Logs 10 engineering Active 4 o Port 40 Support Pendin 12 9 e0 0005 PP g RADIUS RSTP SMTP SNMP SNTP 3 Statistics E O VLAN rt Based Tag Based ovRP Add Status MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 19 9 VLAN CHAPTER 10 VLAN After adding the VLAN the VLAN is not active Activating the VLAN has to be done manually To activate the VLAN click on the Status button D Select VLAN ID Select VLAN Status Start Graphical Display Port Based VLAN Configuration loot 25069 Administration c E Configuration 8 Access Alarm Bridging O IGMP OLACP Logs Port Port Based VLAN Status
250. er of 256 to 511 byte Oto 1 F9 0 rames received sent 4294967295 04BO Port 20 Number of 512 to 1023 byte Oto 1 F9 0 rames received sent 4294967295 04B2 Port 20 Number of 1023 to maximum 0 to 1 F9 0 byte frames received sent 4294967295 04B4 Port 20 Number of MAC error packets 01 1 F9 0 4294967295 04B6 Port 20 Number of dropped received 0to 1 F9 0 packets 4294967295 04B8 Port 20 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sen 4294967295 O4BA Port 20 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sen 4294967295 O4BC Port 20 Number of lt 64 byte fragments 0 to 1 F9 0 with good CRC 4294967295 O4BE Port 21 Number of bytes received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 04CO Port 21 Number of bytes sent 0to 1 F9 0 4294967295 04C2 Port 21 Number of frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0464 Port 21 Number of frames sent 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 04C6 Port 21 Total bytes received Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 0468 Port 21 Total frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 O4CA Port 21 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 O4CC Port 21 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 O4CE Port 21 Number of frames with CRC 0 to 1 F9 0 error 4294967295 04DO Port 21 Number of oversized frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 04D2 Port 21 Number of bad fragments 0to 1 F9 0 received 64 bytes 4294967295 0494 Port 21 Number of jabber frames Oto 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 04D6 Port 21 Number of collisions occurred 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 04D8
251. erate properly for data traffic 4 2 2 12 SFPs Gigabit 1000Mbps port modules The Multilink ML1200 offers a Gigabit option with multiple choices of copper 10 100 1000Mbps or Gigabit SFP Fiber modules for the modular slot While up to two Gigabit modules maxm can be configured in the modular slot C only 1 Port 10 100 Mbps 1 Port 1000 Mb SFP Q C1 Link 2 10 100 1000 CG Activity T FULL HALF The ML1200 Modules provide a GBIC opening for insertion of industry standard SFPs to provide Gigabit Gb media flexibility SFP fiber Transceivers are available with both multi mode 550m at 850nm and single mode at 1330nm 10 25 40 70 km fiber options and for Gigabit copper as well with new models appearing often The 1000Mb Gigabit SFP fiber port modules on the Multilink ML1200 are normally set factory default to operate at AUTO mode for best fiber distance and performance Only two Gigabit ports can be configured on a Mangum ML1200 managed switch in slot D There are three LEDs provided on each SFP Gigabit port module The SFP Gigabit fiber has LEDs that indicate LK Link status and ACT receiving activity when lit and F H on for Full and OFF for half duplex for that port The copper Gigabit port supports 10 100 1000Mb speeds The three LED s show the speed the connection has achieved It is set as AUTO by default All other LEDs are the same as the SFP fiber 4 2 2 13 Troubleshooting All Multilink Ethernet products
252. erier Disabled Querier Interval ly Querier Response Interval go Akal Multicasting Unknown Streams Disabled ML1200ligmp mcast enable MCAST is enabled ML1200 igmp show igmp IGMP State Enabled ImmediateLeave Disabled Querier Disabled Querier Interval gy Querier Response Interval Ec lal Multicasting Unknown Streams Enabled 15 10 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 15 IGMP IGMP 15 3 Configuring IGMP with EnerVista Secure Web Management software 15 3 1 Example For configuring IGMP D Select the Configuration gt IGMP menu item The menu allows the IGMP parameters to be set and provides information on IGMP groups and routers Graphical Display IGMP Configuration Administration Configuration Access E Bridging O IGMP nisu Groups Routers O0 6 E OLACP IGMP Status Disabled Logs fH Port Gos Querier Enabled E O RADIUS F RSTP Querier Interval 125 0 SMTP SNMP Querier Response Interval 10 Multicasting Unknown Streams Enabled E Statistics toot OQ Immediate Leave Disabled VLAN Edit The menu allows the IGMP parameters described earlier to be set It also provides the necessary information of IGMP groups and routers MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 15 11 IGMP CHAPTER 15 IGMP gt Click on the Edit button to edit the IG
253. erview Short for virtual LAN VLAN a VLAN creates separate broadcast domains or network segments that can span multiple MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switchs A VLAN is a group of ports designated by the switch as belonging to the same broadcast domain The IEEE 802 1Q specification establishes a standard method for inserting VLAN membership information into Ethernet frames VLANs provide the capability of having two or more Ethernet segments co exist on common hardware The reason for creating multiple segments in Ethernet is to isolate broadcast domains VLANs can isolate groups of users or divide up traffic for security bandwidth management etc VLANs are widely used today and are here to stay VLANs need not be in one physical location They can be spread across geography or topology VLAN membership information can be propagated across multiple MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switchs MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 10 1 VLAN CHAPTER 10 VLAN The following figure illustrates a VLAN as two separate broadcast domains The top part of the figure shows two traditional Ethernet segments Up to 32 VLANs can be defined per switch SEGMENT 1 SEGMENT 2 CONSOLE FIGURE 10 1 VLAN as two separate broadcast domains A group of network users ports assigned to a VLAN form a broadcast domain Packets are forwarded only between ports that are designated for the same VLAN Cross domain broadcast traffic in th
254. ettings Function arrow and ctrl keys actas ASCII Setup Terminal keys Windows keys 8 Terminal key O Windows key ASCII Sending Backspace key sends L Send line ends with line feeds Del CtrI H Space Ctr H C Echo typed characters locally Line delay 500 milliseconds Emulation Ca Auto detect mE mm Character delay 50 milliseconds gt Telnet terminal ID ANSI ASCII Receiving Backscroll buffer lines 500 C Append line feeds to incoming line ends Play sound when connecting or disconnecting L Force incoming data to 7 bit ASCII Wrap lines that exceed terminal width Input Translation ASCII Setup 754729A1 CDR FIGURE 17 1 Optimizing serial connection in HyperTerminal MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL lr 4 MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS CHAPTER 17 MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS 17 4 History 17 4 1 Commands The commands below may be useful in repeating commands and obtaining history information The command repeats the last command I The 1 2 n commands repeat the nth command as indicated by a show history n gt The show history command displays the last 25 executed commands If less than 25 commands were executed only those commands executed are shown show history The history is cleared if the user logs out or if the switch times out The history count restarts when the user logs in The show version command displays the current software vers
255. f 10 100 and 1000Mb The user can utilize the SNMP feature equipped with VLAN RMON STP and other standard managed LAN features to provide a secure and stable network MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2 11 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION CHAPTER 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Multilink ML2400 A ee ee im The ML1200 Managed Fiber with the Ring Only Mode feature easily fulfill the redundant requirement with a secure and fast reconfiguration time for cable breakup when set up in a ring topology The Gigabit port option boosts the bandwidth for high speed to support the peak traffic and minimize congestion Example 3 In another application in an industrial environment a 12 port Nebs compliant 24VDC managed switch is required to meet the fiber and copper connections to cover the wider area of video CCTV The switch must be SNMP enabled and managed to easily monitor the whole setup The Multilink managed field switch easily qualifies for this requirement with the various features and modularity it has Loaded with management software the field switch provides a very effective and economical solution for the video vignette environment The security features e g port security VLANs SNMPv3 secure telnet etc also boost the Multilink managed switches to provide a very effective and reliable solution The modularity feature to support both copper and fiber at either 10 100 1000Mb speeds easily meets the various speeds o
256. f legacy and future broadband requirements In a fast growing secure video environment the ML1200 is a reliable and secure solution The modular design of the Multilink ML1200s provide a wide range of copper fiber options to meet requirements The Gigabit uplink for storage or broadband uplink allows the telecom user a very effective solution to store their sensitive data securely 2 12 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL Digital Energy Multilin Multilink ML1200 Managed Field Switch Chapter 3 Installation 3 1 Preparation Before installing the equipment it is necessary to take the following precautions 1 If the equipment is mounted in an enclosed or multiple rack assembly the steady state long term environmental temperature around the equipment must be less than or equal to 60 C 2 If the equipment is mounted in an enclosed or multiple rack assembly adequate airflow must be maintained for proper and safe operation 3 If the equipment is mounted in an enclosed or multiple rack system placement of the equipment must not overload or load unevenly the rack System 4 Ifthe equipment is mounted in an enclosed or multiple rack assembly verify the equipment s power requirements to prevent overloading of the building s electrical circuits 5 Ifthe equipment is mounted in an enclosed or multiple rack assembly verify that the equipment has a reliable and uncompromised earthing path 3 1 1 Locating Mu
257. f the transceiver marks arrow sign for up Position the SFP transceiver correctly before insertion and then insert the SFP transceiver carefully until the transceiver connector snap into the place in the socket connector Connect the Transmit TX port on the Multilink PM to the Receive RX port of the remote device Connect the Receive RX port on the PM to the Transmit TX port of the remote device The LINK LED on the front of the PM will illuminate and turn Green when a proper connection has been established at both ends and when power is ON in the unit If LINK is not lit or OFF after cable connection the normal cause is improper cable polarity Swap the fiber cables at the PM connector and also check the connectivity on the target device to remedy this situation Reconfigure or reboot both the device if required If connected properly you can check via software for verification of the validity of SFP Gigabit ports Make sure Version 3 3 or higher firmware is loaded on the ML1200 switches to support the SFP transceivers MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 INSTALLATION CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 3 3 Mechanical Installation 3 3 1 DIN Rail Mounting the Multilink ML1200 The Multilink ML1200 is designed for use in a factory floor industrial environment It is available with optional DIN Rail brackets to mount it securely in a metal factory floor enclosure maintained vertically for proper conve
258. frequency of the topology changes e Time Since topology Change The number of seconds since the last topology change The variables listed by the show stp ports command are e Portit Indicates the port number The value ranges from 1 to the maximum number of ports in the switch e Type Indicates the type of port TP indicates twisted pair e Priority STP uses this to determine which ports are used for forwarding Lower numbers indicate higher priority The values range from 0 to 255 with a default of 128 Example 13 2 Reviewing the RSTP port parameters ML1200 rstp Show stp ports RSTP Port Configuration Porti Type Priority Path Cost State Des Bridge Des Port 01 TP 10 100 128 2000000 Disabled 0 02 TP 10 100 128 2000000 Disabled 00 02 03 100MB Fiber 128 200000 Disabled 00 03 04 100MB Fiber 128 200000 Disabled 00 04 13 6 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 13 RAPID SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL Example 13 3 RSTP information from a network with multiple switches ML1200 rstp Show stp ports RSTP Port Configuration RAPID SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL 01 02 03 04 TP 10 100 TP 10 100 100MB Fiber 100MB Fiber 128 128 128 128 Priority Path Cost State Des Bridge Des 200000 Forwarding 80 00 00 20 06 30 00 01 00 01 2000000 Disabled 00 02 200000 Disabled 00 03 200000 Disabled 00 04 200000 Disabled 00 05 05 100MB Fiber 128 e Path Cost This is t
259. g different versions of software GE Multilin recommends upgrading all switches to the most current software release To ease the process of uploading and executing a series of commands the ML1200 can create a host equivalent to creating a host table on many systems The command for creating a host is host lt addledit del gt name lt host name gt ip lt ipaddress gt user user pass lt password gt The show host command displays the host table entries ML1200 access ML1200 access host add name server ip 192 168 5 2 Host added successfully ML1200 access Show host No Host Name IP Address User Password server 192 168 5 2 RENEE ML1200 access MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL bez IP ADDRESSING 5 45 Script File CHAPTER 5 IP ADDRESSING Script file is a file containing a set of CLI commands which are used to configure the switch CLI commands are repeated in the file for clarity providing guidance to the user editing the file as to what commands can be used for modifying variables used by MNS The script file does not have a check sum at the end and is used for configuring a large number of switches easily As with any configuration file that is uploaded GE Multilin Inc recommends that modifications of this file and the commands should be verified by the user in a test environment prior to use in a live production network The script file will look familiar to people fami
260. g E O IGMP Port All ceni Poo MVANID Status Tagging gs Port 3 10 Pending Tagged 5 20 Pending Tagged eos 5 30 Pending Tagged ORADUS 2 10 Pending Tagged ORSTP 4 10 Pending Tagged SMTP 4 20 Pending Tagged SNMP 6 30 Pending Tagged Statistics E O VLAN Set Type Port Based El Tag Based Settings 0 Fitter GVRP 10 22 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 10 VLAN VLAN To activate the VLAN gt Click on the Status button under the Configuration VLAN gt Tag Based Settings menu gt Click OK Graphical Display Tag Based VLAN Configuration wa 13509 E O Administration lt E Configuration E 0 Access Alarm Bridging IGMP Bm OLAcP Logs E Tag Based VLAN Status GoS O RADIUS Ej O RSTP SMTP SNMP gt VLAN Status v SNTP E 0 Statistics E VLAN Set Type Port Based Ej Tag Based VLAN ID Select Y Cancel Settings 0 Fitter Tagging GVRP Tagged VLANs can be viewed from the Configuration gt VLAN gt Tag Based gt Tagging menu To add or delete specific ports from a VLAN gt Click on Join amp Leave button from the Configuration gt VLAN gt Tag Based gt Settings menu and specify the action In the example below we will take port 2 and assign it to leave VLAN 10 After the action is completed note that port 2 will belong to VLAN 1 only MU
261. g entry is composed of four fields e Severity the level of severity see below e Date date the event occurred on See Date and Time on page 5 8 for information on setting the date and time on the switch e Time time the event occurred on See Date and Time on page 5 8 for information on setting the date and time on the switch Log Description description of event as detected by the switch MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6 15 ACCESS CONSIDERATIONS CHAPTER 6 ACCESS CONSIDERATIONS Severity has one of the following values and depending on the severity type is assigned a severity level I information severity level 1 indicates routine events e A activity severity level 2 indicates the activity on the switch e D debug severity level 3 is reserved for GE Multilin internal diagnostic information e Clcritical severity level 4 indicates that a severe switch error has occurred e F fatal severity level 5 indicates that a service has behaved unexpectedly 6 3 3 Authorized Managers Just as port security allows and disallows specific MAC addresses from accessing a network the EnerVista Secure Web Management software can allow or block specific IP addresses or a range of IP addresses to access the switch Access this functionality via the Configuration gt Access gt IP Access menu item Graphical Display Access Control Logout H Qo o Administration Configuration
262. gaged and the ML1200 can be moved up and out free of the DIN Rail mounting If the Multilink ML1200 is to be mounted on a DIN Rail track for proper convection cooling of the unit there must be air space in the rear as the ML1200 unit is held out from the rear of the panel by the mounting brackets The ML1200 design uses the case for cooling patent pending and needs to be mounted vertically with air flow space around it in the front rear and sides The DIN Rail mounting brackets and latches are optional and need to be ordered as separate items e g Model DIN RAIL ML1200 3 3 1 1 Mounting Dimensions for ML1200 with metal brackets Each Multilink ML1200 is supplied with metal mounting brackets and screws to mount the unit securely on a panel or wall It is recommended to mount the 1200 vertically as shown below for proper cooling and long life reliability It is also advisable to mount the unit with space for air movement around the top and the sides typically a minimum of 1 inch Note that the metal brackets supplied hold the back of the ML1200 unit out from the panel or wall behind it creating a rear space of about inch or 1cm This allows air circulation and cooling of the rear part of the case 3 6 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION INSTALLATION For best cooling of the ML1200 attach the metal brackets to metal rather than wood or plastic Attaching to metal helps conduct
263. group is being detected Timer shows the amount of time left in seconds before the group port will be deleted lor will not be able to route multicast traffic if the switch does not receive a membership report e Leave Pending column shows the number of leave messages received from this port Every port can be individually set to three different IGMP modes auto block and forward e Auto lets IGMP control whether the port should or should not participate sending multicast traffic e Block manually configures the port to always block multicast traffic e Forward manually configures the port to always forward multicast traffic To set the port characteristics use the set port command in the IGMP configuration mode set port port lt port list range gt mode lt auto forward block gt The show port command displays the port characteristics for IGMP show port The show router command displays detected IGMP enabled router ports show router The set leave command enables or disables the switch to immediately process a host sending a leave message rather that wait for the timer to expire set leave lt enable disable gt The set querier command enables or disables a switch as IGMP querier set querier lt enable disable gt The set qi command sets the IGMP querier router to periodically send general host query messages These messages are sent to ask for group membership information This is sent to the all system multicast group address 22
264. gt The user command adds user entries The ML1200 allows up to 5 users to be added Currently the 1200 agent only support noauth and auth md5 for v3 authentication and auth des for priv authentication user lt ada delete gt id lt id gt username lt name gt usertype readonly readwrite authpass pass phrase privpass pass phrase level noauth auth priv subtree lt oid gt The show user command displays all or specific view entries The id is optional and is the number corresponding to the view entry number in the table show user id lt id gt The following example shows how to configure SNMP MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 16 SNMP SNMP Example 16 1 Configuring SNMP ML1200 set snmp type v1 SNMP version support is set to vi ML1200 show snmp SNMP CONFIGURATION INFORMATION SNMP Get Community Name public SNMP Set Community Name private SNMP Trap Community Name public AuthenTrapsEnableFlag disabled SNMP Access Status enabled SNMP MANAGERS INFO ML1200 set snmp type all SNMP version support is set to vl v2c v3 ML1200 show snmp SNMP v3 Configuration Information System Name ML1200 System Location Markham ON System Contact multilin tech ge com Authentication Trap Disabled Default Trap Comm public V3 Engine ID Multi Switch Engine ML1200 snmpv3 ML1200 snmpv3 setvar sysname m11200 syscontact admin syslo
265. h Supplicant Authenticator Authentication Server RADIUS FIGURE 7 1 802 1x network components The RADIUS server is the authentication server The authentication server provides a standard way of providing Authentication Authorization and Accounting services to a network Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP is an authentication framework which supports multiple authentication methods EAP typically runs directly over data link layers such as PPP or IEEE 802 without requiring IP EAP over LAN EAPOL encapsulates EAP packets onto 802 frames with a few extensions to handle 802 characteristics EAP over RADIUS encapsulates EAP packets onto RADIUS packets for relaying to RADIUS authentication servers The details of the 802 1x authentication are as follows 1 The supplicant host is initially blocked from accessing the network The supplicant wanting to access these services starts with an EAPOL Start frame 2 Theauthenticator MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch upon receiving an EAPOL start frame sends a response with an EAP Request Identity frame back to the supplicant This will inform the supplicant to provide its identity 3 The supplicant then sends back its own identification using an EAP Response Identity frame to the authenticator MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch The authenticator then relays this to the authentication server by encapsulating the EAP frame on a RADIUS Access Request packet 4 TheRADIUS
266. he Simple Network Management Protocol SNMPv3 e RFC 2275 View Based Access Control Model VACM for the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP 16 4 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 16 SNMP SNMP 16 2 Configuring SNMP through the Command Line Interface 16 2 1 Commands There are several commands and variable which can be set for configuring SNMP The basic SNMP v1 parameters can be set by referring to the section on System Parameters Most commands here refer to SNMP v3 commands and how the variables for SNMP v3 can be configured The snmp command enters the SNMP configuration mode snmp The snmpv3 command enters the SNMP V3 configuration mode It is still necessary to enable SNMP V3 by using the set snmp command after entering configuration mode snmpv3 The set snmp command defines the SNMP version The 1200 supports all versions v1 v2 and or only v1 By default SNMP vionly is enabled set snmp type v1 all The show snmp command displays the SNMP configuration information show snmp The setvar command sets the system name contact and location All parameters are optional but a user must supply at least one parameter setvar sysname syscontact syslocation lt string gt The quickcfg command automatically configures a default VACM view based access control model This allows any manager station to access the ML1200 either via SNMP v1 v2c or v3 The community name is public
267. he assigned port cost value used tor the switch to determine the forwarding points Values range from 1 to 2000000 Lower values indicate a lower cost and hence the preferred route The costs for different Ethernet speeds are indicated below The Path cost in STP is compared to the path cost in RSTP Table 13 1 Path cost as defined in IEEE 802 1d 802 1w Port type STP path cost RSTP path cost 10 Mbps 100 2000000 100 Mbps 19 200000 1 Gbps 20000 10 Gbps 2000 e State Indicates the STP state of individual ports Values can be Listening Learning Forwarding Blocking and Disabled Des Bridge This is the port s designated root bridge e Des Port This is the port s designated root port Another example of the same command from a larger network with several switches is shown in Example 13 3 Note the show stp ports command can be executed from the manager level prompt or from RSTP configuration state as shown in the screen captures earlier In this example ports 9 and 10 have a path cost of 20000 and are the least cost paths These ports are connected to other switches and the ports are enabled as forwarding ports Ports 6 and 7 are also connected to other switches From the state column it indicates that port 7 is in a standby state as that port is discarding all traffic More CLI commands associated with RSTP in the RSTP configuration mode are shown below The forceversion command sets the STP or RSTP co
268. he name argument assigns a specific name to the port This name is a designated name for the port and can be a server name user name or any other name e The speed argument sets the speed to be 10 or 100 Mbps This works only with 10 100 ports the value is ignored and no error shown for 10 Mbps ports e The flow argument sets up flow control on the port The bp argument enables back pressure signaling for traffic congestion management e The status argument enabled disables port operation The show port command displays information about a specific port number show port port numbers MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 9 5 PORT MIRRORING AND SETUP v NOTE CHAPTER 9 PORT MIRRORING AND SETUP In Example 9 1 ports 3 and 4 are given specific names Ports 1 and 5 are active as shown by the link status Port 5 is set to 100 Mbps and all other ports are set to 10 Mbps All ports are set to auto sensing speed The port speed and duplex data transfer operation settings are summarized below The speed setting defaults to auto and senses speed and negotiates with the port at the other end of the link for data transfer operation half duplex or full duplex The auto speed detection uses the IEEE 802 3u auto negotiation standard for 100Base T networks If the other device does not comply with the 802 3u standard then the port configuration on the switch must be manually set to match the port configur
269. he network After the switch creates a dynamic VLAN GVRP can also be used to dynamically enable port membership in static VLANs configured on a switch MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 11 51 VLAN REGISTRATION OVER GARP CHAPTER 11 VLAN REGISTRATION OVER GARP i There must be one common VLAN that is one common VID connecting all of the GVRP vy aware devices in the network to carry GVRP packets GE Multilin recommends the default VLAN DEFAULT VLAN VID 1 which is automatically enabled and configured as untagged on every port of the MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch That is on ports used as GVRP links leave the default VLAN set to untagged and configure other static VLANs on the ports as either Tagged or Forbid Forbid is discussed later in this chapter 11 1 3 GVRP Operations A GVRP enabled port with a tagged or untagged static VLAN sends advertisements BPDUS or Bridge Protocol Data Units advertising the VLAN identification VID Another GVRP aware port receiving the advertisements over a link can dynamically join the advertised VLAN All dynamic VLANs operate as Tagged VLANs Also a GVRP enabled port can forward an advertisement for a VLAN it learned about from other ports on the same switch However the forwarding port will not itself join that VLAN until an advertisement for that VLAN is received on that specific port Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Static VLAN GVRP On GVRP On GVRP O
270. herefore reset the IP address on the receiving Switch before connecting to the network Configuration changes are automatically registered but not saved that is the effect of the change is immediate However if power fails the changes are not restored unless they saved using the save command It is also a good practice to save the configuration on another network server using the tftp or ftp protocols Once the configuration is saved it can be loaded to restore the settings At this time the saved configuration parameters are not in a human readable format The commands for saving and loading configurations on the network are saveconf mode serial tftp ftp lt ipaddress gt file lt name gt loadconf mode lt serial tftp ftp gt lt ipaddress gt file lt name gt Ensure the machine specified by the IP address has the necessary services running For serial connections x modem or other alternative methods can be used In most situations the filename must be a unique since overwriting files is not permitted by most ftp and tftp servers or services Only alphanumeric characters are allowed in the filename The following example illustrated how to save the configuration on a tftp server ML1200 saveconf mode tftp 3 94 240 9 file m11200set Do you wish to upload the configuration Y or N Y The saveconf and loadconf commands are often used to update software Before the software is updated it is advised to save the configuratio
271. his traffic The IP Precedence field has values between 0 the default and 7 As the precedence value increases the algorithm allocates more bandwidth to that traffic to make sure that it is served more quickly when congestion occurs The MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch can assign a weight to each flow which determines the transmit order for queued packets In this scheme lower weights set on all ports are provided more service IP precedence serves as a divisor to this weighting factor For instance traffic with an IP Precedence field value of 7 gets a lower weight than traffic with an IP Precedence field value of 3 and thus has priority in the transmit order Once the port weight is set the hardware will interpret the weight setting for all ports as outlined below assuming the queues are sufficiently filled if there are no packets for example in the high priority queue packets are serviced on a first come first served FCFS basis from the low priority queue MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 14 QUALITY OF SERVICE QUALITY OF SERVICE Table 14 1 Port weight settings Value Hardware traffic queue behavior 0 No priority traffic is sent alternately from each queue and packets are queued alternately in each queue 1 Two packets are sent from the HIGH priority queue and one packet from LOW priority queue 2 Four packets are sent from the HIGH priority queue and one packet
272. iating device the ML1200 s RJ 45 ports will try to detect its idle signal to determine 10 or 100 speed and will default to half duplex at that speed per the IEEE standard General information Auto negotiation per port for 802 3u compliant switches occurs when the devices at both ends of the cable are capable of operation at either 10Mb or 100Mb speed and or in full or half duplex mode and can send receive auto negotiation pulses and the second of the two connected devices is powered up i e when LINK is established for a port or the LINK is re established on a port after being lost temporarily Some NIC cards only auto negotiate when the computer system that they are in is powered These are exceptions to the negotiate at LINK enabled rule above but may be occasionally encountered When operating in 100Mb half duplex mode cable distances and hop counts may be limited within that collision domain The Path Delay Value PDV bit times must account for all devices and cable lengths within that domain For Multilink ML1200 Fast Ethernet switched ports operating at 100Mb half duplex the bit time delay is 5 4 1 4 Flow control IEEE 802 3x standard wv NOTE Multilink ML1200 Switches incorporate a flow control mechanism for Full Duplex mode The purpose of flow control is to reduce the risk of data loss if a long burst of activity causes the switch to save frames until its buffer memory is full This is mo
273. ically The two most common procedures are using DHCP and bootp 5 2 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 IP ADDRESSING IP ADDRESSING 5 2 Importance of an IP Address 5 2 1 DHCP and bootp DHCP is commonly used for setting up addresses for computers users and other user devices on the network bootp is the older cousin of DHCP and is used for setting up IP addresses of networking devices such as switches routers VoIP phones and more Both of them can work independent of each other Both of them are widely used in the industry It s best to check with your network administrator as to what protocol to use and what the related parameters are DHCP and bootp require respective services on the network DHCP and bootp can automatically assign an IP address It is assumed that the reader knows how to setup the necessary bootp parameters usually specified on Linux UNIX systems in the etc boopttab directory 5 2 2 bootp Database Bootp keeps a record of systems supported in a database a simple text file On most systems the bootp service is not started as a default and has to be enabled A sample entry by which the bootp software will look up the database and update the IP address and subnet mask of the switch would be as follows ML1200 ht ether ha 002006250065 ip 3 94 247 41 sm 255 255 252 0 gw 3 94 244 1 hn vm rfc1048 where e ML1200 is a user defined symbolic name for the swi
274. ice in the building installation supply circuit to the product 3 This product shall be provided with a maximum 10 A DC Listed fuse or circuit breaker in the supply circuit when connected to a 48 V centralized DC source 4 The external power supply for DC units shall be a Listed Direct Plug In power unit marked Class 2 or Listed ITE Power Supply marked LP which has suitably rated output voltage i e 24 V DC or 48 V DC and suitable rated output current 5 Product does not contain user replaceable fuses Any internal fuses can ONLY be replaced by GE Multilin TOC TABLE OF CONTENTS Table of Contents 1 INTRODUCTION DERI M AEN RUDI reer HAE L INSPECTING THE PACKAGE AND 1 1 mc ECT 1 2 SPECIEI ATIS oncutanierutn I DIL ULL Lc Em 1 3 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE FIRMWARE isset nica acentos bb el eats 1 7 CONSOLE CONNECTION d iiti ie eet ice ep dt eed ate 1 7 CONSOLE SETUP RERBA UR 1 7 CONSOLE SCREEN vyssie i headed iifadan udin 1 8 LOGGING IN FOR THE FIRST TIME eerte tos esse sssonsnesenssessessoesenbecavsavses 1 8 AUTOMATIC IP ADDRESS CONFIGURATION eene tentent ten tenntnntnnttnntnnnin 1 8 SETTING THE IP PARAMETERS USING CONSOLE 1 9 PRIVILEGE LEVELS EXITING
275. idge priority value This value is used along with the switch MAC address to determine which switch in the network is the root device Lower values mean higher priority Values range from 0 to 65535 with a default of 0 Bridge Forward Delay Indicates the time duration the switch will wait from listening to learning states and from learning to forwarding states The value ranges from 4 to 30 seconds with a default of 15 Bridge Hello Time When the switch is the root device this is the time between messages being transmitted The value is from 1 to 10 seconds with a default of 2 Example 13 1 Enabling RSTP and reviewing the RSTP variables 2 L1200 rstp ML1200 rstp Show stp config RSTP CONFIGURATION Rapid STP STP Enabled Global NO RSTP STP Enabled Ports B abs Protocol Normal RSTP Bridge ID 80900 00 20 06 2b 1 81 55 Bridge Priority 32768 Bridge Forward Delay g Bridge Hello Time t 02 Bridge Max Age 7 20 Root Port 0 Root Path Cost g 0 Designated Root 80 00 00 20 06 2b e1 55 Designated Root Priority 32768 Root Bridge Forward Delay 035 Root Bridge Hello Time 02 Root Bridge Max Age t 20 Topology Change count iod Time Since topology Chg He Als MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 13 5 RAPID SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL CHAPTER 13 RAPID SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL e Bridge Max Age This is the maximum time a message with STP information is allowed by the switch
276. igned for use in connecting edge devices such as PLCs IEDs and PoE video cameras with upstream switches and routers where a mix of bursty data traffic and priority streaming traffic for video surveillance and cell tower applications are present Multilink ML1200 Field Switches are provided with LAN management software including SNMP Tag and Port based VLANs IGMP L2 and IGMP Snooping and Port Security with control via GUI and command line interface CLI For high availability LANs using ring topologies Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Link Loss Alert and Ring Only Mode are available Multilink ML1200 Managed Field Switches have heavy duty aluminum cases and are readily available with standard Industrial grade 24VDC power Alternative internal DC power options are available DC power input types may be 24V 48V 125V and dual source DC input is optional on all ML1200 s AC power is available via an external power supply unit see Section 3 4 for details Alarm Relay contacts provided on each Multilink ML1200 Switch monitor the hardware and software through traps providing a record of any losses of power signals and other user defined software events See Section 3 5 for details The wide selections of Quad port queen size modules are key to the flexibility and adaptability of Multilink ML1200s Some of the popular 4 ports modules are described below For a list of all the modules and options see Section 1 2 The ML1200 modules can only be co
277. in Internet Explorer https assigned IP address Ensure that https is entered not http and that there is connectivity that is you can ping the switch Step 3 If there is no response from either a DCHP or BOOTP server or if the switch is not connected to a network the switch will assign itself an IP address The ML1200 will check to see if IP address 192 168 1 2 with a network mask of 255 255 255 0 is free If so it will assume these values If this IP address is assigned to another device the ML1200 will repeat steps 1 through 3 to find a DCHP or BOOTP server or wait for the 192 168 1 2 address to become free Once connected the browser will display a login prompt The default login is Username manager Password manager 1 4 6 Setting the IP Parameters Using Console Port v NOTE To configure the Switch s IP using EnerVista UR Setup software refer to chapter 2 of this manual To setup the switch the IP address and other relevant TCP IP parameters have to be specified The IP address on the MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch is set to 192 168 1 2 from the factory The switch is fully operational as a Layer 2 switch as a default Setting a default IP address can potentially cause duplicate IP address problem if multiple switches are powered on and installed on the network To manage the switch an IP address has to be programmed Before starting please ensure that the IP address assigned to the switch
278. ing the configuration from the console serial port The ML1200 can be configured for either Tag VLAN or Port VLAN Both VLANs cannot co exit at the same time There can only be one default VLAN for the switch The default is set to VLAN 1 and can be changed to another VLAN There can be repercussions on management as well as multicast and other issues when changing the default VLAN Tag VLAN supports VLAN IDs from 1 to 4096 VLAN IDs greater than 2048 are reserved for specific purposes As such it is recommended they not be used To use the Tag VLAN first gt Set the VLAN type to Tag in the Configuration gt VLAN gt Set Type menu Graphical Display Set VLAN Type Logout Hi Qo o Administration i Ej Configuration E Access Alarm E Bridging E O IGMP Logs E Port QoS E O RADIUS E O RSTP SMTP SNMP gt VLAN Type Tag v SNTP E Statistics E O VLAN Port Based Tag Based GVRP MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 10 19 VLAN CHAPTER 10 VLAN The next step is to define the VLANs needed To do that gt Click On Configuration vlan gt tag based Menu gt Click on the Add button Graphical Display Tag Based VLAN Configuration Logout OOO Administration E Configuration Access Alarm E Bridging O icmp O LACP Logs Port 9905 H O RADIUS E RSTP SMTP SNMP SNTP Statistics Ej O VLAN Set Type
279. ion show version 17 8 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 17 MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS 17 5 Ping 17 5 1 Ping through the Command Line Interface The ping command can be used to test connectivity to other devices as well as checking to see if the IP address is setup correctly The command syntax is ping lt ipaddress gt count lt 1 999 gt timeout lt 1 256 gt For example ML12004 ping 3 94 248 61 3 94 248 61 is alive count 1 time 40ms ML1200 ping 3 94 248 61 count 3 3 94 248 61 is alive count 1 time 20ms 3 94 248 61 is alive count 2 time 20ms 3 94 248 61 is alive count 3 time 40ms ML1200 Many devices do not respond to ping or block ping commands Make sure that the target device responds or the network allows the ping packets to propagate 17 5 2 Ping through EnerVista Secure Web Management software The ping command can be used from EnerVista Secure Web Management software to test connectivity to other devices as well as checking to see if the IP address is correct Select the Administration Ping menu item to use ping Graphical Display Ping Utility Logout P eo o E Administration File Mgmt kil Config System E 0 Set 0 Telnet User Mgmt Reboot IP Address 192 168 100 90 e Ping Ej Configuration CERE 192 168 100 90 is alive count 1 time 20ms 192 168 100 90 is alive count 2 time 20ms 192 168 100 90
280. iority Path Cost State Des Bridge Des Port 01 TP 10 100 128 100 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 2b e1 54 80 01 02 TP 10 100 128 100 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 2b e1 54 80 02 03 100MB Fiber 128 100 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 2b e1 54 80 03 04 100MB Fiber 128 100 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 2b e1 54 80 04 12 4 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 12 SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL STP SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL STP NOTE e Priority STP uses this to determine which ports are used for forwarding Lower the number means higher priority Value ranges from 0 to 255 Default is 128 Path Cost This is the assigned port cost value used for the switch to determine the forwarding points Values range from 1 to 65535 e State indicates the STP state of individual ports Values can be Listening Learning Forwarding Blocking and Disabled Des Bridge This is the port s designated root bridge Des Port This is the port s designated root port To enable or disable STP enter the STP configuration mode via the stp command and use thestp enableorstp disable command To stp command enters STP configuration mode stp The enable and disable parameters start enable or stop disable STP stp enable disable The stp and rstp parameters set the spanning tree protocol to be IEEE 802 1d or 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol set stp type stp rstp The show active stp command display which version of STP is currently active sho
281. ipconfig display the IP configuration information including IPv6 address Syntax ping6 IPv6 address pings an IPv6 station Syntax show ipv6 displays the IPv6 information Syntax ftp IPv6 address ftp to an IPv6 station Syntax telnet IPv6 address telnet to an IPv6 station MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL Digital Energy Multilin Multilink ML1200 Managed Field Switch Chapter 6 Access Considerations 6 1 Securing Access 6 1 1 Description This section explains how the access to the MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch can be secured Further security considerations are also covered such as securing access by IP address or MAC address 65 It is assumed here that the user is familiar with issues concerning security as well as v securing access for users and computers on a network Secure access on a network can be provided by authenticating against an allowed MAC address as well as IP address 6 1 2 Passwords The MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch has a factory default password for the manager as well as the operator account Passwords can be changed from the user ID by using the set password command For example ML1200 set password Enter Current Password Enter New Password Confirm New Password Password has been modified successfully ML1200 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6 1 ACCESS CONSIDERATIONS 6
282. is alive count 3 time 20ms 192 168 100 90 is alive count 4 time 20ms As mentioned earlier many devices do not respond to ping commands Make sure that the target device responds or the network allows ping packets to propagate MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS CHAPTER 17 MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS 17 6 Prompt 17 6 1 Changing the Command Line Prompt Setting a meaningful host prompt can be useful when a network administrator is managing multiple switches and has multiple telnet or console sessions To facilitate this the ML1200 allows administrators to define custom prompts The command to set a prompt is set prompt prompt string The length of the prompt is limited to 60 characters There are predefined variables that can be used to set the prompt These are n system name e c system contact e l system location e i system IP address e m system MAC address e v version e the dollar sign character e r new line e b space A few examples on how the system prompt can be setup are shown below ML1200 snmp ML1200 snmp setvar sysname Core System variable s set successfully ML1200 snmp exit ML12004 set prompt n Core set prompt n b i Core 192 168 5 5 Set prompt n b i b Core 192 168 5 5 4 snmp Core 192 168 5 5 snmp Setvar sysname ML1200 System variable s set successfully Core 192 168 5 5 snmp exit Core
283. is known or contact your system network administrator to get the IP address information Follow the steps listed below to configure the switch Ensure the power is off MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 9 INTRODUCTION wv NOTE CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION gt Follow the steps described above for connecting the console cable and setting the console firmware Power on the switch Once the login prompt appears login as manager using default password manager Configure the IP address network mask and default gateway as per the IP addressing scheme for your network V Set the manager password this step is recommended refer to the following section Save the settings without saving the changes made will be lost Power off the switch or a firmware reboot as discussed below Power on the switch login with the new login name and password V NV NV NV From the PC or from the switch ping the IP address specified for the switch to ensure connectivity V From the switch ping the default gateway specified lensure you are connected to the network to check for connectivity to ensure network connectivity Syntax ipconfig ip ip address maske subnet mask dgw lt gateway gt An example is shown below ML1200 ipconfig 1 3 94 247 41 mask 255 255 252 0 dgw 3 94 244 41 ML1200 save This manual assumes the reader is familiar with IP addressing schemes as
284. is thus preempted from the queue and this method is called preemptive queuing Preemptive queuing makes sense if there are several levels of priorities normally more than two If there are too many levels then the system has to spend a lot of time managing the preemptive nature of queuing IEEE 802 1p defines and uses eight levels of priorities The eight levels of priority are enumerated 0 to 7 with 0 the lowest priority and 7 the highest MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 14 1 QUALITY OF SERVICE CHAPTER 14 QUALITY OF SERVICE To make the preemptive queuing possible most switches implement at least two queue buffers The MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch has two priority queues 1 low and 0 high When tagged packets enter a switch port the switch responds by placing the packet into one of the two queues and depending on the precedence levels the queue could be rearranged to meet the QoS requirements 14 1 5 DiffServ and QoS QoS refers to the level of preferential treatment a packet receives when it is being sent through a network QoS allows time sensitive packets such as voice and video to be given priority over time insensitive packets such as data Differentiated Services DiffServ or DS are a set of technologies defined by the IETF Internet Engineering Task Force to provide quality of service for traffic on IP networks DiffServ is designed for use at the edge of an Enterprise where corporate
285. ived 4294967295 014A Port 3 Number of frames with CRC 0 to 1 F9 0 error 4294967295 014C Port 3 Number of oversized frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 014E Port 3 Number of bad fragments 0 to 1 F9 0 received 64 bytes 4294967295 0150 Port 3 Number of jabber frames Oto 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 0152 Port 3 Number of collisions occurred 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0154 Port 3 Number of late collisions 0 to 1 F9 0 occurred 4294967295 0156 Port 3 Number of 64 byte frames 0to 1 F9 0 received sent 4294967295 0158 Port 3 Number of 65 to 127 byte 0to 1 F9 0 rames received sent 4294967295 015A Port 3 Number of 128 to 255 byte 0to 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 015C Port 3 Number of 256 to 511 byte Oto 1 F9 0 rames received sent 4294967295 015E Port 3 Number of 512 to 1023 byte 01 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 ED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 19 9 MODBUS PROTOCOL CHAPTER 18 MODBUS PROTOCOL Table 18 1 Modbus memory map Sheet 7 of 33 Address Description Range Step Format Default 0160 Port 3 Number of 1023 to maximum 0 to 1 F9 0 byte frames received sent 4294967295 0162 Port 3 Number of MAC error packets Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 0164 Port 3 Number of dropped received Oto 1 F9 0 packets 4294967295 0166 Port 3 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0
286. ived 4294967295 01B2 Port 5 Number of bad fragments Oto 1 F9 0 received 64 bytes 4294967295 01B4 Port 5 Number of jabber frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 01B6 Port 5 Number of collisions occurred 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 01B8 Port 5 Number of late collisions 0 to 1 F9 0 occurred 4294967295 01BA Port 5 Number of 64 byte frames Oto 1 F9 0 received sent 4294967295 01BC Port 5 Number of 65 to 127 byte Oto 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 O1BE Port 5 Number of 128 to 255 byte Oto 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 01CO Port 5 Number of 256 to 511 byte Oto 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 01C2 Port 5 Number of 512 to 1023 byte 0to 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 01C4 Port 5 Number of 1023 to maximum Oto 1 F9 0 byte frames received sent 4294967295 01C6 Port 5 Number of MAC error packets 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 01C8 Port 5 Number of dropped received 0to 1 F9 0 packets 4294967295 O1CA Port 5 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sen 4294967295 01CC Port 5 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sen 4294967295 O1CE Port 5 Number of 64 byte fragments 01 1 F9 0 with good CRC 4294967295 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 18 11 MODBUS PROTOCOL CHAPTER 18 MODBUS PROTOCOL Table 18 1 Modbus memory map Sheet 9 of 33 Address Descrip
287. k ML1200 Managed Field Switch supports three types of QoS Port based Tag based and ToS based QoS is disabled by default on the switch QoS needs to be enabled and configured The qos command enters the QoS configuration mode qos The usage of the setqos command varies depending on the type of QOS For example for QOS type tag the tag levels have to be set and for QOS type ToS the ToS levels have to be set If the priority field is not set it then defaults to low priority ToS has 64 levels and the valid values are 0 63 and a tagged packet has 8 levels and the valid values are 0 7 setqos type port tag tos none port lt port list range gt priority lt high low gt tos lt 0 63 list range gt tag lt 0 7 list range gt Setting the type parameter to none will clear the QoS settings The set weight command sets the port priority weight for All the ports Once the weight is set all the ports will be the same weight across the switch The valid value for weight is 0 7 set weight weight 0 7 A weight is a number calculated from the IP precedence setting for a packet This weight is used in an algorithm to determine when the packet will be serviced The show portweight command displays the weight settings on a port show portweight As mentioned previously the switch is capable of detecting higher priority packets marked with precedence by the IP forwarder and can schedule them faster providing superior response time for t
288. kets Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 0100 Port 1 Number of dropped received Oto 1 F9 0 packets 4294967295 0102 Port 1 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sen 4294967295 0104 Port 1 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sen 4294967295 0106 Port 1 Number of 64 byte fragments 01 1 F9 0 with good CRC 4294967295 0108 Port 2 Number of bytes received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 010A Port 2 Number of bytes sent 01 1 F9 0 4294967295 010C Port 2 Number of frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 010E Port 2 Number of frames sent 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0110 Port 2 Total bytes received 0to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0112 Port 2 Total frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0114 Port 2 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 0116 Port 2 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 0118 Port 2 Number of frames with CRC 0 to 1 F9 0 error 4294967295 011A Port 2 Number of oversized frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 011C Port 2 Number of bad fragments Oto 1 F9 0 received 64 bytes 4294967295 011E Port 2 Number of jabber frames 01 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 0120 Port 2 Number of collisions occurred 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0122 Port 2 Number of late collisions 0 to 1 F9 0 occurred 4294967295 0124 Port 2 Number of 64 byte frames 0to 1 F9 0 received sent 4294967295 0126 Port 2 Number of 65 to 127 byte Oto 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 18 8 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL
289. l on any VLAN add id vlan Id name lt vlan name gt port lt number list range gt Forbid lt number list range gt lt mgt nomgt gt To enable or disable Management Control on any VLAN edit id vlan Id gt name lt vlan name gt port lt number list range gt lt mgt nomgt gt 10 6 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 10 VLAN VLAN 10 3 Configuring Port VLANs with EnerVista Secure Web Management software 10 3 1 Description NOTE wy NOTE v NOTE Port VLANs are rarely used and are not recommended in networks which use VLANs across multiple switches Port VLANs are used when VLANs are setup up on a single switch and connectivity between the systems on different VLANs is needed however the broadcasts and multicasts are isolated to the specific VLAN Either port VLANs or Tag VLAN can be active at any given time on a switch Only the default VLAN VLAN ID 1 is active as a Tag VLAN as well as a port VLAN General steps for using port VLANs are 1 Plan your VLAN strategy and create a map of the logical topology that will result from configuring VLANs Include consideration for the interaction between VLANs 2 Configure at least one VLAN in addition to the default VLAN 3 Assign the desired ports to the VLANs 4 Decide on trunking strategy how will the VLAN information be propagated from one switch to another and also what VLAN information will be propagated across
290. ld Start Link Up Link Down Authentication Failure Rising Alarm Falling Alarm RFC 1901 1908 SNMPv2 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH RFC 1901 Introduction to Community Based SNMPv2 SNMPv2 Working Group RFC 1902 Structure of Management Information for Version 2 of the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMPv2 SNMPv2 Working Group RFC 1905 Textual Conventions for Version 2 of the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMPv2 SNMPv2 Working Group RFC 1904 Conformance Statements for Version 2 of the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMPv2 SNMPv2 Working Group RFC 1905 Protocol Operations for Version 2 of the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMPv2 SNMPv2 Working Group RFC 1906 Transport Mappings for Version 2 of the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMPv2 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 16 5 SNMP CHAPTER 16 SNMP e RFC 1907 Management Information Base for Version 2 of the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMPv2 SNMPv2 Working Group e RFC 1908 Coexistence between Version 1 and Version 2 of the Internet standard Network Management Framework SNMPv2 Working Group RFC 2271 2275 SNMPv3 e RFC 2104 Keyed Hashing for Message Authentication e RFC 2271 An Architecture for Describing SNMP Management Frameworks e RFC 2272 Message Processing and Dispatching for the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP e RFC 2273 SNMPv3 Applications e RFC 2274 User Based Security Model USM for version 3 of t
291. le changes the boot mode of the switch ML1200 set bootmode type bootp bootimg enable bootcfg disable Network application image download is enabled Network application config download is disabled Save Configuration and Restart System ML1200 Alternatively the DHCP bootp manual can be enabled through the EnerVista Secure Web Management software as shown below Graphical Display E Administration O File Mgmt Ping E Set Telnet User Mgmt Reboot Configuration gt Select the Administration gt System menu item gt Click Edit System Configuration Information tw OOO Boot Mode IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Mac Address Uptime Name Order Code Serial Number Contact Location Manual DHCP Bootp auto 3 94 244 1 00 20 06 2b de f4 1 Days 01 25 02 ML1200 multilin tech ge com Markham Ontario Cancel OK gt Alternatively select items in the Administration gt Set menu to individually modify the boot mode date and time log size etc MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 IP ADDRESSING IP ADDRESSING Graphical Display Logout eo o E Administration File Mgmt Ping System E O Set omua Date and Time FTP Mode Log Size Password SNMP Type STP Type Timeout VLAN Type Telnet User Mgmt Reboot E Configuration Boot Mode Manual
292. le data delivery to users from datagram paths that go all across a network As a LAN device the Multilink ML1200 can do its part to prevent any QOS degradation while it is handling Ethernet traffic through its ports and buffers The Multilink ML1200 switching hardware supports the IEEE 802 1p standard and fulfills its role in support of QOS giving packet processing priority to priority tagged packets according to the 802 1p standard In addition to hardware support for QOS the MNS software R2 supports two priority queues that can be shared across the eight levels of defined packet priorities for application specific priority control by the user through software configuration settings 2 5 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2 18 Frame Buffering and Flow Control Multilink ML1200 s are store and forward switches Each frame or packet is loaded into the Switch s memory and inspected before forwarding can occur This technique ensures that all forwarded frames are of a valid length and have the correct CRC i e are good packets This eliminates the propagation of bad packets enabling all of the available bandwidth to be used for valid information While other switching technologies such as cut through or express impose minimal frame latency they will also permit bad frames to propagate out to the Ethernet segments connected The cut through technique permits c
293. liar with the CLI commands as all the commands saved in the script file are described in the CLI User Guide A sample of the script file is shown below THHHEHBHHHHHBHHHHHHHHHHHHHBHHHHHBHBHHHHHHHBHHHHHHHHBHHHHHBHHHHHBHHHHHUE Copyright c 2001 2005 GE Multilin Inc All rights reserved RESTRICTED RIGHTS Use duplication or disclosure is subject to U S Government restrictions as set forth in Sub division b 3 ii of the rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at 52 227 7013 This file is provided as a sample template to create a backup of GE MultiLink switches configurations As such this script provides insights into the configuration of GE MultiLink switch s settings 4 GE Multilin Inc recommends that modifications of this file and the commands should be verified by the User in a test environment prior to use in a live production network 3t All modifications are made at the User s own risk and are subject to the limitations of the GE MultiLink MNS End User License Agreement EULA Incorrect usage may result in 4 network shutdown GE Multilin Inc is not liable for incidental or consequential damages due to improper use THHHEHBHHHBHHHBHHHHHHHHHHHHHBHHHHHHBHBHHHHHHHBHHHHHHHBHHHHBHBHHHHBHHBHHH UE THHHHBHHBHHHBHHHHBHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHBHHHHHHBHHHHHHHHHBHHHHBHHHBHHBUE System Manager This area configures System related information
294. ll the traffic from a specific port is reflected on another port typically a monitoring port The MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch can be instructed to repeat the traffic from one port onto another port This process when traffic from one port is reflecting to another port is called port mirroring The monitoring port is also called a sniffing port Port monitoring becomes critical for trouble shooting as well as for intrusion detection MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 9 1 PORT MIRRORING AND SETUP CHAPTER 9 PORT MIRRORING AND SETUP 9 2 Port Mirroring using the Command Line Interface 9 2 1 Commands Monitoring a specific port can be done by port mirroring Mirroring traffic from one port to another port allows analysis of the traffic on that port The show port mirror command displays the status of port mirroring show port mirror The port mi rror command enters the port mirror configuration mode port mirror The setport monitor command configures a port mirror setport monitor lt monitor port number gt sniffer lt sniffer port number gt The prtmr command enables and disables port mirroring prtmr lt enable disable gt The sequence below illustrates how port 1 is mirrored on port 2 Any traffic on port 1 is also sent on port 2 ML1200 show port mirror Sniffer Port 0 Monitor Port 0 Mirroring State disabled ML1200 port mirror ML1200 port mirror setport monitor 1 sniffer 2 Port 1 set as
295. log window contains 22 log entry lines and can be positioned to any location in the log 17 7 2 Command Line Interface Example The following example illustrates a typical event log Example 17 2 Typical system event log ML1200 show log S DATE TIME Log Description 03 02 2005 5 14 43 P M SYSMGR System Subnet Mask changed 01 01 2001 12 00 00 A M SYSMGR successfully registered with DB Manager 01 01 2001 12 00 00 A M SYSMGR successfully read from DB A 01 01 2001 12 00 00 A M VLAN Vlan type set to Port VLAN 12 00 00 SYSMGR system was reset by user using CLI command 01 01 2001 12 00 00 A M SNTP Date Time set to 01 01 2001 12 00AM 01 01 2001 12 00 00 A M SNTP Client started 03 03 2005 4 32 48 A M SNTP Date and Time updated from SNTP server 03203 2005 731259 A M TELNET Telnet Session Started 03 03 2005 9 32 04 A M CLI manager console login A 03 03 2005 Orio cum IGMP IGMP Snooping is enabled A 03 03 2005 9 35 40 A M IGMP IGMP Snooping is disabled A 03 03 2005 9 41 46 A M IGMP IGMP Snooping is enabled 12008 MULTILINK 1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 17 31 MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS CHAPTER 17 MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS Event logs can be exported to a ftp or a tftp server on the network for further analysis The CLI command is used to facilitate the export of the event log exportlog mode serial tftp ftp ipaddress file lt name gt doctype raw html Where mode is the mode
296. losed ribbed surface aluminum case used asa sink designed for vertical mounting no fans Wee 3 Ibs 1 3 kg MANAGEMENT CONSOLE CONNECTOR Serial DB15 or RJ 45 see details at sec 3 7 DC POWER SUPPLY INTERNAL FLOATING GROUND DESIGN 12VDC Power Input nominal range 8 to 18VDC 24VDC Power Input nominal range 18 to 36VDC 48VDC Power Input nominal range 36 to 60VDC 125VDC Power Input nominal range 88 to 150VDC 250VDC Power Input nominal range 160 to 300VDC Std Terminal Block GND MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION POWER CONSUMPTION 35 watts worst case for a fully loaded fiber model 12 watts typical for a small 4 port copper only model DUAL DC POWER INPUT OPTIONAL A Dual Source option is available for the 12VDC 24VDC 48VDC and 125VDC models not the 250VDC model This provides for continuity of operation when either of the DC input sources is interrupted See Appendices B and C ML1200 MOUNTING A B A B Vertical mounting normal Suitable for wall or DIN Rail mounting ML1200 TYPE TESTS TEST REFERENCE STANDARD TEST LEVEL Electrostatic Discharge EN61000 4 2 Level 4 RF immunity EN61000 4 3 Level 3 Fast Transient Disturbance EN61000 4 4 Level 3 amp 4 Surge Immunity EN61000 4 5 Level 4 Conducted RF Immunity EN61000 4 6 Level 3 Power magnetic Immunity IEC61000 4 8 Level 2 0 40 709
297. low 5 All switches in the ring must use the same firmware revision The ring structure can demonstrate fast recovery times typically faster than what RSTP can recover from a single fault In many situations RSTP will recover in seconds whereas smart RSTP Ring Only mode will recover in milliseconds MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 13 19 RAPID SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL CHAPTER 13 RAPID SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL To configure ring only mode ensure the first three of the four situations described above are met To enable ring only mode first gt Enable RSTP by setting the STP Type to RSTP in the Administration gt Set STP Type menu Graphical Display Set STP Type Logout o eo o E Administration File Mgmt kill Config Ping System set Boot Mode Date and Time FTP Mode Log Size Password SNMP Type OSEE gt STP Type RSTP M VLAN Type Telnet User Mamt Reboot Configuration gt Select the Configuration gt RSTP gt Bridge RSTP menu as shown below Graphical Display RSTP Bridge Configuration Logout OOO Administration E Configuration i ted Root 80 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 Bridging Designated Roo 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 E O ICMP gt Root Path Cost o Pv6 E OLacP Root Port 0 O Logs Protocol Normal RSTP Port GoS Bridge ID 80 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 HE RADIUS o
298. lt value is auto P2P ports would typically be end stations or computers on the network Designated Root MAC Address of the Root Bridge in the tree e Status status of STP RSTP for the port The STP or RSTP values can be changed for each port as shown below Graphical Display RSTP Port Configuration Logout 9 o o E Administration E Configuration Access Bridging E IGMP IPv6 fH OLACP RSTP Configuration for Port 1 Logs E Port 605 E RADIUS Priority 128 Ej ORsTP Bridge RSTP Edge enable v Path Cost 2000000 RO Mode P2P auto M SMTP SNMP Migration disable SNTP Statistics VLAN Status enable hd Cancel OK Migration is enabled for all ports connected to other devices such as hubs bridges and switches known to support IEEE 802 1d STP services and cannot support RSTP services Status is normally enabled in certain cases the Status can be set to disabled to turn off RSTP or STP on that port 13 3 2 Smart RSTP Ring Only Mode with EnerVista Secure Web Management Software A ring is a special case mesh structure In many networks network managers prefer to create a ring structure for topological redundancy and simplicity In a ring structure All switches in the network are GE Multilin switches RSTP is enabled on all the switches The topology is a ring FW Ne All switches in the ring have been configured to use the ring only mode as shown be
299. ltilink ML1200 Switches For vertical panel mounting and wall mounting see Section 3 3 For vertical DIN Rail mounting see Section 3 3 1 For DC power input data see Appendix B For Dual Source see Appendix C The rugged metal case of the Multilink ML1200 will normally protect it from accidental damage in a lab or workplace setting Maintain an open view of the front to visually monitor the status LEDs Keep an open area around the unit so that cooling can occur from convection while the unit is in operation The ML1200 has no fans so it is silent when in operation Internal electronics use the case as a heat sink so the unit may normally be quite warm to the touch MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 INSTALLATION CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 3 2 Connecting Ethernet Media v NOTE a2 The Multilink ML1200 Switches are specifically designed to support all standard Ethernet media types within a single Switch unit This is accomplished by using a family of different Fiber Connectors which can be individually selected and configured per slot See Section 2 2 for a description of the PMs The various media types supported along with the corresponding IEEE 802 3 802 3D 802 3u 802 3AB and 802 3z standards and connector types are as follows IEEE Standard Media Type Max Distance Fiber Connector Fiber 100BASE FX mm Fiber 2 0km 6 562 ft SC sm Fiber 18 0km 95K ft SC 100BASE FX mm Fiber 2 0km 6 562 ft S
300. ly set re authentication parameter s bel authentication period on port 1 ML1200 authHHt show port reauth 1 Enabled 300 2 Enabled 3600 3 Enabled 3600 4 Enabled 3600 5 Enabled 3600 6 Enabled 3600 ML1200 authHHt show stats port 3 Port 3 Authentication Counters authEntersConnecting authEapLogoffsWhileConnecting authEntersAuthenticating authAuthSuccessesWhileAuthenticating authAuthTimeoutsWhileAuthenticating authAuthFailWhileAuthenticating authAuthReauthsWhileAuthenticating authAuthEapStartsWhileAuthenticating authAuthEapLogoffWhileAuthenticating authAuthReauthsWhileAuthenticated authAuthEapStartsWhileAuthenticated authAuthEapLogoffWhileAuthenticated backendResponses backendAccessChallenges backendOtherRequestsToSupplicant backendNonNakResponsesFromSupplicant backendAuthSuccesses backendAuthFails ML1200 lauthHHE trigger reauth port 3 Successfully triggered re authentication ML1200 auth O N RNO V U CO SOOO This command forces the every 5 minutes all other ports are force authenticated every hour as indicated by the show port reauth command below MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 7 ACCESS USING RADIUS 7 5 Configuring 802 1x with EnerVista Secure Web Management software 7 5 1 Commands ACCESS USING RADIUS To access the 802 1x configuration window select the Configuration Radius Server menu item First select the server
301. m and acted upon by any designated switch bridge leading to more rapid propagation of address information e STP recognizes one state blocking for ports that should not forward any data or information RSTP explicitly recognizes two states or blocking roles alternate and backup port including them in computations of when to learn and forward and when to block MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 13 1 RAPID SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL CHAPTER 13 RAPID SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL e STP relays configuration messages received on the root port going out of its designated ports If an STP switch bridge fails to receive a message from its neighbor it cannot be sure where along the path to the root a failure occurred RSTP switches bridges generate their own configuration messages even if they fail to receive one from the root bridge This leads to quicker failure detection e RSTP offers edge port recognition allowing ports at the edge of the network to forward frames immediately after activation while at the same time protecting them against loops Animprovement in RSTP allows configuration messages to age more quickly preventing them from going around in circles in the event of a loop RSTP has three states They are discarding learning and forwarding The discarding state is entered when the port is first taken into service The port does not learn addresses in this state and does not participate in frame tran
302. map Sheet 1 of 33 Address Description Range Step Format Default 0000 System name 12 registers String Varies 000C System contact 12 registers String multilin tech ge com 0018 System location 12 registers String Markham Ontario 0024 Software version 6 registers String Varies 002A IP address byte O 1to 254 1 F1 0 002B IP address byte 1 1to 254 1 F1 0 002C IP address byte 2 1to 254 1 F1 0 002D IP address byte 3 1to 254 1 F1 0 002E Netmask byte 0 1to 254 1 F1 0 002F Netmask byte 1 1to254 1 F1 0 0030 Netmask byte 2 1to 254 1 F1 0 0031 Netmask byte 3 1to 254 1 F1 0 0032 Gateway byte 0 1 to 254 1 F1 0 0033 Gateway byte 1 1to 254 1 F1 0 0034 Gateway byte 2 11 254 1 F1 0 0035 Gateway byte 3 11 254 1 F1 0 0036 MAC address 3 registers String Varies 0039 Order code 16 registers String Varies 0049 Power alarm 1 Otol 1 F2 0 004A Power alarm 2 01 1 1 2 0 0048 Stp State Otol 1 F3 0 004C Number of ports 1 to 32 1 F1 Varies 004E Port present map Bitmap Varies 0050 Port link map Bitmap 0 0052 Port stp state map Bitmap 0 0054 Port activity map Bitmap 0 0056 Port 1 type 0to6 1 F4 Varies 0057 Port 2 type Oto6 1 F4 Varies 0058 Port 3 type Oto6 1 F4 Varies 0059 Port 4 type Oto6 1 F4 Varies 005A Port 5 type Oto6 1 F4 Varies 005B Port 6 type Oto6 1 F4 Varies 005C Por
303. mber of bytes sent Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 0332 Port 13 Number of frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0334 Port 13 Number of frames sent 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0336 Port 13 Total bytes received Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 0338 Port 13 Total frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 033A Port 13 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 033C Port 13 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 033E Port 13 Number of frames with CRC 0 to 1 F9 0 error 4294967295 0340 Port 13 Number of oversized frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 0342 Port 13 Number of bad fragments 01 1 F9 0 received 64 bytes 4294967295 0344 Port 13 Number of jabber frames 01 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 0346 Port 13 Number of collisions occurred 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0348 Port 13 Number of late collisions 0 to 1 F9 0 occurred 4294967295 034A Port 13 Number of 64 byte frames Oto 1 F9 0 received sent 4294967295 034C Port 13 Number of 65 to 127 byte 0 to 1 F9 0 rames received sent 4294967295 034E Port 13 Number of 128 to 255 byte 0 to 1 F9 0 rames received sent 4294967295 0350 Port 13 Number of 256 to 511 byte Oto 1 F9 0 rames received sent 4294967295 0352 Port 13 Number of 512 to 1023 byte Oto 1 F9 0 rames received sent 4294967295 0354 Port 13 Number of 1023 to maximum Oto 1 F9 0 byte frames received sent 4294967295 0356 Port 13 Number of MAC error packets Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 18 18 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH
304. me engineering Status Pending Note that the VLANs are not started as yet Adding the VLAN does not start it by default UNTAGGED UNTAGGED VLAN ID 20 Name sales Status Pending UNTAGGED UNTAGGED UNTAGGED VLAN ID 30 Name marketing Status Pending UNTAGGED UNTAGGED UNTAGGED 1 1200 tag vlan start vlan all M All pending VLAN s started M 11200 tag vlan Set port port 3 5 filter status enable Ingress Filter Enabled ML1200 tag vlan Show vlan type tag VLAN ID 1 Name Default VLAN Status Active continued on next page 10 16 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 10 VLAN VLAN Converting Port VLAN to Tag VLAN continued UNTAGGED UNTAGGED UNTAGGED UNTAGGED VLAN ID 10 Name engineering Status Active UNTAGGED UNTAGGED Enable filtering on the ports required The UNTAGGED software will prompt to ensure that VLAN ID 20 connectivity is not disrupted Name sales Status Active UNTAGGED UNTAGGED UNTAGGED VLAN ID 30 Name marketing Status Active UNTAGGED UNTAGGED VLANs are now active However as the UNTAGGED packet traverses VLANS the packet should be tagged This is enabled next Status tagged ort tagging enabled 1 1200 tag vlan Set port port 3 5 tagging id 20 status tagged ort tagging enabled ort tagging enabled L1200 tag vlan Show vlan type tag M P M P ML
305. mpatibility mode forceversion stp rstp The show forceversion command displays the current forced version show forceversion MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 138 7 RAPID SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL CHAPTER 13 RAPID SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL The show timers command displays the values of the timers set for RSTP show timers The priority command specifies the switch bridge priority value This value is used along with the switch MAC address to determine which switch in the network is the root device Lower values mean higher priority The value ranges from 0 to 65535 with a default of 32768 When port are specified the priority is associated with ports and their value is O to 255 priority port lt numberllist range gt value lt 0 255 0 65535 gt A path cost is assigned to individual ports for the switch to determine which ports are the forwarding points A higher cost means the link is more expensive to use and falls in the passive mode compared to the link with a lower cost The value of the cost command ranges from 0 to 65535 with a default of 32768 cost port lt number list range gt value lt 0 65535 gt The port command assigns ports for RSTP Note that specific ports may not need to participate in RSTP process These ports typically would be end stations If unsure it is best to let the software make the decisions port port lt number list range gt status lt enable disable gt The statu
306. n as well as the same face plate lettering The difference is that the C9 Module is equipped with SC type snap in fiber port connector instead of an ST type MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 7 OPERATION 4 8 CHAPTER 4 OPERATION 4 2 2 4 CB Module 2 Ports 100Mbps single mode FX SC type Sgl M The CB Module is also a Fiber module equipped with 2 Single mode Long Reach SC type connectors It provides a long reach Fiber function in one module to the ML1200 Switches supporting 100Mb single mode Long Reach fiber network segments 268100 Mb SSC Fiber Port CG Link 2 Activity G F H The CB Module when installed in a Multilink ML1200 Switch supports single mode fiber cable lengths of as much as 40 Km see Power Budget Section 4 5 Each port has an Activity ACT LED indicating packets being received a Link LK LED indicating proper connectivity with the remote device when lit and a FDX HDX LED indicating full duplex mode when lit or half duplex when off 4 2 2 5 C6 Module COMBO 268 10 100Mbps RJ 45 Ports and 19 100Mbps Multi mode FX SC type snap in connector The C6 Module is also a Combo module equipped with 2 dual speed copper ports and 1 Multi mode SC type connector It provides an advantage through combining copper and Fiber functions in one module that supports two copper and one multi mode fiber network segments 2 Port 10 100 Mbps amp 1 Port Multimode Fiber CT
307. n configured end device NIC or switch with GVRP on 754721A1 CDR FIGURE 11 1 GVRP operation Switch 1 with static VLANs VID 1 2 and 3 Port 2 is a member of VIDs 1 2 and 3 1 Port 2 advertises VIDs 1 2 and 3 2 On Switch 2 Port 1 receives advertisement of VIDs 1 2 and 3 AND becomes a member of VIDs 1 2 and 3 3 As discussed above a GVRP enabled port can forward advertisement for a VLAN it learnt about So port 3 advertises VIDs 1 2 and 3 but port 3 is NOT a member of VIDs 1 2 and 3 at this point nor will it join the VLAN until and advertisement is received 4 On Switch 3 port 4 receives advertisement of VIDs 1 2 and 3 and becomes a member of VIDs 1 2 and 3 5 Port 5 advertises VIDs 1 2 and 3 but port 5 is NOT a member of VIDs 1 2 and 3 at this point 6 Port 6 on the end device is statically configured to be a member of VID 3 Port 6 advertises VID 3 7 Port5 receives advertisement 8 Port 4 advertises VID 3 9 Port 3 receives advertisement of VID 3 AND becomes a member of VID 3 Still not amember of VIDs 1 and 2 as it did not receive any advertisements for VID 1or 2 10 Port 1 advertises VID 3 of VID 3 AND becomes a member of VID 3 Port 1 is still not a member of VIDs 1 and 2 11 2 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 11 VLAN REGISTRATION OVER GARP VLAN REGISTRATION OVER GARP 11 Port 2 receives advertisement of VID 3
308. n has been established at both ends and when power is ON in the unit If LINK is not lit after cable connection the normal cause is improper cable polarity Swap the fiber cables at the PM connector to remedy this situation MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION wv NOTE NOTE INSTALLATION 3 2 0 2 Connecting Fiber Optic SC type Snap In The following procedure applies to installations using a PM with SC type fiber connectors i e using C9 Module CA Module single mode When connecting fiber media to SC connectors simply snap on the two square male connectors into the SC female jacks of the PM until it clicks and secures 3 9 0 Connecting Single Mode Fiber Optic When using single mode fiber cable be sure to use single mode fiber port connectors Single mode fiber cable has a smaller diameter than multi mode fiber cable 9 125 microns for single mode 50 125 or 62 5 125 microns for multi mode where xx xx are the diameters of the core and the core plus the cladding respectively Single mode fiber allows full bandwidth at longer distances and may be used to connect 10 Mb nodes up to 10 Km apart or 18Km with the ML1200 The same procedures as for multi mode fiber applies to single mode fiber connectors 3 2 0 4 Connecting Twisted Pair CAT3 CAT5 Unshielded or Shielded The RJ 45 ports of the Multilink ML1200 can be connected to the following two media types 100BASE TX an
309. nder requests special handling such as non default quality of service or real time service e Authentication and Privacy Capabilities IPv6 includes the definition of extensions which provide support for authentication data integrity and confidentiality This is included as a basic element of IPv6 and will be included in all implementations IPv6 Addressing IPv6 addresses are 128 bits long and are identifiers for individual interfaces and sets of interfaces IPv6 addresses of all types are assigned to interfaces not nodes Since each interface belongs to a single node any of that node s interface s unicast addresses may be used as an identifier for the node A single interface may be assigned multiple IPv6 addresses of any type There are three types of IPv6 addresses These are unicast anycast and multicast Unicast addresses identify a single interface Anycast addresses identify a set of interfaces such that a packet sent to an anycast address will be delivered to one member of the set Multicast addresses identify a group of interfaces such that a packet sent to a multicast address is delivered to all the interfaces in the group There are no broadcast addresses in IPv6 This function has been replaced by multicast addresses IPv6 supports addresses which are four times the number of bits as IPv4 addresses 128 vs 32 This is 4 Billion x 4 Billion x 4 Billion 296 times the size of the IPv4 address space 232 This works out to
310. nets one subnet per ML1200 Switch port in a LAN traffic center The subnet connections may be via fiber or twisted pair cabling 100Mbps or 10 Mbps speed and full or half duplex The mixed media modular capability is ideal for industrial applications where existing Ethernet LAN network cabling must be accommodated The fiber built in media capability is ideal for integrating future proof fiber cabling into the LAN structure Example 1 Multilink ML1200 Switch for a Industrial Application Equipped with lots of useful features including hardened enclosures a wide spread of DC power supply options and extended temperature ratings qualifies the Multilink ML1200 Managed switch for any Industrial factory floor traffic control transportation system or power utility application The several operated features qualifies this managed switch to operate and perform securely and reliably in all critical applications The addition of Ring Only Mode and the Link Loss Learn software features allow this Managed switch to provide a very secure highly available redundant network capability in any ring topology network The Managed ML1200 s modularity along with the management software features remarkably handle industrial environments i e where the factory floors are networked with Ethernet based mixed media LANs equipped with PLCs computers for taking readings and data from Machines Client Server databases etc and sending these important data to the cen
311. nfigured at the factory MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2 1 1 Four port SFF fiber modules CC Module CD Module 100Mb fiber 5 ra LK ES Six Bix 1 2 4 act ect ra Ic ec T n In a four port SFF Small Form Factor fiber port module all of the fiber ports are of the same speed 100Mb mode and connector type Small Form Factor SFF Fiber Ports come in multi mode forms MT RJ or LC type connectors and single mode form LC type connectors The 100Mb fiber four port modules for the Multilink ML1200 s normally are set factory default to operate in full duplex mode for best fiber distance and performance The user may select full or half duplex mode per port through set port command The set up of the software gives the user flexibility to adapt to any FDX or HDX type of Fast Ethernet devices There are three LED s per fiber port The Link LK LED indicates ready for operation on that port when lit The F H LED indicates operation in full duplex mode when ON half duplex when OFF The blinking ACT LED indicates receiving Activity on the port A fiber cable must be connected into a SFF port and the Link LK indicator for that port must be ON indicating there is a powered up device at the other end of the cable in order for a LK LED to provide valid indications of operating conditions on that port MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH
312. ng and Forwarding Each time a packet arrives on one of the switched ports the decision is taken to either filter or to forward the packet Packets whose source and destination addresses are on the same port segment will be filtered constraining them to that one port and relieving the rest of the network from having to process them A packet whose destination address is on another port segment will be forwarded to the appropriate port and will not be sent to the other ports where it is not needed Traffic needed for maintaining the un interrupted operation of the network such as occasional multi cast packets is forwarded to all ports The Multilink ML1200 Switches operate in the store and forward switching mode which eliminates bad packets and enables peak performance to be achieved when there is heavy traffic on the network MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 1 OPERATION CHAPTER 4 OPERATION 4 1 1 2 Address Learning All Multilink ML1200 units have address table capacities of 4K node addresses suitable for use in larger networks They are self learning so as nodes are added removed or moved from one segment to another the ML1200 Switch automatically keeps up with node locations An address aging algorithm causes least used addresses to fall out in favor for frequently used addresses To reset the address buffer cycle power down and up 4 1 2 Status LEDs For Multilink ML1200 models ML1200 PWR
313. nge count Time Since topology Chg ML1200 rstp show active stp Current Active Mode RSTP RSTP is Disabled NO i Ain GS Normal RSTP 80 00 00720 06 20 e1 55 32768 15 02 20 0 0 0 01510012 0151065 25 1 155155 32768 15 02 20 0 935 RAPID SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL Check the status of STP or RSTP These commands show if STP or RSTP is enabled ML1200 rstp rstp enable Successfully set the RSTP status ML1200 rstp show active stp Current Active Mode RSTP RSTP is Enabled ML1200 rstp Show stp config RSTP CONFIGURATION MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 13 9 RAPID SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL CHAPTER 13 RAPID SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL Configuring RSTP continued RSTP Port Configuration Priority Path Cost State TP 10 100 2000000 Forwarding 80 00 00 20 06 2b e1 55 TP 10 100 200000 Forwarding 80 00 00 20 06 2b e1 55 00 100MB Fiber 200000 Disabled 00 03 100MB Fiber 200000 Disabled 00 04 100MB Fiber 200000 Disabled 00 05 The forceversion capability can be used for compatibility with STP TP 10 100 2000000 Disab devices In this example the switch is forced to STP mode 100MB Fiber 200000 Disabled ML1200 rstp forceversion rstp Error Force Version already set to Normal RSTP 11200 rstp forceversion stp 1 1200 rstp Show forceversion Force Version Force to STP only Using forceversion the
314. nity Name private E OLACP 0 Logs gt Trap Community Name public Port Gos Edit H O RADIUS 0 RSTP SMTP om IP Address 3 94 247 25 O SNTP Statistics Cancel OK F O VLAN SNMP Trap Stations Add gt When adding SNMP trap receivers click on the Add button on the SNMP menu screen gt Make sure that each station can be pinged from the switch by using the Administration gt Ping menu Determine which sorts of traps each station will receive as shown above If not sure select all three types gt When done adding trap receivers click OK Graphical Display SNMP Configuration Logout Hi o o F Administration Configuration Access SNMP Community Names E Bridging gt Get Ci ity N public F IGMP community Name 0 Pv6 Set Community Name private E O LACP Logs gt Trap Community Name public Port Os Edit E ORADUS SNMP Manager Stations Egi e ERI SMTP 1 3 84 247 25 DJ of Statistics H 9 VLAN zu IP Address 3 94 247 88 v Enterprise v SNMP RMON Cancel OK MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 16 13 SNMP CHAPTER 16 SNMP Note the different types of trap receivers added Stations can be deleted using the delete icon 74 To change the stations characteristics or IP addresses it is recommended to delete the station and add a new one After all
315. nother and also what VLAN information will be propagated across 5 Layer 3 consideration check to see if the routing between the VLANs is working by pinging stations on different VLANs You can rename the default VLAN but you cannot change its VID 1 or delete it from the WwW switch Any ports not specifically assigned to another VLAN will remain assigned to the DEFAULT ww VLAN i Changing the number of VLANs supported on the switch requires the SAVE command to 4 save the new VLAN information 10 2 2 Commands The following commands are used for VLANs To define the VLAN type set vlan type port tag none To configure a VLAN configure vlan type port vlan type port To add VLANs add id vlan Id name vlan name gt port lt number list range gt To start VLANs MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 18 5 VLAN CHAPTER 10 VLAN start vian lt name number list range gt To save VLAN configuration save To edit VLANs edit id vlan Id name vlan name gt port lt number list range gt To display the VLAN information show vian type lt port tag gt lt id vlanid gt The following command sequence shows how to configure VLANs on a MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch ML1200 vlan type port ML1200 port vlanJ add id 2 name test port 1 7 ML1200 port vlanJ start vlan al ML1200 port vlanJ save Saving current configuration Configuration saved To move Management Contro
316. ns The re loading of the configuration is not usually necessary however in certain situations it maybe needed and it is advised to save configurations before a software update The loadconf command requires a reboot for the new configuration to be active Without a reboot the older configuration is used by the MultiLink family of switches The saveconf and loadconf commands are often used to update software to the ML1200 These commands will be deprecated in the version 2 x and above and replaced with the ftp t ftp or xmodem commands It is advised to begin using these commands instead of saveconf and loadconf Multilink software can now use the ftp or tftp or modem if using the CLI to upload and download information to a server running the proper services One useful capability provided in Multilink software is export of the CLI commands used to configure the switch To do this use Config Upload Download MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 IP ADDRESSING MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL IP ADDRESSING Using Config Download examination of the contents of the saved file would appear as shown below ML1200 conf 1 0 Copyright c 2001 2005 GE Multilin Inc All rights reserved RESTRICTED RIGHTS Use duplication or disclos
317. nsceiver port supports 1000Mb only It is recommended to use a straight through RJ 45 4 twisted pair connection while connecting to any Server workstation While connecting with any Switch repeater or other device it is recommended to use Crossover RJ 45 4 twisted pair category 5 or higher cabling The maximum length supported on copper 1000BASE T is 100mts 328 ft The various SFPs transceivers supported by the GE Multilin ML1200 s C slot are MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION INSTALLATION Module Models Gigabit Gb Modules fixed ports SFP H1 H6 Module 2 SFP H7 Module 2 CU H8 HD Module 1SFP 1CU HE HJ Module 1 SFP HK Module 1CU 3 2 0 7 Connecting Fiber Optic Cable to SFP Transceivers 1 Before connecting the fiber optic cable remove the protective dust caps from the tips of the connectors on the PM Save these dust caps for future use Wipe clean the ends of the dual connectors with a soft cloth or lint free lens tissue dampened in alcohol Make certain the connectors are clean before connecting One strand of the duplex fiber optic cable is coded using color bands at regular intervals y you must use the color coded strand on the associated ports at each end of the fiber optic NOTE 3 segment Find the Transmit TX and Receive RX markings on the SFP transceiver to verify the top side of it Some o
318. o 127 byte 0to 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 0704 Port 32 Number of 128 to 255 byte Oto 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 0706 Port 32 Number of 256 to 511 byte 0to 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 0708 Port 32 Number of 512 to 1023 byte 0to 1 F9 0 rames received sent 4294967295 070A Port 32 Number of 1023 to maximum 0 to 1 F9 0 byte frames received sent 4294967295 070C Port 32 Number of MAC error packets Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 070E Port 32 Number of dropped received Oto 1 F9 0 packets 4294967295 ED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 18 35 MODBUS PROTOCOL CHAPTER 18 MODBUS PROTOCOL Table 18 1 Modbus memory map Sheet 33 of 33 Address Description Range Step Format Default 0710 Port 32 Number of multicast frames Oto 1 F9 0 sent 4294967295 0712 Port 32 Number of broadcast frames Oto 1 F9 0 sent 4294967295 0714 Port 32 Number of 64 byte fragments Oto 1 F9 0 with good CRC 4294967295 0716 Serial Number String Varies 18 36 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 18 MODBUS PROTOCOL MODBUS PROTOCOL 18 2 2 Format Codes Bitmap 32 bit group of bits packed into two registers Encoded in big endian e F1 16 bit unsigned integer e F2 Enumeration power alarm 0 power supply good 1 power supply fail e F3 Enumeration OFF ON 0 Off 1 On F4 Enumeration port type 0 Giga GBIC 1 Copper TP 2 Fiber 10
319. o configure QoS Example 14 1 Configuring QoS ML1200 show port Keys E Enable D Disable H Half Duplex E Full Duplex M Multiple VLAN s NA Not Applicable LI Listening LE Learning F Forwarding B Blocking Port Name Control Dplx Media i Trunk Speed Part Auto VlanID GVRP STP All traffic on port 1 is sent to the high priority queue L1200 qos 1 1200 qos setqos type port port 1 priority high Successfully set QOS ML1200 qos show qos All traffic on port 2 is sent to the high priority queue and the QoS tag is set to 6 PRIORITY STATUS 14 6 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 14 QUALITY OF SERVICE QUALITY OF SERVICE Configuring QoS continued ML1200 qos show qos ML1200 qos Setqos port 3 priority high type tag tag 5 Successfully set QOS The queue behavior is set so that 8 high priority packets and 1 low priority packet is sent out ML1200 qos tHtshow qos type tag MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 14 7 QUALITY OF SERVICE CHAPTER 14 QUALITY OF SERVICE Configuring QoS continued Port priority Weight set to 1 High 1 Low ML1200 qos Set weight weight 4 ML1200 qos Show portweight Port priority Weight set to 8 High 1 Low ML1200 qos tttshow gos ML1200 qos 14 8 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 14 QUALITY OF SERVICE QUALITY OF
320. ode changed to manus Ss w 01 01 2001 12 Notice SYSMGR System IP Address changed to 3 94 2 w 01 01 2001 12 Notice SYSMGR System IP Address changed to 3 94 2 w 01 01 2001 12 C Notice SYSMGR System Subnet Mask changed to 255 w 01 01 2001 12 Notice SYSMGR System Default Gateway changed to 3 w 01 01 2001 12 Notice SYSMGR System IP Address changed to 3 94 2 Clear Note the different types of logs Specific logs may be viewed by using the drop down menu in the top right corner As discussed in the previous section any port can be set to monitor security as well as make a log on the intrusions that take place The logs for the intrusions are stored on the switch When the switch detects an intrusion on a port it sets an alert flag for that port and makes the intrusion information available The default log size is 50 rows To change the log size select the Configuration Statistics Log Statistics menu item When the switch detects an intrusion attempt on a port it records the date and time stamp the MAC address the port on which the access was attempted and the action taken by the MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch The event log lists the most recently detected security violation attempts This provides a chronological entry of all intrusions attempted on a specific port The event log records events as single line entries listed in chronological order and serves as a tool for isolating problems Each event lo
321. of transfer ipaddress is the IP address of the ftp or TFTP server fileis the filename and doctype indicates the log is saved as a text file raw or as an HTML file Please ensure the proper extension is used for the file argument for example html for an HTML file ML1200 exportlog mode tftp 192 168 5 2 file eventlog doctype htm l Do you wish to export the event logs Y or N Y Successfully uploaded the event log file ML1200 exportlog mode tftp 192 168 5 2 file eventlog txt doctype raw Do you wish to export the event logs Y or N Y Successfully uploaded the event log file 17 7 3 EnerVista Example 17 12 The EnerVista Secure Web Management software provides and overview of the type of Logs by reviewing the statistics Each specific log can be viewed by viewing the logs menu To view the log statistics Select the Configuration gt Statistics gt Log Statistics menu item Graphical Display Log Statistics xd 20909 Administration E Configuration Access Bridging E O IGMP O IPv6 E OLACP Log Size i00 Logs Port 9905 E O RADIUS E O RSTP 0 SMTP SNMP SNTP E Statistics OBB rie Port Statistics VLAN Total Number of Events 101 Edit Fatal 0 Alert 0 Critical O Error O Warning O Notice 104 Informational Q Debug 0 The Log Statistics window displays the logged events received most logs are typically informational and acti
322. ogy Change Time Since TC MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL tot OQ 60 00 00 20 06 2b e1 55 0 Normal RSTP 80 00 00 20 06 2b e1 55 32768 Enabled 5 20 30 3 0 5321 Edt 13 17 RAPID SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL The port specific values for RSTP or STP are shown below CHAPTER 13 RAPID SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL Graphical Display RSTP Port Configuration Logout Qo o E Administration E Configuration E O Access E Bridging Pr PortTyr PortSte Path Priority Edge P2P Designated Root 8 1 TPO Disable 2000 128 enable auto 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 er Ove 2 TP 101 Forward 2500 100 enable auto 80 00 00 20 06 2b e1 5 er E O LACP 3 100MBF Disable 2000 128 enable auto 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 er Logs 4 100MBF Disable 2000 128 enable auto 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 er Port 5 100MBF Disable 2000 128 enable auto 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 er 27 aos 6 100MBF Disable 2000 128 enable auto 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 er Ej O RADIUS 7T TP 10M Disable 2000 128 enable auto 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 er E ORsTP Bridge RSTP RO Mode SMTP SNMP SNTP Statistics E VLAN gt Click on the edit icon P to edit the values for a specific port The columns in the above window are defined as follows 13 18 Port Indicates the port number Value ranges from 1 to the maximum number of ports in the switch Port Type Indicates the type of port
323. ollision fragment frames which are a result of late collisions to be forwarded which add to the network traffic Since there is no way to filter frames with a bad CRC the entire frame must be present in order for CRC to be calculated the result of indiscriminate cut through forwarding is greater traffic congestion especially at peak activity Since collisions and bad packets are more likely when traffic is heavy the result of store and forward operation is that more bandwidth is available for good packets when the traffic load is greatest When the Multilink ML1200 Switch detects that its free buffer queue space is low the Switch sends industry standard full duplex only PAUSE packets out to the devices sending it packets to cause flow control This tells the sending devices to temporarily stop sending traffic which allows the traffic to catch up without dropping packets Then normal packet buffering and processing resumes This flow control sequence occurs in a small fraction of a second and is transparent to an observer Another feature implemented in the Multilink ML1200 Switches is a collision based flow control mechanism when operating at half duplex only When the Switch detects that its free buffer queue space is low the Switch prevents more frames from entering by forcing a collision signal on all receiving half duplex ports in order to stop incoming traffic 2 1 9 Managed Network Firmware for Multilink ML1200 Series v
324. on sets the action type of secured port e allow allows MAC addressing per port help port security e learn enables disables security for a single port or group of ports e ps enables disables security in system e remove removes MAC addressing per port e signal sets the signal type of the secured port The quality of service QoS commands are shown below Refer to Chapter 14 QoS Overview for additional details help qos e setqos configures QOS configuration usage set untag e set weight sets the port priority weights for all the ports in all the device e show portweight displays the current port weight priority The remote monitoring RMON commands are shown below Refer to Chapter 16 Configuring RMON for additional details e alarm sets the owner for the alarm group e event sets the owner for the event group help rmon e history sets the owner for the history group e statistics sets the owner for the statistics group The Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP commands are shown below Refer to Chapter 13 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol for additional details e cost sets the path cost of ports e forceversion set the force version of STP help rstp e 111 e port sets the RSTP administration status of ports e priority changes the priority of ports or bridge e rstp changes the RSTP administrative status of the bridge e show forceversion shows the current force version of RSTP e show mode shows the
325. on and an SNMP v1 v2c engine Data integrity A condition or state of data in which a message packet has not been altered or destroyed in an unauthorized manner Data origin authentication The ability to verify the identity of a user on whose behalf the message is supposedly sent This ability protects users against both message capture and replay by a different SNMP engine and against packets received or sent to a particular user that use an incorrect password or security level Encryption A method of hiding data from an unauthorized user by scrambling the contents of an SNMP packet Group A set of users belonging to a particular security model A group defines the access rights for all the users belonging to it Access rights define what SNMP objects can be read written to or created In addition the group defines what notifications a user is allowed to receive Notification host An SNMP entity to which notifications traps and informs are to be sent Notify view A view name not to exceed 64 characters for each group that defines the list of notifications that can be sent to each user in the group Privacy An encrypted state of the contents of an SNMP packet where they are prevented from being disclosed on a network Encryption is performed with an algorithm called CBC DES DES 56 Read view A view name not to exceed 64 characters for each group that defines the list of object identifiers OIDs that are accessible for r
326. onfiguration from the server to the switch This option is used to save a backup of the ML1200 configuration or restore the configuration in case of a disaster Script Download or Script Upload Save the necessary CLI commands used for configuration of the switch or upload the necessary CLI commands needed to configure the switch This option is used to ease the repetitive task of configuring multiple commands or reviewing all the commands needed to configure the ML1200 Host Download or Host Upload Save the host information The hosts are created by the Configuration Access Host commands Log Upload Save the log file on the ftp tftp server changes gt Click on the save Ss icon The software will ask again if the changes need to be saved or ignored MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 IP ADDRESSING IP ADDRESSING gt If the changes need to be ignored click on Cancel and reboot the switch gt Ifthe changes need to be saved click on OK The following figures illustrate saving changes made after adding an SNTP server This is done by clicking on the Save icon to save current configuration Graphical Display 4 SNTP Configuration Logout n eo o E Administration E File Mgmt Save Configuratior OFTP Ping SNTP Status Disabled System E O Set Max SNTP Servers 10 Telnet User Mgmt Reboot Configuration Ej Access
327. onological order and serves as a tool for isolating problems Each event log entry is composed of four fields Severity the level of severity see below e Date date the event occurred on See Date and Time on page 5 9 for information on setting the date and time on the switch e Time time the event occurred on See Date and Time on page 5 9 for information on setting the date and time on the switch Log Description description of event as detected by the switch Severity has one of the following values and depending on the severity type is assigned a severity level I information severity level 1 indicates routine events e A activity severity level 2 indicates the activity on the switch e D debug severity level 3 is reserved for GE Multilin internal diagnostic information e c critical severity level 4 indicates that a severe switch error has occurred e F fatal severity level 5 indicates that a service has behaved unexpectedly 6 2 4 Authorized Managers Just as port security allows and disallows specific MAC addresses from accessing a network the ML1200 software can allow or block specific IP addresses or a range of IP addresses to access the switch The access command allows access to configuration mode access The al low ip command allows specified services for specified IP addresses IP addresses can be individual stations a group of stations or subnets The range is determined by the IP address and ne
328. options for the modular slot come in a few different configurations of Fiber SFP s RJ 45 s The Multilink ML1200 offers only SFPs Small Form Pluggable for Gigabit speed There are multiple choices of SFP Gigabit transceiver types to combine with RJ 45 s for the modular slot Up to two Gigabit ports max can be configured in the modular slot C only An example of a two Gb module is the HI Module SFP fiber An example of a single Gigabit module is the HK Module 10 100 1000Mb RJ 45 ports A combo option of Gigabit copper and SFP fiber HA Module is shown below in the figure below pes i JA M m nd F H 1000 100 LK J EJ a 1 10 100 1000Mb RJ 45 1 1000Mb SFP The ML1200 Modules provide an SFP opening for insertion of industry standard SFP transceivers to provide Gigabit Gb media flexibility Gigabit SFP modules are available in both multi mode 550m and single mode 10 25 40 70 km fiber options as well as a Gigabit copper option There are three LEDs mounted on each Gigabit port module The Gigabit fiber has LEDs that indicate F H Full Half duplex LK Link status and ACT receiving activity on that port when lit The copper Gigabit ports come with speeds indicating 10 100 1000Mb LEDs also The operation of the Gigabit SFP and 10 100 1000 RJ 45 ports is as described for those port types above 2 1 7 Packet Prioritization 802 1p QOS Quality of Service means providing consistent predictab
329. orts can also be configured in the mix of port types e Ring Only Mode for reliable high availability using ring topology Ring Only Mode feature provides reliable fast recovery of a fault in a ring topology e Relay Contacts for monitoring internal power and user defined software events Two Alarm Relay contacts monitor basic operations One is for hardware and will signal loss of power internally The other is software controllable and will signal user defined software events such as a security violation or an RSTP Topology Change condition e Vertical mounting for efficient convection cooling no fans extended temp Mounting brackets for vertical mounting are included DIN Rail mounting hardware is optional Ethernet signal and power cables attach at the bottom Two sets of status LEDs are included one set viewable at the port connector and one set viewable from the front e Standard AC power input 48VDC or 24VDC or 125VDC input is optional Standard AC power input comes with an IEC plug and is auto ranging for worldwide use For special applications models with 48VDC or 24VDC or 125VDC are available Dual Source DC input can also be selected and configured on the DC power input models e Heavy duty design for Industrial Ethernet and extended temperature operation Fiber ports take more power than copper ports but the Multilink ML1200 design provides for this with heavy duty components The ambient temperature dual rating i
330. ot receive power and will not work when both inputs are simultaneously absent or are both incorrectly connected MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 8 INTERNAL DC DUAL SOURCE POWER INPUT OPTION CHAPTER C INTERNAL DC DUAL SOURCE POWER INPUT OPTION 5 Installation C 6 iy NOTE This section describes the proper connection of the 48VDC 12VDC 24VDC 125VDC and 250VDC dual source leads to the power terminal block on the Multilink ML1200 Switch shown in Figure to the above The terminal block is located on the left front of the unit next to the Alarm terminal block and is equipped with four 4 screw down lead posts The primary terminals are identified as positive A negative A and the secondary power terminals as negative B positive B The chassis is earth ground GND The Dual Source terminal block for the 12 24 48 125 and 250VDC are the same The GND should be hooked up first The ML1200 unit has a floating ground so the user may elect to Ground either or terminal to suit the customer s use Before connecting live power lines to the terminal block always use a digital voltmeter to measure the output voltage of the power supply and determine the lead which is more ve potential The more voltage lead from a ve or ve power supply must be connected to the post labeled The connection procedure is straightforward Simply connect the DC leads to the Switch s
331. pairs or replacement under warranty will be made without charge Warranty shall not apply to any relay which has been subject to misuse negligence accident incorrect installation or use not in accordance with instructions nor any unit that has been altered outside a GE Multilin authorized factory outlet GE Multilin is not liable for special indirect or consequential damages or for loss of profit or for expenses sustained as a result of a relay malfunction incorrect application or adjustment For complete text of Warranty including limitations and disclaimers refer to GE Multilin Standard Conditions of Sale A 2 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL Digital Energy Multilin Multilink ML1200 Managed Field Switch Appendix B DC Power Input MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL DC POWER INPUT B 1 CHAPTER B DC POWER INPUT Specifications for Multilink ML1200 Switches DC Power at 24 V and 48 V and 125 V DC Power input B 2 Each Multilink ML1200 Managed Switch requires DC power input at either 24VDC 48VDC or 125VDC nominal The wide range of DC power input types qualifies this product for use in 24VDC 48VDC as well as 125VDC applications in different industries DC Power Terminals are internally floating so that user may ground either GND ground wire connection to the ML1200 chassis screw Power Consumption 35 watts typical for a fully loaded fiber mod
332. path cost is assigned to individual ports for the switch to determine which ports are the forwarding points A higher cost means more loops a lower cost fewer loops More loops equal more traffic and a tree which takes a long time to converge resulting in a slower system Root Port Indicates the port number which is elected as the root port of the switch A root port of 0 indicates STP is disabled Protocol Indicates whether STP or RSTP is being used It also indicates if RSTP is used in Smart RSTP ring only mode or normal mode Bridge ID Indicates the MAC address of the current bridge over which traffic will flow Bridge Priority Specifies the switch bridge priority value This value is used along with the switch MAC address to determine which switch in the network is the root device Lower values mean higher priority The value ranges from 0 to 65535 with a default of 32768 13 15 RAPID SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL 13 16 t CHAPTER 13 RAPID SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL Status Indicates whether STP or RSTP is enabled Bridge Hello Time When the switch is the root device this is the time between messages being transmitted The value is from 1 to 10 seconds with a default of 2 Bridge Forward Delay Indicates the time duration the switch will wait from listening to learning states and from learning to forwarding states The value ranges from 4 to 30 seconds with a default of 15 Bridge Max Age This is the maximum time a mess
333. port mode status e show timers shows the bridge time parameters e timers changes the bridge time parameters MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 17 MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS The Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP commands for e mail are shown below Refer to Chapter 17 E mail for additional details e add adds a recipient e delete deletes a recipient e help smtp e sendmail sends e mail e server sets the global SMTP server configuration e smtp enables disables SMTP e mail alert The Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP commands are shown below Refer to Chapter 16 SNMP for additional details e authentraps enable disables the authentication traps e communi ty configures SNMP community names e help snmp e mgrip adds or deletes the SNMP manager IP e setvar configures system name contact or location e traps adds or deletes a trap receiver The Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP commands are shown below Refer to Chapter 5 Network Time for additional details e delete deletes the SNTP server from SNTP server database help sntp e setsntp adds SNTP server into the SNTP server database e sntp configures parameters for SNTP system e sync sets the interval for synchronization time with an NTP server The Spanning Tree Protocol STP commands are shown below Refer to Chapter 12 Spanning Tree Protocol STP for additional details cost il
334. pv3 group add id 1 groupname v1 model v1 com2secid Entry is added successfully continued on next page MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 16 SNMP SNMP Configuring SNMP continued ML1200 snmpv3 show group ID Group Name Sec Model Com2Sec ID 0 WN Hp H o ML1200 snmpv3 show group id 1 Group ID g E Group Name vl Model ARE Com2Sec 5 ML1200 snmpv3 view add id 1 viewname all type included subtree 1 Entry is added successfully ML1200 snmpv3 show view ID View Name Subtree Mask dl 2 3 4 5 6 a 8 9 o ML1200 snmpv3 show view id 1 View ID g E View Name all Type included Subtree Ej Mask e Am ML1200 snmpv3 access add id 1 accessname v1 model v1 level noauth read 1 wr notify none Entry is added successfully continued on next page MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 16 9 SNMP CHAPTER 16 SNMP Configuring SNMP continued ML1200 snmpv3 show access ID View Name Model Level R View W View N View Context Prefix ML1200 snmpv3 show access id 1 Access ID gat Access Name 1 WL Sec Model EU Sec Level noauth Read View ID E Write View ID none Notify View ID none Context B Prefix t exact ML1200 snmpv3 user add id 1 username jsmith usertype readwrite authpass something Entry is added successfully ML1200 snmpv3 show user ID User Name AuthPass
335. r settings VLAN Port Tag VLAN settings ACCESS IP Access and Host Table settings IGMP IGMP Settings LACP LACP settings Kill Config option using CLI This command is a hidden command that is the on line help and other help functions normally do not display this command The syntax for this command is kill Config or kill config save module command The kill Config command will default all the Switch settings back to factory defaults while the kill config save module will default all with the exception of module selected Available modules are system user acces port vlan ps mirror lacp slp and igmp MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL IP ADDRESSING CHAPTER 5 IP ADDRESSING It is recommended to save the configuration using saveconf command discussed above before using the kill config command The following two examples illustrate how to erase all the Switch s configuration using the kill config command and the second example illustrates how to erase all the Switch s configuration with the exception of system configuration 12008 kill config Do you want to erase the configuration Y or N Y Successfully erased configuration Please reboot 12008 kill config save system Do you want to erase the configuration Y or N Y Successfully erased configuration Please reboot Once the configuration is erased please reboot th
336. r specified address ML1200 access allow ip 3 94 245 25 mask 255 255 255 255 servic Service s allowed for specified address ML1200 access remove ip 3 94 245 15 mask 255 255 255 255 Access entry removed ML1200 accessHHt exit ML1200 show ip access 3 94 245 10 255725525570 ALLOWED DENIED DENIED 3 94 245 25 255725572557255 ALLOWED DENIED DENIED MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6 11 ACCESS CONSIDERATIONS CHAPTER 6 ACCESS CONSIDERATIONS 6 3 Configuring Port Security with EnerVista Software 6 3 1 Commands After enabling the EnerVista Secure Web Management software Select the Configuration gt Port gt Security menu item to configure port security as shown below Graphical Display Port Security View Logout 6 o Administration E Configuration Access Bridging gt Status v IGMP Ore Pott Signal 15 5 O LACP 1 None None Disable 4 Logs 2 None None Disable r d E Port d None None Disable Broadcast Protect 4 None None Disable Settings 5 None None Disable 8 None None Disable Mirroring 7 None None Disable 0 QoS RADIUS O RSTP SMTP SNMP 0 SNTP Statistics VLAN 5 From the menu shown above each individual port can be configured for the proper action on the port auto learn MAC addresses and specify individual MAC addresses To edit each port click on the edit icon P enable or disable port se
337. ress of the recipient e The optional traps parameter represents the trap filter If value is all all traps of any type will be sent to this recipient If value is none no traps are sent to this recipient Value can also be a combination of S SNMP R RMON and E enterprise For example trap SR means that SNMP and RMON traps will be sent via e mail to the recipient If this option is not defined the recipient will have a default value of all e The optional events parameter is the event filter Value can be all all event severity types will be sent to recipient none no event will be sent to recipient or a combination of informational A activity C critical F fatal and D debug With event Acr implies that events of severity types activity critical and fatal will be sent to recipients by e mail If this option is not defined a value of all is taken e The optional ip parameter represents the SMTP server IP address This is the SMTP server to connect to for this particular user If this option is not defined the global default SMTP server is used e The optional port parameter specifies the TCP port of the SMTP server If this is not defined the global default TCP port is used Theoptional domain parameter specifies the domain name of the SMTP server If this is not defined the global default domain name is used 17 2 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTE
338. ritten The syntax for this command is set logsize size 1 1000 Example 6 6 illustrates the show log and clear log commands The show log command indicates the type of log activity in the S column indicates informational entries and A indicates activities which are a result of port security setup Notice the clear log informational command clears the informational entries only The log shows the most recent intrusion at the top of the listing If the log is filled when the switch detects a new intrusion the oldest entry is dropped off the listing As discussed in the prior section any port can be set to monitor security as well as make a log on the intrusions that take place The logs for the intrusions are stored on the switch When the switch detects an intrusion on a port it sets an alert flag for that port and makes the intrusion information available The default log size is 50 rows To change the log size use the set logsize command Example 6 6 Security log commands ML1200 show log S Date Time Log Description 12 07 2004 9 01 34 A M CLI manager console login 12 07 2004 5 54 23 P M SNTP Date and Time updated from SNTP server 12 08 2004 6 09 00 P M SNTP Date and Time updated from SNTP server 12 09 2004 1 48 56 P M TELNET Telnet Session Started 12 09 2004 1 49 23 P M CLI manager console login 12 09 2004 4 26 26 P M TELNET Telnet Session Started 12 09 2004 4 26 34 P M CLI manager console login 12 09 2004 6 23 37 P M
339. roadcast frames Oto 1 F9 0 sent 4294967295 03C2 Port 15 Number of 64 byte fragments Oto 1 F9 0 with good CRC 4294967295 03C4 Port 16 Number of bytes received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 03C6 Port 16 Number of bytes sent Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 18 20 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 18 MODBUS PROTOCOL MULTILINK ML1200 MANAG MODBUS PROTOCOL Table 18 1 Modbus memory map Sheet 18 of 23 Address Description Range Step Format Default 03C8 Port 16 Number of frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 036 Port 16 Number of frames sent 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 03CC Port 16 Total bytes received Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 O3CE Port 16 Total frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 03D0 Port 16 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 03D2 Port 16 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 03D4 Port 16 Number of frames with CRC 0 to 1 F9 0 error 4294967295 03D6 Port 16 Number of oversized frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 03D8 Port 16 Number of bad fragments Oto 1 F9 0 received 64 bytes 4294967295 03DA Port 16 Number of jabber frames 01 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 03DC Port 16 Number of collisions occurred 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 03DE Port 16 Number of late collisions 0 to 1 F9 0 occurred 4294967295 05 0 Port 16 Number of
340. rt removes itself from that dynamic VLAN Refer to GVRP Operation Notes on page 11 7 for additional information on using GVRP MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 11 9 VLAN REGISTRATION OVER GARP CHAPTER 11 VLAN REGISTRATION OVER GARP 11 10 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL Digital Energy Multilin Multilink ML1200 Managed Field Switch Chapter 12 Spanning Tree Protocol STP 12 1 Overview 12 1 1 Description The Spanning Tree Protocol was designed to avoid loops in an Ethernet network An Ethernet network using switches can have redundant paths which may cause loops To prevent loops the MultiLink Switch Software uses the spanning tree protocol STP Controlling the span in which traffic traverses is necessary as a manager of the software It is also necessary to specify the parameters of STP STP is available as the IEEE 802 1d protocol and is a standard of the IEEE 12 1 2 Features and Operation The switch uses the IEEE 802 1d Spanning Tree Protocol STP When STP is enabled it ensures that only one path at a time is active between any two nodes on the network In networks where more than one physical path exists between two nodes STP ensures only a single path is active by blocking all redundant paths Enabling STP is necessary to avoid loops and duplicate messages This duplication leads to a broadcast storm or other erratic behavior that can bring down the network
341. rty from whom you purchased the product If the unit needs to be returned please use the original shipping container if possible Refer to Section 6 Troubleshooting for specific return procedures MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 1 INTRODUCTION 1 2 Order Codes CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION Module ML1200 Power Supply Modules Only with ML1200 48 models RoHS Conformal Coating Option 1 2 250S 1255 48VS 24VS 12VS 125D 48VD 24VD 48PS 48PD Slot A C1 C2 Slot B XX C1 C2 G3 C4 C5 C6 G7 C8 C9 CA CB CD CE Slot C XX C1 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 CA CB CD CE I AOTFTAMM OADPOANTDUHEWNHPE Slot D XX C8 C9 CA CB cc CD CE CF CG CH CI CJ CK CL Base Unit ML1200 250VDC Chassis ML1200 125VDC Chassis ML1200 48VDC Chassis ML1200 24VDC Chassis ML1200 12VDC Chassis ML1200 125VDC Chassis Dual Input PSU ML1200 48VDC Chassis Dual Input PSU ML1200 24VDC Chassis Dual Input PSU ML1200 48VDC Chassis PoE enabled ML1200 48VDC Chassis PoE enabled with Dual Input PSU None 4 x 10 100 RJ 45 4 x 10 100 RJ 45 4 x 10 100 RJ 45 PoE enabled ports only with ML1200 48P models 2 x10 100 RJ 45 2x 100Mbit MTRJ mm Fiber 2x 10 100 RJ 45 2x 100Mbit LC mm Fiber 2x 10 100 RJ 45 2x 100Mbit LC sm Fiber 15km 2x 10 100 RJ 45 1x 100Mbit SC mm Fiber 2x 10Mbit ST mm Fiber 2x 100Mbit ST mm Fiber 2x 100Mbi
342. rval 125 Querier Response Interval 10 Multicasting Unknown Streams Enable ML1200ligmp The output of the show igmp command provides the following useful information e IGMP State shows if IGMP is turned on Enable or off Disable Immediate Leave provides a mechanism for a particular host that wants to leave a multicast group It disables the port where the leave message is received ability to transmit multicast traffic Querier shows where the switch is a querier or a non querier In our example the switch is the querier Querier Interval shows the time period in seconds on which the switch sends general host query messages Querier Response Interval specifies maximum amount of time in seconds that can elapse between when the querier sends a host query message and when it receives a response from a host Multicasting Unknown Streams shows if the control of multicast streams is on Enabled or off Disabled The show group command displays the multicast groups 15 6 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 15 IGMP IGMP show group The following command sequence illustrates how to display IGMP groups ML1200ligmp show group GroupIp PortNo Timer LeavePending 224 1 0 1 1 155 0 224 0 1 40 L 155 0 ML1200 igmp The output of the show group command displays the following information Group IP column shows the multicast groups e Port No shows the port where the multicast
343. s 60 C per UL methods and 95 C per type test methods e Management Software included ML1200 firmware includes SNMP Switch Management with secure access control RMON CLI Port Security Port Mirroring secured Radius and TACACs Telnet FTP support Spanning Tree Protocol Link Loss Learn Ring Only Mode multi level 2 8 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION PRODUCT DESCRIPTION QoS Port and tag based VLANs GVRP IGMP Snooping SNMPc GUI support Event Log SNTP client for time of day BootP and DHCP client for IP configuring and password security and Secured Web interface MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2 9 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2 3 Applications CHAPTER 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Multilink ML1200 Field Switches offer high performance modularity and availability They provide the flexibility of 100Mbps fiber and copper ports as well as single or dual Gigabit 1000Mb ports with industry standard LAN management software Multilink ML1200 Switches are easily used in a variety of applications including client server computing secure VLAN performance upgrades to departmental networks and stream traffic for VOIP and audio video applications They can also be used in a very diversified combination of mixed media in Industrial floor applications The performance characteristics of the ML1200 Switches enable them to inter connect a series of sub
344. s on the links to the advertising devices Similarly the switch advertises its static VLANs to other GVRP aware devices A GVRP enabled switch does not advertise any GVRP learned VLANs out of the port s on which it originally learned of those VLANs MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL Lie VLAN REGISTRATION OVER GARP CHAPTER 11 VLAN REGISTRATION OVER GARP Example 11 2 Configuring GVRP ML1200 gvrp ML1200 gvrp show gvrp GVRP Status Enabled ML1200 gvrpHHt gvrp disable GVRP is now disabled ML1200 gvrp gvrp enable GVRP enabled ML1200 gvrp show vlan Default VLAN Static Active Blue Static Active dyn6 Dynamic Active ML1200 gvrpHt static vlan 10 ML1200 gvrpHtt show vlan Default VLAN Static Active Blue Static Active 6 dyn6 Static Active ML1200 gvrp set forbid vlan 2 forbid 3 5 ML1200 gvrp show forbid ML1200 gvrp 11 8 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 11 VLAN REGISTRATION OVER GARP VLAN REGISTRATION OVER GARP 11 3 Configuring GVRP with EnerVista Secure Web Management software 11 3 1 Example To configure GVRP Select the Configuration gt VLAN gt GVRP menu item Graphical Display GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP ico 9 Administration Sas Configuration Access eus VLAN Disabled Bridging VLANID VLAN Name Type Status Forbiden Ports 4 IGMP 1 Default VLAN
345. s parameter enables or disables a port from participating in RSTP discovery Its best to only allow trunk ports to participate in RSTP end stations need not participate in the RSTP process The timers command changes the STP forward delay hello timer and aging timer values timers forward delay lt 4 30 gt hello lt 1 10 gt age lt 6 40 gt The forward delay parameter indicates the time duration the switch will wait from listening to learning states and from learning to forwarding states The value ranges from 4 to 30 seconds with a default of 15 The hello parameter represents the time between messages being transmitted when the switch is the root device The value is 1 to 10 seconds with a default of 2 The age parameter is the maximum time a message with STP information is allowed by the switch before the switch discards the information and updates the address table again Value ranges from 6 to 40 seconds with default value of 20 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 13 RAPID SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL Example 13 4 Configuring RSTP L12008rstp 11200 rstp Show stp config RSTP CONFIGURATION Rapid STP STP Enabled Global RSTP STP Enabled Ports Protocol Bridge ID Bridge Priority Bridge Forward Delay Bridge Hello Time Bridge Max Age Root Port Root Path Cost Designated Root Designated Root Priority Root Bridge Forward Delay Root Bridge Hello Time Root Bridge Max Age Topology Cha
346. secure your devices and network Before starting ensure you have the following items e RJ45 Ethernet cable e PC with an Ethernet port e Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher e Macromedia Flash Player 5 0 or higher available from http www macromedia com shockwave download download cgi P1 Prod VersionzShockwaveFlash Ensure both firmware components are installed before proceeding The ML1200 can search the network for commonly used services that can issue an IP address If the switch is connected to a network the ML1200 uses the following process to find an IP address MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION wv NOTE INTRODUCTION If the ML1200 is not connected to a network then proceed to Step 3 below or use the default IP address Step 1 The ML1200 will scan the network for a DHCP server If the server responds the ML1200 will acquire and set the assigned IP address To manage the switch determine the assigned IP address and enter as follows in Internet Explorer https assigned address Ensure that https is entered not http and that there is connectivity that is you can ping the switch Step 2 If there is no response from a DCHP server the ML1200 will query for a BOOTP server If the server responds the ML1200 will acquire and set the assigned IP address To manage the switch determine the assigned IP address and enter as follows
347. server will then send the authenticator a RADIUS Access Challenge packet 5 Theauthenticator MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch will relay this challenge to the supplicant using an EAP Request frame This will request the supplicant to pass its credentials for authentication 6 The supplicant will send its credentials using an EAP Response packet 7 Theauthenticator will relay using a RADIUS Access Request packet 8 Ifthe supplicant s credentials are valid RADIUS Access Accept packet is sent to the authenticator 9 Theauthenticator will then relay this on as an EAP Success and provides access to the network MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 7 ACCESS USING RADIUS ACCESS USING RADIUS 10 If the supplicant does not have the necessary credentials a RADIUS Access Deny packet is relayed to the supplicant as an EAP Failure frame The access to the network continues to be blocked gt umm 802 1x switch Access Blocked Port Connected EAP Request Id e E RADIUS Access Request Oa RADIUS Access Challenge EAP Request EAP Response RADIUS Access Request RADIUS Access Accept EAP Success Access Allowed FIGURE 7 2 802 1x authentication details The ML1200 software implements the 802 1x authenticator It fully conforms to the standards as described in IEEE 802 1x implementing all the state machines needed for port based authentication The ML1200 software authenticator
348. sfer The port looks for STP traffic in order to determine its role in the network When it is determined that the port will play an active part in the network the state will change to learning The learning state is entered when the port is preparing to play an active member of the network The port learns addresses in this state but does not participate in frame transfer In a network of RSTP switches bridges the time spent in this state is usually quite short RSTP switches bridges operating in STP compatibility mode will spend between 6 to 40 seconds in this state After learning the bridge will place the port in the forwarding state While in this state the port both learns addresses and participates in frame transfer while in this state The result of these enhanced states is that the IEEE 802 1d version of spanning tree STP can take a fairly long time to resolve all the possible paths and to select the most efficient path through the network The IEEE 802 1w Rapid reconfiguration of Spanning Tree significantly reduces the amount of time it takes to establish the network path The result is reduced network downtime and improved network robustness In addition to faster network reconfiguration RSTP also implements greater ranges for port path costs to accommodate the higher connection speeds that are being implemented Proper implementations of RSTP by switch vendors is designed to be compatible with IEEE 802 1d STP GE recommends that yo
349. ssion of GE Multilin The content of this manual is for informational use only and is subject to change without notice Part numbers contained in this manual are subject to change without notice and should therefore be verified by GE Multilin before ordering Part number 1601 9095 A1 June 2009 Federal Communications Commission Radio Frequency Interference Statement This equipment generates uses and can radiate frequency energy and if not installed and used properly in strict accordance with the manufacturer s instructions may cause interference to radio communication It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device in accordance with the specifications in Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC rules which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference in which case the user at their own expense will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference Canadian Emissions Statement This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations Electrical Safety requirements 1 This productis to be installed Only in Restricted Access Areas Dedicated Equipment Rooms Electrical Closets or the like 2 48V DC products shall be installed with a readily accessible disconnect dev
350. sssesssesssesssesssessseessess 5 34 6 ACCESS eonun EE ICI ME UE EEUU 6 1 CONSIDERATIONS DESCRIPTION iicet teet iater ibn mni iiber tane 6 1 PASSWORDS 6 1 PORT SECURITY i ie iiti nete ed 6 2 CONFIGURING PORT SECURITY THROUGH THE COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 6 3 COMMANDS atte mei hein ei tabe eden ec destinies ALLOWING MAC ADDRESSES TOC II MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL TOC TABLE OF CONTENTS SECURITY LOGS oie hue de du tnt adem dtd td G 6 8 AUTHORIZED MANAGERS aon anana 6 10 CONFIGURING PORT SECURITY WITH ENERVISTA SOFTWARE 6 12 COMMANDS LOGS e ARUS AUTHORIZED MANAGERS 2n irte si ener eiie ee er ep i 6 16 7 ACCESS USING RADIUS dice UE NC AL qe 7 1 DD ESGRIP TION P 7 1 802 1 PROTOCOL cits crier toot a e t Det 7 1 CONFIGURING 802 1X THROUGH THE COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 7 4 COMMANDS cct ie ed te inte e biete te RR 7 4 ta 7 6 CONFIGURING 802 1X WITH ENERVISTA SECURE WEB MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE 7 9 COMMANDS iie t AT Het tU e OR RED te RA ER EUR THERA 7 9 8 ACCESS USING anatase een NONE enue 8 1 TACACS OVERVIEW TACACS FLOW TACACS PACKET CONFIGURING TACACS THROUGH THE COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
351. st likely to occur when data is moving from a 100Mb port to a 10 Mb port and the 10Mb port is unable to keep up It can also occur when multiple 100Mb ports are attempting to transmit to one 100Mb port and in other protracted heavy traffic situations Multilink ML1200 Switches implement the 802 3x flow control non blocking on Full Duplex ports which provides for a PAUSE packet to be transmitted to the sender when the packet buffer is nearly filled and there is danger of lost packets The transmitting device is commanded to stop transmitting into the ML1200 Switch port for sufficient time to let the Switch reduce the buffer space used When the available free buffer queue increases the Switch will send a RESUME packet to tell the transmitter to start sending the packets Of course the transmitting device must also support the 802 3x flow control standard in order to communicate properly during normal operation When in Half Duplex mode the ML1200 Switch implements a back pressure algorithm on 10 100 Mb ports for flow control That is the switch prevents frames from entering the device by forcing a collision indication on the half duplex ports that are receiving This temporary collision delay allows the available buffer space to improve as the switch catches up with the traffic flow MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 3 OPERATION CHAPTER 4 OPERATION 4 1 5 Power Budget Calculations
352. st router is not present on the network If an IGMP switch does not detect a querier it automatically assumes this role assuming the querier feature is enabled the default within IGMP Switch 1 Switch 2 IGMP is NOT running here IGMP is Multicast Data Stream running here Switch 3 Switch 4 IGMP is E running TEES here 3 PC2 PC1 PCS PC6 754728A1 CDR FIGURE 15 2 Isolating multicast traffic in a network In the above figure the multicast group traffic does not go to switch 1 and beyond This is because either the port on switch 3 that connects to switch 1 has been configured as blocked or there are no hosts connected to switch 1 or switch 2 that belong to the multicast group For PC 1 to become a member of the same multicast group without flooding IP multicast traffic on all ports of switches 1 and 2 IGMP must be configured on both switches 1 and 2 and the port on switch 3 that connects to switch 1 must be unblocked IP Multicast Filters IP multicast addresses occur in the range from 224 0 0 0 through 239 255 255 255 which corresponds to the Ethernet multicast address range of 01005e 000000 through 01005e 7fffff in hexadecimal Devices such as the MultiLink 1200 Managed Field Switch having static Traffic Security filters configured with a Multicast filter type and a Multi
353. switch is now operating using RSTP Note the show stp config command also indicates the switch protocol is RSTP ML1200 rstp Show stp config RSTP CONFIGURATION Rapid STP STP Enabled Global YES RSTP STP Enabled Ports z 01522 3 45 5756 7 Protocol Force to STER only Bridge ID 098 0 0 0 10 0 20 0 61 2 15 55 Bridge Priority 92768 Bridge Forward Delay 8 dis Bridge Hello Time 02 Bridge Max Age 20 Root Port a Root Path Cost 5 Designated Root 80 00 00 20 06 2b e1 55 Designated Root Priority 227168 Root Bridge Forward Delay a alib 13 10 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 13 RAPID SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL Configuring RSTP continued RSTP CONFIGURATION Rapid STP STP Enabled Global RSTP STP Enabled Ports Protocol Bridge ID Bridge Priority Bridge Forward Delay Bridge Hello Time Bridge Max Age Root Port Root Path Cost Designated Root Designated Root Priority Root Bridge Forward Delay Root Bridge Hello Time Root Bridge Max Age Topology Change count Time Since topology Chg ML1200 rstp Show timers Forward Delay Timer 15 sec Hello Timer 2 sec Max Age 20 Bec YES A Normal RSTP 8 01 2 0 01 0 0122 01 061 255 631 55 32768 15 02 20 0 0 80 00 00 20 06 25 5555 32768 15 02 20 0 RAPID SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL ML1200 rstp show stp ports RSTP Port Configuration Priority Pa
354. t 7 type Oto6 1 F4 Varies 005D Port 8 type Oto6 1 F4 Varies 005E Port 9 type Oto6 1 F4 Varies 005F Port 10 type Oto6 1 F4 Varies 0060 Port 11 type Oto6 1 F4 Varies 0061 Port 12 type Oto6 1 FA Varies 18 4 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 18 MODBUS PROTOCOL MULTILINK ML1200 MANAG MODBUS PROTOCOL Table 18 1 Modbus memory map Sheet 2 of 33 Address Description Range Step Format Default 0062 Port 13 type Oto6 1 FA Varies 0065 Port 14 type Oto6 1 FA Varies 0064 Port 15 type Oto6 1 FA Varies 0065 Port 16 type Oto6 1 FA Varies 0066 Port 17 type Oto6 1 FA Varies 0067 Port 18 type Oto6 1 FA Varies 0068 Port 19 type Oto6 1 FA Varies 0069 Port 20 type Oto6 1 FA Varies 006A Port 21 type Oto6 1 FA Varies 006B Port 22 type Oto6 1 FA Varies 006C Port 23 type Oto6 1 FA Varies 006D Port 24 type Oto6 1 FA Varies 006E Port 25 type Oto6 1 FA Varies 006F Port 26 type Oto6 1 FA Varies 0070 Port 27 type Oto6 1 FA Varies 0071 Port 28 type Oto6 1 FA Varies 0072 Port 29 type Oto6 1 FA Varies 0073 Port 30 type Oto6 1 FA Varies 0074 Port 51 type Oto6 1 FA Varies 0075 Port 32 type Oto6 1 FA Varies 0076 Port 1 link status 0to1 1 F3 0 0077 Port 2 link status 0to1 1 F3 0 0078 Port 5 link status 0to1 1 F3 0 00
355. t SC mm Fiber 2x 100Mbit SC sm Fiber 20km 2x 100Mbit SC sm Fiber 40km 4x 100Mbit MTRJ mm Fiber 4x 100Mbit LC mm Fiber 4x 100Mbit LC sm Fiber 15km 1x 100Mbit ST mm Fiber 1x 100Mbit SC mm Fiber 1x 100Mbit SC sm Fiber 20km 1x 100Mbit SC sm Fiber 40km 2x 100Mbit MTRJ mm Fiber 2x 100Mbit LC mm Fiber 2x 100Mbit LC sm Fiber 15km 2x 1000Mbit LC mm Fiber 2x 1000Mbit LC mm 2km Fiber 2x 1000Mbit LC sm Fiber 10km 2x 1000Mbit LC sm Fiber 25km 2x 1000Mbit LC sm Fiber 40km 2x 1000Mbit LC sm Fiber 70km 2x 1000Mbit RJ 45 Copper 1x 1000Mbit RJ 45 Copper 1x 1000Mbit SC mm Fiber 1x 1000Mbit RJ 45 Copper 1x 1000Mbit SC mm 2km Fiber 1x 1000Mbit RJ 45 Copper 1x 1000Mbit LC sm Fiber 10km 1x 1000Mbit RJ 45 Copper 1x 1000Mbit LC sm Fiber 25km 1x 1000Mbit RJ 45 Copper 1x 1000Mbit LC sm Fiber 40km 1x 1000Mbit RJ 45 Copper 1x 1000Mbit LC sm Fiber 70km 1x 1000Mbit SC mm Fiber 1x 1000Mbit SC mm 2km Fiber 1x 1000Mbit LC sm Fiber 10km 1x 1000Mbit LC sm Fiber 25km 1x 1000Mbit LC sm Fiber 40km 1x 1000Mbit LC sm Fiber 70km 1x 1000Mbit RJ 45 Copper None Harsh Chemical Environment Conformal Coating RoHS compliant RoHS compliant with Harsh Chemical Environment Coating ON OIX MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION 1 3 Specifications INTRODUCTION PERFORMANCE Filtering Forwarding Ethernet 10MbJ
356. t and trap receivers MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 16 11 SNMP CHAPTER 16 SNMP The following window illustrates changes to the SNMP community parameters It is recommended to change the community strings from the default values of public and private to other values Graphical Display SNMP Configuration Logout In 7 o Administration E Configuration 51 O Access SNMP Community Names O Bridging O IGMP O Pv6 gt Set Community Name private F OLACP O Logs b Trap Community Name public Port QoS OK E RADIUS SNMP Manager Stations a OST ee Se E SMTP FI OE SNTP Statistics E VLAN Get Community Name public Add SNMP Trap Stations Add gt When done changing the community strings click OK Multiple managers can be added as shown below When adding SNMP manager stations click on the Add button on the SNMP menu screen Make sure that each station can be pinged from the switch by using the Configuration gt Ping menu 16 12 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 16 SNMP SNMP gt When done adding stations click OK Graphical Display SNMP Configuration Ee OOO F Administration Configuration E O Access SNMP Community Names E Bridgi gt Get Community Name public IGMP 9 v6 Set Commu
357. t data is hashed and shared using MD5 and secret string defined between the MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch and the TACACS server 8 2 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 8 ACCESS USING TACACS ACCESS USING TACACS 32 bits wide 4 4 8 8 8 bits Major Minor Packet type Sequence Flags Version Version number Session ID Length 754717A1 CDR FIGURE 8 2 TACACS packet format The portions of the TACACS packet are defined as follows Major Version The major TACACS version number Minor version The minor TACACS version number This is intended to allow revisions to the TACACS protocol while maintaining backwards compatibility Packet type Possible values are TAC PLUS AUTHEN 0x01 authentication TAC PLUS AUTHOR 0x02 authorization TAC PLUS ACCT 0x03 accounting Sequence number The sequence number of the current packet for the current session Flags This field contains various flags in the form of bitmaps The flag values signify whether the packet is encrypted Session ID The ID for this TACACS session Length The total length of the TACACS packet body not including the header MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 8 3 ACCESS USING TACACS 8 2 8 4 CHAPTER 8 ACCESS USING TACACS Configuring TACACS through the Command Line Interface 8 2 1 8 2 2 Commands Example There are several
358. t on required ports use the show port security port 3 command Save the port security configuration use the save command Example 6 3 Allowing specific MAC addresses on specific ports ML1200 port security allow mac 00 c1 00 7f ec 00 port 1 3 5 Specified MAC address es allowed on selected port s ML1200 port security show port security port 1 3 5 PORT STATE SIGNAL ACTION LEARN COUNT MAC ADDRESS T ENABLE LOG NONE ENABLE 6 00 e0 29 2a f1 bd 00 01 03 62 27 89 00 07 50 ef 31 40 00 8 2592211585 00 03 47 ca ac 45 0023048270272 323 00 c1 00 7 ec 00 3 ENABLE NONE NONE ENABLE 0 00 c1 00 7 ec 00 5 ENABLE NONE NONE DISABLE 0 00 c1 00 7 ec 00 Example 6 4 Removing MAC addresses from specific ports ML1200lport securityHtt remove mac 00 c1 00 7f ec 00 port 3 Specified MAC address es removedfrom selected port s ML1200lport securityHtt show port security port 3 PORT STATE SIGNAL ACTION LEARN COUNT MAC ADDRESS 3 ENABLE NONE NONE ENABLE 0 Not Configured ML1200 port security MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 ACCESS CONSIDERATIONS gt gt ACCESS CONSIDERATIONS Disable learning on required ports for example use the learn port 3 5 disable command Optional step Add any specific MAC addresses if needed to allow designated devices to access the network use the add mac 00 c1 00 7f ec 00 port 3 5 command Disable access to the network for unauthorized
359. talled in close proximity i e less than 2 meters or 6 5ft to the ML1200 It is not recommended to use these ports in substation applications to interface to field devices across distances which could produce kigh greater than 2500V levels of ground potential rise GPR during line to ground fault conditions The ML1200 passes the 1613specifications for zero packet loss with fiber ports amp with RJ 45 ports used as indicated here MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL de INSTALLATION 3 4 NOTE CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 3 2 0 5 Connecting Twisted Pair CAT5e or better Unshielded or Shielded The RJ 45 Gigabit ports of the Multilink ML1200 can be connected to the media types 1000BASE T or CAT 5E or better 100 ohm UTP or shielded twisted pair STP balanced cable The CAT 5E or better 100 ohm UTP or shielded twisted pair STP balanced cable is recommended to use when making 1000BASE TX connections In either case the max distance for unshielded twisted pair cabling is 100 meters 328 ft Media IEEE Standard Connector Twisted Pair CAT 5e 1000BASE T RJ 45 The following procedure describes how to connect a 1000BASE T twisted pair segment to the RJ 45 port The procedure is the same for both unshielded and shielded twisted pair cables 1 1000BASE T connections require that all four pairs or wires be connected Insert either end of the cable with an RJ 45 plug into the RJ 45 connector of the port Note that
360. tch e ht is the hardware type For the MultiLink family of switches set this to ether for Ethernet This tag must precede the ha tag e hais the hardware address Use the switch s 12 digit MAC address e ipis the IP address to be assigned to the switch e smisthe subnet mask of the subnet in which the switch is installed Each switch should have a unique name and MAC address specified in the bootptab table entry 5 2 5 Configuring DHCP bootp Manual AUTO By default the switch is configured for auto IP configuration DHCP bootp manual can be enabled with the command line interface by using the set bootmode command with the following syntax set bootmode dhcp bootp manual auto bootimg lt enable disable gt bootcfg lt enable disable gt MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 3 IP ADDRESSING 5 4 CHAPTER 5 IP ADDRESSING The bootimg argument is only valid with the bootp type This option allows the switch to load the image file from the bootp server This is useful when a new switch is placed on a network and the IT policies are set to load a specific image which is supported and tested by IT personnel Likewise the bootcfg argument is valid only with the bootp type This option allows the switch to load the configuration file from the bootp server This is useful when a new switch is put on a network and the specific configurations are loaded from a centralized bootp server The following examp
361. th Cost State TP 10 100 128 2000000 Forwarding 80 00 00 20 06 2b e1 55 TP 10 100 128 200000 Forwarding 80 00 00 20 06 2b e1 55 100MB Fiber 128 200000 Disabled 100MB Fiber 128 200000 Disabled 100MB Fiber 128 200000 Disabled 100MB Fiber 128 200000 Disabled TP 10 100 128 2000000 Disabled ML1200 rstp priority port 2 value 100 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 13 11 RAPID SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL CHAPTER 13 RAPID SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL Configuring RSTP continued ML1200 rstp show stp ports RSTP Port Configuration Priority Path Cost State TP 10 100 128 2000000 Forwarding 80 00 00 20 06 2b e1 55 TP 10 100 100 250000 Forwarding 80 00 00 20 06 2b e1 55 100MB Fiber 128 200000 Disabled 100MB Fiber 128 200000 Disabled 100MB Fiber 128 200000 Disabled 100MB Fiber 128 200000 Disabled TP 10 100 128 2000000 Disabled 1 1200 rstp port port 1 status disable 1 1200 rstp Show stp ports RSTP Port Configuration TP 10 100 128 2000000 NO STP 00 01 TP 10 100 100 250000 Forwarding 80 00 00 20 06 2b e1 55 100MB Fiber 128 200000 Disabled 100MB Fiber 128 200000 Disabled 100MB Fiber 128 200000 Disabled 100MB Fiber 128 200000 Disabled TP 10 100 128 2000000 Disabled 1 1200 rstp port port 1 status enable 11200 rstp Show stp ports RSTP Port Configuration Priority Path Cost State TP 10 100 128 2000000 Forwarding 80 00 00 20 06 2b e1 55 00 01 TP 10 100 100 2
362. the network is in operation Full duplex future proof fiber media can easily connect long distance subnets and provide a stable secure network to all applications The SNMP management capability of the Multilink ML1200 Switch helps create a database of all the network subnets to easily manage the network Example 2 A managed network is needed to provide a redundant ring topology for maximum redundancy In a network where any faulty cable cable disconnection or power failure can bring the whole thing down a ring switch can be reconfigured and up and running in milliseconds The ring topology of the network consists of high speed LAN segments supported by 100Mbps full duplex future proof fiber media to provide a secure long distance LAN connection The entire network is sharing a higher bandwidth Gigabit enabled data mining server for the vital database located in a separate secured building The copper ports are required for multiple subnets inside the power plant to check the status of other Ethernet units The entire spread network will be manageable to provide easy detectable uninterrupted support through a viewable SNMP monitor The Multilink ML1200 Managed Field Switch equipped with a mix of copper and fiber ports provides an economical and seamless solution to many requirements The user configurable Multilink ML1200 provides an extra boost to the network requirements by providing copper fiber media along with the higher bandwidth support o
363. the system IP address subnet mask and gateway Usage ipconfig ipe ipaddress mask lt subnet mask gt dgw lt gateway gt ML1200 ipconfig ip fe80 220 6ff fe25 ed80 mask ffff ffff ffff ffff Action Parameter Missing add assumed IPv6 Parameters Set ML1200 show ipv6 IPv6 Address fe80 220 6ff fe25 ed80 mask ffff ffff ffff ffff ML1200 show ipconfig IP Address 192 168 5 5 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway Address 192 168 5 1 IPv6 Address fe80 220 6ff fe25 ed80 mask ffff ffff fffF ffff IPv6 Gateway ML1200 FIGURE 5 5 Configuring IPv6 In addition to the commands listed above the commands which support IPv6 addressing are Syntax ftp IPv6 address ftp to an IPv6 station Example ftp fe80 220 6ff fe25 ed80 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 33 IP ADDRESSING 5 5 5 5 34 CHAPTER 5 IP ADDRESSING Syntax telnet IPv6 address telnet to an IPv6 station Example telnet fe80 220 6ff fe25 ed80 Besides if the end station supports IPv6 addressing as most Linux and Windows systems do one can access the switch using the IPv6 addressing as shown in the example below http fe80 220 6ff fe25 ed80 List of commands in this chapter Syntax ipconfig ipz ip address mask lt subnet mask gt dgw lt gateway gt add del configure an IPv6 address The add delete option can be used to add or delete IPvA IPv6 addresses Syntax show
364. tion Range Step Format Default 01DO Port 6 Number of bytes received 0to 1 F9 0 4294967295 01D2 Port 6 Number of bytes sent 0to 1 F9 0 4294967295 0104 Port 6 Number of frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 01D6 Port 6 Number of frames sent 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 01D8 Port 6 Total bytes received 0to 1 F9 0 4294967295 01DA Port 6 Total frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 01DC Port 6 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 01DE Port 6 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 01E0 Port 6 Number of frames with CRC 0 to 1 F9 0 error 4294967295 01 2 Port 6 Number of oversized frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 1 4 Port 6 Number of bad fragments Oto 1 F9 0 received 64 bytes 4294967295 01 6 Port 6 Number of jabber frames Oto 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 1 8 Port 6 Number of collisions occurred 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 O1EA Port 6 Number of late collisions 0 to 1 F9 0 occurred 4294967295 O1EC Port 6 Number of 64 byte frames 0to 1 F9 0 received sent 4294967295 O1EE Port 6 Number of 65 to 127 byte Oto 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 1 Port 6 Number of 128 to 255 byte 0to 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 01 2 Port 6 Number of 256 to 511 byte 01 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 01F4 Port 6 Number of 512 to 1023 byte 0 to 1 F9 0 frames received sent 4294967295 O1F6 Port 6 Number of 1023 to maximum 0 to 1 F9 0 byte frames received sent 4294967295 01
365. tion period This is the time in seconds the authenticator waits before a re authentication process will be performed again to the supplicant The default value is 3600 seconds 1 hour and values range from 10 to 86400 seconds The show stats command displays 802 1x related statistics show stats port lt num gt The trigger reauth command manually initiates a re authentication of supplicant trigger reauth port lt numllist range gt MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL T8 ACCESS USING RADIUS CHAPTER 7 ACCESS USING RADIUS 5 7 2 2 Example Example 7 1 demonstrates how to secure the network using port access Ensure there is no 802 1x or RADIUS server defined Only one RADIUS server can be defined for the entire network Example 7 1 Setting port control parameters The RADIUS server is on port 2 This port is authenticated manually If the RADIUS server is 802 1X Authenticator Configuration several hops away it may be necessary to authenticate the interconnection ports Make sure Status Disabled the setport port 2 status enable RADIUS Authentication Server control forceauth initialize assert command is executed before the auth enable command IP Address 0050 20710 UDP Port 1812 Shared Secret ML1200 auth ML1200 authHH t setport port 2 status enable control forceauth initialize assert Suc
366. tmask settings allow ip lt ipaddress gt mask lt netmask gt service lt namellist gt The deny ip command denies access to a specific IP address es or a subnet IP addresses can be individual stations a group of stations or subnets The range is determined by the IP address and netmask settings deny ip lt ipaddress gt mask lt netmask gt service lt namellist gt The remove ip command removes specific IP address es or subnet by eliminating specified entry from the authorized manager list remove ip lt ipaddress gt mask lt netmask gt The removeal 1 command removes all authorized managers removeall The show ip access command displays a list of authorized managers show ip access MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 ACCESS CONSIDERATIONS ACCESS CONSIDERATIONS B It is assumed here that the user is familiar with IP addressing schemes e g class A B C w etc subnet masking and masking issues such as how many stations are allowed for a M given subnet mask In Example 6 7 any computer on 3 94 245 10 network is allowed note how the subnet mask indicates this Also a specific station with IP address 3 94 245 25 is allowed again note how the subnet mask is used An older station with IP address 3 94 245 15 is removed Example 6 7 Allowing blocking specific IP addresses ML1200 access ML1200 access allow ip 3 94 245 10 mask 255 255 255 0 service Service s allowed fo
367. to USB ports The interface through the console or the console management interface or CMI enables you to reconfigure the switch and to monitor switch status and performance Once the switch is configured with an IP address the command line interface or CLI is also accessible using telnet as well as the serial port Access to the switch can be either through the console interface or remotely over the network Simultaneous access that is through the console port as well as through the network to the MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch switch is not permitted CAUTION The Command Line Interface CLI enables local or remote unit installation and maintenance The MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch provides a set of system commands which allow effective monitoring configuration and debugging of the devices on the network 1 4 2 Console Setup Connect the console port on the switch to the serial port on the computer using the serial cable listed above The settings for the HyperTerminal firmware emulating a VT100 are shown below Make sure the serial parameters are set as shown or bps 38400 data bits 8 parity none stop bits 1 flow control none COMI Properties 3 x Port Settings Bits per second Data bits w Pay None Stop bits 1 Flow control woe em Restore Defaults SCENES FIGURE 1 1 Serial Settings in HyperTerminal MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWI
368. to maximum 0 to 1 F9 0 byte frames received sent 4294967295 06DA Port 31 Number of MAC error packets 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 O6DC Port 31 Number of dropped received 01 1 F9 0 packets 4294967295 06DE Port 31 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sen 4294967295 06 0 Port 31 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 sen 4294967295 06 2 Port 31 Number of 64 byte fragments Oto 1 F9 0 with good CRC 4294967295 06 4 Port 32 Number of bytes received Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 O6E6 Port 32 Number of bytes sent Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 O6E8 Port 32 Number of frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 O6EA Port 32 Number of frames sent 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 O6EC Port 32 Total bytes received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 O6EE Port 32 Total frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 O6F0 Port 32 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 06 2 Port 32 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 6 4 Port 32 Number of frames with CRC 0 to 1 F9 0 error 4294967295 O6F6 Port 32 Number of oversized frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 O6F8 Port 32 Number of bad fragments 01 1 F9 0 received 64 bytes 4294967295 O6FA Port 32 Number of jabber frames Oto 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 O6FC Port 32 Number of collisions occurred 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 O6FE Port 32 Number of late collisions 0 to 1 F9 0 occurred 4294967295 0700 Port 32 Number of 64 byte frames Oto 1 F9 0 received sent 4294967295 0702 Port 32 Number of 65 t
369. traffic enters the service provider environment DiffServ is a layer 3 protocol and requires no specific layer 2 capability allowing it to be used in the LAN MAN and WAN DiffServ works by tagging each packet at the originating device or an intermediate switch for the requested level of service it requires across the network IP Header y DMAC SMAC ToS Data FCS DiffservCode Points DSCP 754725A1 CDR FIGURE 14 1 ToS and DSCP DiffServ inserts a 6 bit DiffServ code point DSCP in the Type of Service ToS field of the IP header as shown in the picture above Information in the DSCP allows nodes to determine the Per Hop Behavior PHB which is an observable forwarding behavior for each packet Per hop behaviors are defined according to e Resources required e g bandwidth buffer size e Priority based on application or business requirements e Traffic characteristics e g delay jitter packet loss Nodes implement PHBs through buffer management and packet scheduling mechanisms This hop by hop allocation of resources is the basis by which DiffServ provides quality of service for different types of communications traffic 14 1 4 IP Precedence 14 2 IP Precedence utilizes the three precedence bits in the IPv4 header s Type of Service ToS field to specify class of service for each packet You can partition traffic in up to eight classes of service using IP pre
370. tral office data warehouses very securely and reliably The DIN Rail Mounting options on the Multilink ML1200 allow the factory floor s industrial user to mount the ML1200 securely anywhere on their Network setup The option of setting the ports at 10 or 100Mb on copper and 10 or 100Mb on fiber media provide widespread options to the users to mix and match their legacy and advance network needs The modularity of the ML1200 Managed Field Switches make them an attractive choice for use in applications with LAN connections to an organization s multiple site offices and factory floors The different locations can be easily connected together with the Fiber ports supported by the Multilink ML1200 Switch A main NT server in a secure area protected from earthquake or fire hazards can be connected to the full duplex Gigabit Fiber port MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION PRODUCT DESCRIPTION SNMP Monitor Multilink ML2400 74 P ji slt RS xl MU Fiber Connection Router Fiber Connection ML1200 Factory Floor PLC ML1200 Factory Floor PLC Factory Floor PLC Factory Floor PLC Extended temperature ratings and a variety of options for AC DC power supplies qualify this managed ML1200 switch for use in non temperature controlled networks and many other temperature sensitive critical Industrial applications where above normal room temperatures occur while
371. u employ RSTP or STP in your network 13 1 3 Transition from STP to RSTP IEEE 802 1w RSTP is designed to be compatible with IEEE 802 1D STP Even if all the other devices in your network are using STP you can enable RSTP on the MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch The default configuration values of the RSTP available in ML1200 software will ensure that your switch will inter operate effectively with the existing STP devices RSTP automatically detects when the switch ports are connected to non RSTP devices using spanning tree and communicates with those devices using 802 1d STP BPDU packets Even though RSTP inter operates with STP RSTP is more efficient at establishing the network path and network convergence in case of a very fast failure As such GE recommends that all network devices be updated to support RSTP RSTP offers convergence times typically less than one second However to make best use of RSTP and achieve the fastest possible convergence times there are some changes required to the RSTP default configuration MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 13 RAPID SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL RAPID SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL Under some circumstances it is possible for the rapid state transitions employed by RSTP to result in an increase in the rates of frame duplication and the order in which the frames are sent and received To allow RSTP switches to support applications and protocols that may be sensitive
372. ules receiving information have to be configured on the MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch It is recommended to use IEEE 802 1q tagged based VLANs over port based VLANs because of there multi vendor interoperability and capability of carrying the isolated tagged VLAN information when more than one switch is involved MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 10 VLAN VLAN 10 2 Configuring Port VLANs through the Command Line Interface 10 2 1 Description Port VLANs are rarely used and are not recommended in networks which use VLANs across multiple switches Port VLANs are used when VLANs are setup up on a single switch and connectivity between the system on different VLANs is needed however the broadcasts and multicasts are isolated to the specific VLAN GE recommends using the set port command for setting the port based VLAN as well The port based VLAN feature supports a maximum of 1 VLAN per port Any pre existing VLAN tags on traffic coming into the switch on a port based VLAN port will be removed General steps for using port VLANs are 1 Plan your VLAN strategy and create a map of the logical topology that will result from configuring VLANs Include consideration for the interaction between VLANs 2 Configure at least one VLAN in addition to the default VLAN 3 Assign the desired ports to the VLANs 4 Decide on trunking strategy how will the VLAN information be propagated from one switch to a
373. ult state is disable set ports port port list range state lt learn block disable gt The set forbid command sets the forbid GVRP capability on the ports specified set forbid vlan tag vlanid forbid lt port number list range gt The show forbid command displays the ports with GVRP forbid capabilities show forbid The following example illustrates how to configure GVRP using the commands shown in this section 11 2 2 GVRP Operation Notes A dynamic VLAN must be converted to a static VLAN before it can have an IP address After converting a dynamic VLAN to a static VLAN use the save command to save the changes made on a reboot the changes can be lost without the save command Within the same broadcast domain a dynamic VLAN can pass through a device that is not GVRP aware This is because a hub or a switch that is not GVRP aware will flood the GVRP multicast advertisement packets out all ports GVRP assigns dynamic VLANs as tagged VLANs To configure the VLAN as untagged first convert the tagged VLAN to a static VLAN Rebooting a switch on which a dynamic VLAN deletes that VLAN However the dynamic VLAN re appears after the reboot if GVRP is enabled and the switch again receives advertisements for that VLAN through a port configured to add dynamic VLANs By receiving advertisements from other devices running GVRP the switch learns of static VLANs from those devices and dynamically automatically creates tagged VLAN
374. umber corresponding to the trap entry number in the table show trap id idit The com2sec command specifies the mapping from a source community pair to a security name Up to 10 entries can be specified This part of the View based Access Control Model VACM as defined in RFC 2275 comesec lt add delete gt id lt id gt secname lt name gt source lt source gt community community The group command defines the mapping from sec model or a sec name to a group A sec model is one of v1 v2c or usm Up to 10 entries can be specified This part of the View based Access Control Model VACM as defined in RFC 2275 group add delete id lt id gt groupname name model v1 v2c usm com2secid lt com2sec id gt The show group command displays all or specific group entries The id argument is optional and is the number corresponding to the group entry number in the table show group id lt id gt The vi ew command defines a manager or group or manager stations what it can access inside the MIB object tree Up to 10 entries can be specified This part of the View based Access Control Model VACM as defined in RFC 2275 view ada delete id lt id gt viewname lt name gt type included excluded subtree lt oid gt mask lt hex string gt The show vi ew command display all or specific view entries The id argument is optional and is the number corresponding to the view entry number in the table show view id lt id
375. up All hosts conforming to level 2 of the IP multicasting specification require IGMP 15 1 2 IGMP Concepts The ML1200 supports IGMP L2 standards as defined by RFC 1112 IGMP is disabled by default and needs to be enabled on the MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch IP multicasting is defined as the transmission of an IP datagram to a host group a set of zero or more hosts identified by a single IP destination address A multicast datagram is delivered to all members of its destination host group with the same best efforts reliability as regular unicast IP datagrams i e the datagram is not guaranteed to arrive at all members of the destination group or in the same order relative to other datagrams The membership of a host group is dynamic that is hosts may join and leave groups at any time There is no restriction on the location or number of members in a host group but membership may be restricted to only those hosts possessing a private access key A host may be a member of more than one group at a time A host need not be a member of a group to send datagrams to it A host group may be permanent or transient A permanent group has a well known administratively assigned IP address It is the address and not the membership that is permanent at any time a permanent group may have any number of members even MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 19 1 IGMP 15 2 CHAPTER 15 IGMP zero On the other han
376. ur CLI Session Started from Console CLI User manager Login From Console CLI Session Timed Out for User manager on Ci CLI Session Term User manager on Console SYSMGR System Was Rebooted By power cycle SNTP System Clock Setto Default SYSMGR System IP Address changed to 3 94 2 SNTP System Time Zone Setto 05 00 SNTP SNTP Client Started BNTP SNTP Request Timeout X Alert Critical Error Warning Notice Clear The Clear button clears all the logs To prevent accidental erasures you will be prompted again if the logs should be deleted The Event Log records operating events as single line entries listed in chronological order For details on event log records refer to Chapter 17 Description MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 17 13 MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS 17 8 Command Reference 17 14 17 8 1 Main Commands CHAPTER 17 MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS The main commands can be categorized as show commands set commands and context less commands The show commands are listed below show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show active snmp displays currently active SNMP support active stp displays currently active STP active vlan displays currently active VLAN address table displays address table parameters age displays the address table age
377. ure is subject to U S Government restrictions as set forth in Sub division b 3 ii of the rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at 52 227 7013 This file is provided as a sample template to create a backup of GE MultiLink switches As such this script provides insights into the configuration of GE MultiLink switches settings GE Multilin Inc recommends that modifications of this file and the commands should be verified by the User in a it test environment prior to use in a live production network it All modifications are made at the User s own risk and are subject to the limitations of the GE MultiLink software End User License Agreement EULA Incorrect usage may result in network shutdown GE Multilin Inc is not liable for incidental or consequential damages due to improper use This is a Machine Generated File Only the SYSTEM config block is editable Editing any other block will result in error while loading Hardware Configuration This area shows the type of hardware and modules installed
378. ured with up to 12 100Mb fiber ports and two Gigabit ports For 10 100 copper regular or PoE equipped 10 100 RJ 45 or 10 100 1000 copper ports may be configured to a maximum or 12 at 10 100 and 2 Gig ports Multilink ML1200 comes with the best of breed managed networks software featuring GUI ease of use Secure Web Management SNMPv2 v3 management 802 1p QoS Prioritization Tag based VLANS IGMP Snooping and IGMP L2 multicast management port security RADIUS and TACACS support and a choice of redundancy options including RSTP and GE Multilin s rapid ring recovery Ring Only Mode Multilink ML1200s are ideal for building a switched hardened Ethernet network infrastructure connecting edge devices such as PLCs and IEDs with upstream switches or routers Designed for use in industrial applications such as factory floors and control cabinets industrial video surveillance systems with PoE power utility substations tariffed carrier field facilities or transportation and oil and gas the rugged Multilink ML1200 handles stressful workloads mixes of bursty data traffic and priority streaming traffic as well as harsh environmental conditions Advanced thermal design techniques with ribbed surface Aluminum cases for maximum heat dissipation and a sealed case design enables the unit to operate in harsh Industrial grade environments efficiently Heavy duty Ethernet Switch jobs are readily accommodated with an extended temperature rating of 40 C to 60
379. uring the server information specific port information is configured gt Select the Configuration gt Radius gt Port gt Set menu item to configure the RADIUS characteristics of each port gt To edit the port settings click on the edit icon P Graphical Display 802 1x Authenticator Port Configuration 4 9 Administration ee E Configuration Access Bridging IGMP one nae O LACP enable deassert Logs enable auto deassert Port enable auto deassert aos enable auto deassert Ej RADIUS enable auto deassert Server enable auto deassert E Port enable auto deassert on Access Stats RSTP SMTP SNMP SNTP Statistics Ba VLAN SS i Q0 7 10 MULTILINK 1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 7 ACCESS USING RADIUS ACCESS USING RADIUS Ensure that the port which has the RADIUS server is force authorized and asserted For other ports user ports it is best to leave the Control on auto and Initialize on de asserted Graphical Display 802 1x Authenticator Port Configuration iu 9 Administration E Configuration 0 Access 0 Bridging E O IGMP Pv6 HE OLACP Logs E Port 9955 Port 1 E 0 RADIUS 0 Server Status enable Port Access Stats gt Initialize Ej O RSTP SMTP SNMP SNTP
380. user has to provide a user name and password for authenticated access A RADIUS server is well suited for controlling access into a network by managing the users who can access the network on a RADIUS server Interacting with the server and taking corrective action s is not possible on all switches This capability is provided on the MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch RADIUS servers and its uses are also described by one or more RFCs 7 1 2 802 1x Protocol There are three major components of 802 1x Supplicant Authenticator and Authentication Server RADIUS Server In the figure below the PC acts as the supplicant The supplicant is an entity being authenticated and desiring access to the services The switch is the authenticator The authenticator enforces authentication before allowing MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL bad ACCESS USING RADIUS 2 CHAPTER 7 ACCESS USING RADIUS access to services that are accessible via that port The authenticator is responsible for communication with the supplicant and for submitting the information received from the supplicant to a suitable authentication server This allows the verification of user credentials to determine the consequent port authorization state It is important to note that the authenticator s functionality is independent of the actual authentication method It effectively acts as a pass through for the authentication exchange _ 802 1x switc
381. v4 Its deployment strategy is designed to have no dependencies IPv6 is designed to run well on high performance networks e g Gigabit Ethernet OC 12 ATM etc and at the same time still be efficient on low bandwidth networks e g wireless In addition it provides a platform for the new level of internet functionality that will be required in the near future IPv6 includes a transition mechanism designed to allow users to adopt and deploy it in a highly diffuse fashion and to provide direct interoperability between IPv4 and IPv6 hosts The transition to a new version of the Internet Protocol is normally incremental with few or no critical interdependencies Most of today s internet uses IPv4 which is now nearly twenty years old IPv4 has been remarkably resilient in spite of its age but it is beginning to have problems Most importantly there is a growing shortage of IPv4 addresses which are needed by all new machines added to the Internet IPv6 fixes a number of problems in IPv4 such as the limited number of available IPv4 addresses It also adds many improvements to 4 in areas such as routing and network auto configuration IPv6 is expected to gradually replace IPv4 with the two coexisting for a number of years during the transition period 5 5 2 What s changed in IPV6 The changes from IPv4 to IPv6 fall primarily into the following categories e Expanded Routing and Addressing Capabilities IPv6 increases the IP address siz
382. vity The log buffer size can be controlled through this menu MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 17 MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS For viewing each specific log Graphical Display Administration Configuration Access Bridging IGMP Pv6 og Port aos RADIUS ORSTP O SMTP SNMP SNTP Statistics Log Statistics Port Statistics VLAN t MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS gt Select the Configuration gt Logs menu item Logged Events 01 01 2001 12 0 01 01 2001 12 01 01 2001 12 12 31 2000 O7 C 12 31 2000 O7 C 12 31 2000 O7 C 12 31 2000 O7 C 12 31 2000 07 2 12 31 2000 07 2 12 31 2000 08 C 12 31 2000 8 01 01 2001 12 0 01 01 2001 12 C 01 01 2001 12 C 12 31 2000 07 C 12 31 2000 O7 C 12 31 2000 07 C Notice Notice Notice Notice Notice Notice Notice Notice Notice Notice Notice Notice Notice Notice Notice Notice Notice Logout All Events SYSMGR System Was Rebooted By power cycle BNTP System Clock Set to Default SYSMGR System IP Address changed to 3 94 2 SNTP System Time Zone Set to 05 00 SNTP SNTP Client Started SNTP SNTP Request Timeout SNTP SNTP Request Timeout CLI Session Started from Console CLI User manager Login From Console CLI Session Timed Out for
383. w show show show show show show show show show show show show MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS smtp displays e mail SMTP alert information snmp displays information related to SNMP sntp displays the configured SNTP servers details stats displays the port statistics stp displays Spanning Tree Bridge parameters subnet displays the Subnet Mask of the system ss sysconfig displays system configurable parameters syscontact displays the current system contact syslocation displays the current system location sysname displays the current system name time displays the system time timeout displays the system inactivity time out timezone displays the configured time zone of the device uptime displays up time of the system users displays all configured users version displays current version of the software vlan displays the VLAN parameters of a specified type web The set commands are listed below set Set set Ser Set set set Set set set set set set bootmode date year daylight country prompt logsize password sets the current user password snmp stp time timeformat timeout sets the system inactivity time out timezone vlan sets the VLAN type The context less commands are listed below clea clim enab help host more r clears the event log command history or screen ode to set the interactive CLI mode le allows to login as another user to generate the host table
384. w active stp Incorrect STP settings can adversely affect network performance GE recommends starting with the default STP settings Changing the settings requires a detailed understanding of STP For more information on STP please refer to the IEEE 802 1d standard It is always a good idea to check which mode of STP is active If the proper mode is not active the configuration command stp will not be understood To set the proper mode use the set stp command MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 12 8 SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL STP CHAPTER 12 SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL STP Example 12 3 shows how to enable STP using the above commands The priority command specifies the port or switch level priority When a port s are specified the priority is associated with ports and their value is 0 to 255 If no ports are specified then the switch bridge priority is specified and its value is 0 to 65535 This value is used along with the switch MAC address to determine which switch in the network is the root device Lower values mean higher priority The default value is 32768 12 6 Example 12 3 Enabling STP ML12004show active stp Current Active Mode RSTP RSTP is Disabled L120045stp RROR Invalid Command 11200 Set stp type stp STP Mode set to STP L1200 Stp ML1200 stp Stp enable Successfully set the STP status ML1200 stp Show stp config STP CONFIGURATION Spanning Tree Enabled
385. w igmp IGMP State Enabled ImmediateLeave Disabled Querier Enabled Querier Interval 125 Querier Response Interval 10 Multicasting Unknown Streams Enabled ML1200l igmp set querier enable IGMP querier status is enabled ML1200ligmp show igmp IGMP State Enabled ImmediateLeave Disabled Querier Enabled Querier Interval 125 Querier Response Interval 10 Multicasting Unknown Streams Enabled ML1200ligmp set querier disable IGMP querier status is disabled ML1200 igmp show igmp IGMP State Enabled ImmediateLeave Disabled Querier Disabled Querier Interval 125 Querier Response Interval 10 Multicasting Unknown Streams Enabled ML1200ligmpHE E set qi interval 127 Query interval successfully set ML1200 igmp show igmp IGMP State Enabled ImmediateLeave Disabled Querier Disabled Querier Interval 127 Querier Response Interval 10 Multicasting Unknown Streams Enabled 1200 8 set qri interval 11 Query response interval successfully set continued on next page MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 15 9 IGMP CHAPTER 15 IGMP Configuring IGMP continued ML1200 igmp show igmp IGMP State Enabled ImmediateLeave Disabled Querier Disabled Querier Interval doy Querier Response Interval sehr Multicasting Unknown Streams Enabled ML1200ligmp mcast disable MCAST is disabled ML1200 igmp show igmp IGMP State Enabled ImmediateLeave Disabled Qu
386. ware Updates 1 6 1 Updating Multilink ML1200 Firmware This section describes the process for upgrading firmware on a ML1200 Switch Module There are several ways of updating Firmware on a Multilink ML1200 Serial using the Multilink ML1200 s Console port tftp or through ftp 1 6 2 Selecting the Proper Version The latest version of the firmware is available as a download from the GE Multilin web site To determine the version of firmware currently installed on your Switch proceed as follows Using the EnerVista web interface log into the Switch using the procedure described earlier The firmware version installed on the switch will appear on the lower left corner of the screen EnerVista MultiLink Software toot OOO gt Graphical Display E Administration Configuration Device Ports Logical View 1 3 digg B Muhilin o 1 EnerVista MultiLink Software combined with the MultiLink Model ML2400 ML1600 switches and UR switch module provide power and efficiency in a rnanaged Ethernet platform A full range of industry standard software functions enables the versatile MultiLink products to perform effectively in a wide range of managed LAN Boot Mode manual gt Gateway 0 0 0 0 y IP Address 192 168 100 3 Mac Address 00 20 06 2c 28 c0 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 gt Uptime 0 Days 00 10 55 1 6 3 Updating through the Command Line Use the following procedure to install firmware to the M
387. well as how net mask is used and how default gateways and routers are used in a network Reboot gives an opportunity to save the configuration prior to shutdown For a reboot simply type in the command reboot Note that even though the passwords are not changed they can be changed later ML1200 reboot Proceed on rebooting the switch Y or N Y Do you wish to save current configuration Y or N Y ML1200 The ML1200 forces an answer by prompting with a Y or a N to prevent accidental keystroke errors and loss of work The parameters can be viewed at any time by using the show command The show command will be covered in more detail later in various sections throughout the document The example below illustrates the basic setup parameters You can use show setup or show sysconfig commands to view setup parameters MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION ML1200 show setup Version ML1200 build 2 1 0 Nov 12 2007 11 10 13 MAC Address 00 20 06 27 0a e0 IP Address 3 94 247 41 Subnet Mask 255 255 252 0 Gateway Address 3 94 244 1 CLI Mode Manager System Name ML1200 System Description 6 Port Modular Ethernet Switch System Contact multilin tech ge com System Location Markham Ontario System ObjectId 1 3 6 1 4 1 13248 12 7 ML1200 show sysconfig System Name ML1200 System Contact multilin tech ge com System Location Markham Ontario Boot Mo
388. which will be retained Graphical Display Kill Config Restore Defaults ww E Administration Em E File Mgmt Ping Please check the boxes to retain the configuration System Set Telnet User Mamt Reboot E Configuration P v system gt Port security Access Bridging User Port mirror E O IGMP IPv6 E OLACP Port gt STP RSTP Logs Port gt VLAN gt IGMP GoS E O RADIUS O RSTP SMTP SNMP SNTP E Statistics E O VLAN Access Lacp Version 2 1 When the OK button is pressed the Switch will issue the following warning messages and reboot the switch for it to revert back to the factory default settings with the exceptions of modules opted not to be defaulted Warning You must reboot for changes to take an effect 5 28 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 IP ADDRESSING Switch is rebooting Please wait 60 seconds ur IP ADDRESSING Here is a list of the modules and related settings that can be selected not to default back to factory default settings Name Areas affected System IP Configuration Boot mode User Users settings le g login names passwords Port Port settings Broadcast Protection and QoS settings STP RSTP STP RSTP settings Port Security Port Security settings Port Mirror Port Mirro
389. with good CRC 4294967295 02CA Port 11 Number of bytes received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 02CC Port 11 Number of bytes sent Oto 1 F9 0 4294967295 O2CE Port 11 Number of frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 02D0 Port 11 Number of frames sent 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 02D2 Port 11 Total bytes received 01 1 F9 0 4294967295 0254 Port 11 Total frames received 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 02D6 Port 11 Number of broadcast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 02D8 Port 11 Number of multicast frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 02DA Port 11 Number of frames with CRC 0 to 1 F9 0 error 4294967295 02DC Port 11 Number of oversized frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 02DE Port 11 Number of bad fragments Oto 1 F9 0 received 64 bytes 4294967295 02E0 Port 11 Number of jabber frames 0 to 1 F9 0 received 4294967295 02E2 Port 11 Number of collisions occurred 0 to 1 F9 0 4294967295 02E4 Port 11 Number of late collisions 0 to 1 F9 0 occurred 4294967295 02E6 Port 11 Number of 64 byte frames Oto 1 F9 0 received sent 4294967295 18 16 MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 18 MODBUS PROTOCOL MULTILINK ML1200 MANAG MODBUS PROTOCOL Table 18 1 Modbus memory map Sheet 14 of 23 Address Description Range Step Format Default 02 8 Port 11 Number of 65 to 127 byte Oto 1
390. xecuting a file download the other windows will not be able to execute the command before the file transfer is completed As well if a outbound telnet session is started from the switch through a telnet window then other windows will not be able to execute a command until the telnet session is completed MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL S 7 IP ADDRESSING CHAPTER 5 IP ADDRESSING 5 3 Setting Parameters 5 3 1 Setting Serial Port Parameters v NOTE To be compliant with IT or other policies the console parameters can be changed from the CLI interface This is best done by setting the IP address and then telnet over to the switch Once connected using telnet the serial parameters can be changed If you are using the serial port remember to set the VT 100 emulation software properties to match the new settings The serial port parameters are modified using the set serial command with the following syntax set serial baud lt rate gt data lt 5 6 7 8 gt parity none odd even stop lt 1 1 5 2 gt flowctrl none xonxoff Where rate standard supported baud rates Changing these parameters through the serial port will cause loss of connectivity The terminal software parameters e g HyperTerminal will also have to be changed to match the new settings To see the current settings ofthe serial port use the show serial command to query the serial port settings as illustrated below
391. y and the F650 family of relays have redundant Ethernet ports that allow for automatic switching to their secondary ports when they detect the primary path is broken The MultiLink ML1200 Managed Field Switch can compensate for situations where only the switch receiver fiber cable is broken Upon detection of the broken receiver link the ML1200 will cease sending link pulses through the relay s receive fiber cable thereby allowing the relay to switch to its secondary path MULTILINK ML1200 MANAGED FIELD SWITCH INSTRUCTION MANUAL 9 9 PORT MIRRORING AND SETUP CHAPTER 9 PORT MIRRORING AND SETUP It is recommended to enable the Link Loss Alert LLA feature on ports that are connected to end devices LLA should be disabled for switch ports connected in a ring The Link Loss Alert feature is disabled by default on 100 MB Fiber Optic ports It can be enabled and disabled via the 11a parameter in the setport command as follows setport port port list range 1la lt enable disable gt The following example illustrates how to enable the link loss alert feature Example 9 4 Link loss alert ML1200 device ML1200 devicelJ setport port 3 lla disable ML1200 devicel show port 3 Configuration details of port 3 Port Name JohnDoe Port Link State DOWN Port Type TP Pore Port Admin State Enable Port VLAN ID Ge edi Port Speed 100Mbps half duplex Port Duplex Mode Port Auto negotiation State Enable port STP

GE ML1200 Switch User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents